SEW-EURODRIVE MOVITRAC B frequency inverter System Manual
The MOVITRAC B frequency inverter is a compact and economical drive system designed for a wide range of applications. It offers a variety of features, including a wide voltage range, overload capacity, and speed range. The MOVITRAC B also features a variety of control options, including keypad control, external setpoint selection, and communication interfaces.
advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of
252
Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services MOVITRAC® B Edition 02/2008 16601211 / EN System Manual Color Code System Color code system for catalogs and system manuals Our catalogs and system manuals are identified by a color code system at the back to make it easier to work with these publications. The short designation of the publication is indicated as well. In this way you can immediately recognize the publication even if it is standing on a shelf together with other publications. The following overview shows an exemplary assignment of colors to product groups and products. Mechanics DR-GM 2008 DR gearmotors GSE1 2008 Synchronous servo gearmotors GSE2 2008 Asynchronous servo gearmotors GK 2008 Gear units Electromechanics MOT1 2008 MOT2 2008 DR series AC motors DT/DV/CT/CV series AC motors Explosion-proof drives EXG 2008 Explosion-proof gearmotors EXS 2008 Explosion-proof servo gearmotors EXM 2008 Explosion-proof motors Control cabinet inverters, control technology and HMI MDX 2008 MOVIDRIVE® MC 2008 MOVITRAC® MX 2008 MOVIAXIS® Decentralized technology MM 2008 MOVIMOT® gearmotors DI 2007 Decentralized installation Industrial gear units IGX1 2008 IGX2 2008 X series horizontal industrial gear units X series vertical industrial gear units MG 2008 MOVIGEAR® PLC 2008 MOVI-PLC® HMI 2008 DOP11B® Contents Contents 1 Important Notes................................................................................................... 6 1.1 Structure of the safety notes ....................................................................... 6 1.2 Rights to claim under warranty ................................................................... 6 1.3 Exclusion of liability..................................................................................... 6 2 Safety Notes ........................................................................................................ 7 2.1 General information .................................................................................... 7 2.2 Target group ............................................................................................... 7 2.3 Designated use ........................................................................................... 7 2.4 Transportation, storage............................................................................... 8 2.5 Installation................................................................................................... 8 2.6 Electrical connection ................................................................................... 9 2.7 Safe disconnection...................................................................................... 9 2.8 Operation .................................................................................................... 9 3 System Description MOVITRAC® B................................................................. 10 3.1 MOVITRAC® B – compact, versatile and universal .................................. 10 3.2 System overview MOVITRAC® B ............................................................. 11 3.3 The units at a glance................................................................................. 12 3.4 Functions / features .................................................................................. 13 3.5 MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio..................................................................... 16 4 Technical Data ................................................................................................... 17 4.1 CE marking, UL approval and C-Tick ....................................................... 17 4.2 General technical data .............................................................................. 18 4.3 MOVITRAC® B electronics data ............................................................... 20 4.4 Technical data of MOVITRAC® B ............................................................. 22 4.5 Front option FBG11B keypad ................................................................... 41 4.6 FSC11B communication module ............................................................. 42 4.7 FIO11B analog module ............................................................................. 43 4.8 DBG60B keypad ....................................................................................... 44 4.9 Parameter module UBP11A...................................................................... 47 4.10 MBG11A setpoint control module ............................................................. 48 4.11 UWS11A interface adapter RS-232 / RS-485 for mounting rail ................ 49 4.12 UWS21B interface adapter RS-232/RS-485 ............................................. 50 4.13 USB11A interface adapter USB/RS-485................................................... 50 4.14 BW series braking resistors ...................................................................... 51 4.15 Touch guard BS ........................................................................................ 58 4.16 Mounting PTC braking resistors FKB10B ................................................. 58 4.17 Submounting FKB11/12/13B flat-design resistors .................................... 59 4.18 Support rail mounting FHS11B/12B/13B .................................................. 60 4.19 Line chokes ND ........................................................................................ 61 4.20 NF line filter............................................................................................... 63 4.21 ULF11A folding ferrites ............................................................................. 65 4.22 HD series output chokes........................................................................... 65 4.23 EMC-module FKE12B/13B ....................................................................... 68 4.24 HF output filter .......................................................................................... 69 4.25 Fieldbus connection .................................................................................. 73 4.26 MOVI-PLC®............................................................................................... 83 4.27 UWU52A switched-mode power supply.................................................... 85 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 3 Contents 4 5 Parameters......................................................................................................... 86 5.1 Explanation of the parameters .................................................................. 86 6 Project Planning.............................................................................................. 112 6.1 Schematic procedure .............................................................................. 112 6.2 Options for standard applications ........................................................... 113 6.3 Description of applications ...................................................................... 114 6.4 Speed-torque characteristic curve .......................................................... 115 6.5 Motor selection........................................................................................ 116 6.6 Overload capacity ................................................................................... 118 6.7 Load capacity of the units at low output frequencies .............................. 119 6.8 Selecting the braking resistor.................................................................. 120 6.9 Connecting AC brakemotors................................................................... 124 6.10 Mains and motor connection................................................................... 125 6.11 Multi-motor drive/group drive .................................................................. 132 6.12 Line chokes............................................................................................. 133 6.13 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC ........................................................ 133 6.14 HF output filters....................................................................................... 136 6.15 Electronics cables and signal generation................................................ 139 6.16 External voltage supply DC 24 V ............................................................ 139 6.17 Parameter set switchover ....................................................................... 141 6.18 Priority of the operating statuses and interrelation between control signals ......................................................................................... 142 6.19 PI controller............................................................................................. 143 6.20 Application examples .............................................................................. 146 7 Unit design....................................................................................................... 152 7.1 Size 0XS / 0S / 0L................................................................................... 152 7.2 Size 1 / 2S / 2.......................................................................................... 153 7.3 Size 3 ...................................................................................................... 154 7.4 Size 4 / 5 ................................................................................................. 155 7.5 Unit designation / nameplate .................................................................. 156 8 Installation ....................................................................................................... 157 8.1 Installation notes ..................................................................................... 157 8.2 Installing the optional power components............................................... 163 8.3 UL compliant installation ......................................................................... 167 8.4 Scope of delivery and installation of loose items .................................... 169 8.5 Installing cold plate ................................................................................. 174 8.6 Deactivating EMC capacitors (size 0 only) ............................................. 174 8.7 Wiring diagram........................................................................................ 176 8.8 TF thermistor and TH bimetallic switch ................................................... 177 8.9 Connecting braking resistors BW.. / BW..-T / BW..-P to X3 / X2 ............ 177 8.10 Connecting the brake rectifier ................................................................. 178 8.11 Installing FSC11B / FIO11B.................................................................... 179 8.12 Installing MBG11A speed control module ............................................... 184 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Contents 9 Startup.............................................................................................................. 185 9.1 Brief description of the startup process................................................... 185 9.2 General startup instructions .................................................................... 186 9.3 Preliminary work and resources.............................................................. 187 9.4 Optional keypad FBG11B ....................................................................... 188 9.5 Basic operation of the FBG11B keypad.................................................. 189 9.6 Manual operation with FBG11B speed control module........................... 191 9.7 External setpoint selection ...................................................................... 192 9.8 Startup using the FBG11B keypad ......................................................... 193 9.9 Startup with DBG60B.............................................................................. 195 9.10 Startup with PC and MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio.................................. 202 9.11 Startup for MBG11A speed control module ............................................ 202 9.12 Starting up pumps and fans of non-SEW motors.................................... 203 9.13 Starting the motor ................................................................................... 204 9.14 Parameter list.......................................................................................... 208 10 Operation ......................................................................................................... 219 10.1 Data backup............................................................................................ 219 10.2 Return codes (r-19 ... r-38) ..................................................................... 220 10.3 Status displays........................................................................................ 221 10.4 Unit status codes .................................................................................... 222 10.5 DBG60B keypad ..................................................................................... 223 11 Service / List of Faults .................................................................................... 228 11.1 Unit information ....................................................................................... 228 11.2 List of faults (F-00 ... F-113).................................................................... 230 11.3 SEW electronics service ......................................................................... 233 11.4 Extended storage.................................................................................... 234 12 Address List .................................................................................................... 235 Index................................................................................................................. 244 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 5 Important Notes Structure of the safety notes 1 1 Important Notes 1.1 Structure of the safety notes The safety notes in these operating instructions are structured as follows: SIGNAL WORD! Symbol Nature and source of hazard. Possible consequence(s) if disregarded. • Symbol Example: Measure(s) to avoid the hazard. Signal word Meaning Consequences if disregarded HAZARD! Imminent hazard Severe or fatal injuries WARNING! Possible hazardous situation Severe or fatal injuries CAUTION! Possible hazardous situation Minor injuries STOP! Possible damage to property Damage to the drive system or its environment NOTE Useful information or tip. General hazard Electric shock Simplifies handling of the drive system. 1.2 Rights to claim under warranty Adhering to the operating instructions is a prerequisite for fault-free operation and the fulfillment of any right to claim under warranty. Read the operating instructions before you start working with the unit. Make sure that the operating instructions are available to persons responsible for the system and its operation, as well as to persons who work independently on the unit. 1.3 Exclusion of liability You must comply with the information contained in these operating instructions to ensure safe operation of frequency inverters and to achieve the specified product characteristics and performance requirements. SEW-EURODRIVE assumes no liability for injury to persons or damage to equipment or property resulting from non-observance of these operating instructions. In such cases, any liability for defects is excluded. 6 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Safety Notes General information 2 2 Safety Notes The following basic safety notes are intended to prevent injury to persons and damage to property. The operator must ensure that the basic safety notes are read and observed. Make sure that persons responsible for the system and its operation, as well as persons who work independently on the unit, have read through the operating instructions carefully and understood them. If you are unclear about any of the information in this documentation, or if you require further information, please contact SEWEURODRIVE. 2.1 General information Never install or start up damaged products. Submit a complaint to the shipping company immediately in the event of damage. During operation, drives with this type of enclosure may have live, uninsinuated, and sometimes moving or rotating parts as well as hot surfaces. Removing covers without authorization, improper use as well as incorrect installation or operation may result in severe injuries to persons or damage to property. Refer to the documentation for additional information. 2.2 Target group Only a qualified electrician is authorized to transport, install, startup or service the units (observe IEC 60364 or CENELEC HD 384 or DIN VDE 0100 and IEC 60664 or DIN VDE 0110 as well as national accident prevention guidelines). Qualified electricians in the context of these basic safety notes are persons familiar with installation, assembly, startup and operation of the product who possess the required qualifications. Any activities regarding transportation, storage, operation, and disposal must be carried out by persons who have been instructed appropriately. 2.3 Designated use Frequency inverters are components intended for installation in electrical systems or machines. In case of installation in machines, startup of the drive inverters (meaning the start of proper use) is prohibited until it is determined that the machine meets the requirements stipulated in the EC Directive 98/37/EC (machine directive); observe EN 60204. Startup (i.e. the start of designated use) is only permitted under observance of the EMC (2004/108/EC) directive. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 7 Safety Notes Transportation, storage 2 The frequency inverters comply with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC. The harmonized standards of the EN 61800-5-1/DIN VDE T105 series in connection with EN 60439-1/VDE 0660 part 500 and EN 60146/VDE 0558 are applied to these frequency inverters. Technical data and information on the connection requirements are provided on the nameplate and in the documentation; these must be observed under all circumstances. 2.3.1 Safety functions Frequency inverters from SEW-EURODRIVE may not perform any safety functions unless the inverters are subordinate to other safety systems. Use higher-level safety systems to ensure protection of equipment and personnel. When using the "Safe stop" function, you must observe the following publications: 2.4 • MOVITRAC® B / Safe Disconnection – Conditions • MOVITRAC® B / Safe Disconnection – Applications Transportation, storage You must observe the notes on transportation, storage and proper handling. Observe the climatic conditions as stated in the section "General technical data". 2.5 Installation The units must be installed and cooled according to the regulations and specifications in the corresponding documentation. Protect the frequency inverters from excessive strain. Ensure that components are not deformed and/or insulation spaces are maintained, particularly during transportation. Avoid contact with electronic components and contacts. Frequency inverters contain components that can easily be damaged by electrostatic energy and improper handling. Prevent mechanical damage or destruction of electric components (may pose health risk). The following applications are prohibited unless the unit is explicitly designed for such use: 8 • Use in potentially explosive areas • Use in areas exposed to harmful oils, acids, gases, vapors, dust, radiation, etc. • Use in non-stationary applications which are subject to mechanical vibration and impact loads in excess of the requirements in EN 61800-5-1. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Safety Notes Electrical connection 2.6 2 Electrical connection Observe the applicable national accident prevention guidelines when working on live frequency inverters (e.g. BGV A3). Electrical installation is to be carried out in compliance with pertinent regulations (e.g. cable cross sections, fusing, protective conductor connection). Additional information is contained in the documentation. You will find notes on EMC-compliant installation, such as shielding, grounding, the arrangement of filters and the routing of lines, in the documentation of the frequency inverters. Always observe these instructions, even for frequency inverters bearing the CE marking. The manufacturer of the system or machine is responsible for maintaining the limits established by EMC legislation. Protective measures and protection devices must comply with the regulations in force (e.g. EN 60204 or EN 61800-5-1). Required preventive measure: grounding the unit. 2.7 Safe disconnection The unit meets all requirements for safe disconnection of power and electronic connections in accordance with EN 61800-5-1. All connected circuits must also satisfy the requirements for safe disconnection. 2.8 Operation Systems with integrated frequency inverters must be equipped with additional monitoring and protection devices, as applicable, according to the relevant safety guidelines and regulations, such as legislation governing technical equipment, accident prevention regulations, etc. Changes to frequency inverters using the operating software are permitted. Do not touch live components or power connections immediately after disconnecting the frequency inverters from the supply voltage because there may still be some charged capacitors. Note the respective labels on the frequency inverter. Keep all covers and doors closed during operation. The fact that the status LED and other display elements are no longer illuminated does not indicate that the unit has been disconnected from the mains and no longer carries any voltage. Mechanical blocking or safety functions inside the unit may result in the motor coming to a standstill. Eliminating the cause of the problem or performing a reset may result in the drive re-starting automatically. If, for safety reasons, this is not permitted for the driven machine, disconnect the unit from the mains before correcting the fault. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 9 kVA 3 i 3 f n System Description MOVITRAC® B MOVITRAC® B – compact, versatile and universal P Hz System Description MOVITRAC® B Compact and economical: MOVITRAC® B – the next frequency inverter generation. 3.1 MOVITRAC® B – compact, versatile and universal The percentage of speed-variable AC drives with inverter technology is constantly increasing, and these units offer all options to optimize system and machine concepts to the process sequences in addition to machine-conserving drive technology. The expanse of these different fields of application shows that it is difficult to meet the technological and economic requirements with one universal inverter class. The drive electronics in asynchronous AC motors are separated into standard inverters, for simple applications, e.g. materials handling, and application inverters, for more complex technological applications, e.g. positioning and handling applications. This differentiation of the units allows scaling to different applications while staying with a certain budget. Operation, parameter setting, diagnostics and integration in automation concepts must offer unit-comprehensive and therefore universal engineering and communication support. Engineering tools for project planning, parameter setting and startup as well as availability of communication interfaces (fieldbuses and Industrial Ethernet) offer users a solution-oriented and unit-independent user interface. 10 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B System Description MOVITRAC® B System overview MOVITRAC® B kVA i f n 3 P Hz System overview MOVITRAC® B 3.2 Keypad DBG60B 1x 200 ... 240 VAC Front option keypad FBG11B 3x 200 ... 240 VAC Line choke ND... Analog module FIO11B 3x 380 ... 500 VAC Line filter NF... MOVITRAC® B MC07B...-2B1 MOVITRAC® B MC07B...-....3 Operator terminals DOP Option card: – DFP21B – MOVI-PLC® Front option communication FSC11B Gateway UOH11B Braking resistor BW with submounting option FKB Support rail mounting FHS Interface adapter USB11A, UWS11A, UWS21B EMC module FKE Braking resistor BW... Speed control module MGB11A Output filter HF... Output choke HD... MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio Power supply connection • ND line choke • NF line filter Power connection • HF output filter • HD output choke BW braking resistor Front options • FBG11B keypad • FIO11B analog module • FSC11B communication for connecting (only one option possible): – DBG60B keypad – Gateway UFx / UOH – UWS/USB interface adapter – SBus / RS-485 – DOP operator terminals – MBG11A speed control module System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Option cards • PROFIBUS • MOVI-PLC® controller Installation • FHS support rail mounting • Submounting option for FKB braking resistor • FKE EMC-module MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio software 11 3 kVA i 3.3 f n System Description MOVITRAC® B The units at a glance P Hz The units at a glance Power supply connection 230 V 1-phase 230 V 3-phase 400 V 3-phase 12 Rated output current MOVITRAC® B type 0.25 kW / 0.34 HP AC 1.7 A MC07B0003-2B1-4-00 0.37 kW / 0.50 HP AC 2.5 A MC07B0004-2B1-4-00 0.55 kW / 0.74 HP AC 3.3 A MC07B0005-2B1-4-00 0.75 kW / 1.0 HP AC 4.2 A MC07B0008-2B1-4-00 1.1 kW / 1.5 HP AC 5.7 A MC07B0011-2B1-4-00 1.5 kW / 2.0 HP AC 7.3 A MC07B0015-2B1-4-00 2.2 kW / 3.0 HP AC 8.6 A MC07B0022-2B1-4-00 0.25 kW / 0.34 HP AC 1.7 A MC07B0003-2A3-4-00 0.37 kW / 0.50 HP AC 2.5 A MC07B0004-2A3-4-00 0.55 kW / 0.74 HP AC 3.3 A MC07B0005-2A3-4-00 0.75 kW / 1.0 HP AC 4.2 A MC07B0008-2A3-4-00 1.1 kW / 1.5 HP AC 5.7 A MC07B0011-2A3-4-00 1.5 kW / 2.0 HP AC 7.3 A MC07B0015-2A3-4-00 2.2 kW / 3.0 HP AC 8.6 A MC07B0022-2A3-4-00 3.7 kW / 5.0 HP AC 14.5 A MC07B0037-2A3-4-00 5.5 kW / 7.4 HP AC 22A MC07B0055-2A3-4-00 7.5 kW / 10 HP AC 29 A MC07B0075-2A3-4-00 11 kW / 15 HP AC 42 A MC07B0110-203-4-00 15 kW / 20 HP AC 54 A MC07B0150-203-4-00 22 kW / 30 HP AC 80 A MC07B0220-203-4-00 30 kW / 40 HP AC 95 A MC07B0300-203-4-00 0.25 kW / 0.34 HP AC 1.0 A MC07B0003-5A3-4-00 0.37 kW / 0.50 HP AC 1.6 A MC07B0004-5A3-4-00 0.55 kW / 0.74 HP AC 2.0 A MC07B0005-5A3-4-00/S0 0.75 kW / 1.0 HP AC 2.4 A MC07B0008-5A3-4-00/S0 1.1 kW / 1.5 HP AC 3.1 A MC07B0011-5A3-4-00/S0 1.5 kW / 2.0 HP AC 4.0 A MC07B0015-5A3-4-00/S0 2.2 kW / 3.0 HP AC 5.5 A MC07B0022-5A3-4-00/S0 3.0 kW / 4.0 HP AC 7.0 A MC07B0030-5A3-4-00/S0 Motor power 4.0 kW / 5.4 HP AC 9.5 A MC07B0040-5A3-4-00/S0 5.5 kW / 7.4 HP AC 12.5 A MC07B0055-5A3-4-00 7.5 kW / 10 HP AC 16.0 A MC07B0075-5A3-4-00 11 kW / 15 HP AC 24.0 A MC07B0110-5A3-4-00 15 kW / 20 HP AC 32.0 A MC07B0150-503-4-00 22 kW / 30 HP AC 46.0 A MC07B0220-503-4-00 30 kW / 40 HP AC 60.0 A MC07B0300-503-4-00 37 kW / 50 HP AC 73.0 A MC07B0370-503-4-00 45 kW / 60 HP AC 89.0 A MC07B0450-503-4-00 55 kW / 74 HP AC 105 A MC07B0550-503-4-00 75 kW / 100 HP AC 130 A MC07B0750-503-4-00 Size 0XS 0S 0L 0XS 0S 0L 1 2 3 4 0XS 0S 0L 2S 2 3 4 5 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B System Description MOVITRAC® B Functions / features 3.4 kVA i f n 3 P Hz Functions / features MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters are characterized by the following features: 3.4.1 Unit properties • Wide voltage range: – 230 V units for the voltage range 1 × AC 200 ... 240 V, 50/60 Hz – 230 V units for the voltage range 3 × AC 200 ... 240 V, 50/60 Hz – 400/500 V units for the voltage range 3 × AC 380 ... 500 V, 50/60 Hz • Overload capacity: 125 % IN continuous duty 150 % IN for at least 60 s Maximum 200 % breakaway torque (BG0) • Rated operation up to an ambient temperature ϑ = 50 °C (122 °F), operation up to an ambient temperature ϑ = 60 °C (140 °F) possible with current reduction. • Speed range 0 ... 5500 rpm. • Output frequency range: – VFC: 0 ... 150 Hz – V/f: 0 ... 600 Hz • 4-quadrant capability due to the integrated brake chopper. • Compact unit design for minimum control cabinet space requirement and optimum utilization of control cabinet volume. • Units with the "Safe stop" function: – Unit variant (...-S0): 3 × AC 380 ... 500 V, 0.55 ... 4.0 kW (0.74 ... 5.4 HP) – Standard unit: 3 × AC 380 ... 500 V, 5.5 ... 75 kW (7.4 ... 100 HP) • Integrated EMC line filter to maintain the specified limit classes on the line side / C1/ C2 to EN 61800-3: – Sizes 0 ... 2: C2 without further measures – Sizes 0 ... 5: C1 with corresponding filters / folding ferrites • Configurable inputs / outputs – 1 analog input – 6 binary inputs – 3 binary outputs, including 1 relay output – Optional: 1 additional analog input / 1 additional analog output • Voltage supply and evaluation for TF (PTC temperature sensor) integrated for monitoring the motor temperature. • Integrated evaluation of TH for monitoring the temperature of the motor. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 13 3 kVA i f n System Description MOVITRAC® B Functions / features P Hz • Integrated keypad for displaying setpoints and setting parameters – 5-digit 7-segment display – 9 LEDs for displaying the selected symbols – 6 keys for operation – 1 setpoint generator for speed specification – Parameter set data backup • Braking resistor can be sub-mounted as an option for size 0. • Separable signal terminals. • Size 0: – Separable power terminals and signal terminals – EMC capacitor can be insulated for reduced earth-leakage currents and operation in IT network. – "Cold Plate" installation possible. – Long motor cable length 3.4.2 • Up to size 2S: Operation on MDR regenerative power supply unit possible (see MOVIDRIVE® B documentation). • V/f control or VFC control mode. • Automatic brake rectifier control by the inverter. • Standstill current function for: Control – Rapid start – Heating current for preventing condensation in the motor at low temperatures • Flying start function for synchronizing the inverter to the running motor. • Hoist capability. • DC braking to decelerate the motor in 1Q mode. • Slip compensation for high stationary speed accuracy. • Motor stall protection by sliding current limitation in the field weakening range • Two complete motor parameter sets • Factory setting can be restored. • Parameter lock for protection against changes to parameters. • Protective functions for protection against – Overcurrent – Ground fault – Overload – Overtemperature of the inverter – Overtemperature of the motor (TF/TH) 14 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B System Description MOVITRAC® B Functions / features 3.4.3 kVA i f n 3 P Hz • Speed monitoring and monitoring of the motor and regenerative limit power. • 5 fault memories with all relevant operating data at the moment of the fault. • Standardized operation, parameter setting and identical unit connection technology across all units in the MOVITRAC® B range. • Configurable signal range monitoring (speed). • Energy-saving function for optimizing the magnetization current automatically. Setpoint technology • Motor potentiometer. • External setpoint selections: – 0 ... +10 V (unidirectional and bidirectional) – 0 ... 20 mA – 4 ... 20 mA – –10 V ... +10 V bidirectional with FIO11B 3.4.4 • 6 fixed setpoints. • Frequency input. Optional communication / operation • CAN based system bus (SBus) for networking max. 64 MOVITRAC® B units. A PC, a PLC or a MOVIDRIVE® can be the SBus master. • CANopen Protocol DS301 V4. • RS-485 interface. • Simple parameter setting and startup using optional keypad or MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio software. • Fieldbus interfaces for – PROFIBUS – DeviceNet – INTERBUS – CANopen – Ethernet-based: • EtherCAT • PROFINET (in preparation) • Ethernet/IP (in preparation) System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 15 3 kVA i 3.5 f n System Description MOVITRAC® B MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio P Hz MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio The MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio program includes: • Parameter tree • Startup • SCOPE • Application Builder • Data management The MOVITRAC® B has the following functions: 3.5.1 • Startup • Parameter setting • Visualization / diagnostics SCOPE SCOPE for MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio is an oscilloscope program for SEW inverters. SCOPE allows you to optimize the drives yourself. The inverter records, for example, response functions to setpoint changes in real time. You can transfer this information to the PC and graphically display it. SCOPE shows up to four analog and digital measured variables in differently colored curves. You can scale both the x-axis and the y-axis as required. SCOPE also enables you to record digital input and output signals of the inverter. This means you can record complete program sequences of the higher-level controller and then evaluate them. SCOPE supports simple documentation of the set parameters and the recorded measurement data by providing the following functions: • Save • Meta data • Print The online help functions enable you to quickly get familiar with how to use SCOPE. SCOPE is a multi-document interface (MDI application). This interface lets you observe and analyze several data sets simultaneously. SCOPE displays every new data set in a new window. All settings made for displaying and editing the data record apply to the active window only. 16 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data CE marking, UL approval and C-Tick 4 Technical Data 4.1 CE marking, UL approval and C-Tick 4.1.1 CE-marking kVA i f n 4 P Hz MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters comply with the regulations of the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC. MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters are designed for use as components for installation in machines and systems. They comply with the EMC product standard EN 61800-3 Variable-speed electrical drives. Provided the installation instructions are complied with, they satisfy the relevant requirements for the CE marking for the entire machine/system in which they are installed, on the basis of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC. For detailed information on EMC compliant installation, refer to the publication "Electromagnetic Compatibility in Drive Engineering" from SEW-EURODRIVE. Compliance with limit classes C2 and C1 has been tested on a specified test setup. SEW-EURODRIVE can provide detailed information on request. The CE-mark on the nameplate indicates conformity with the low voltage directive 73/ 23/EEC. We can provide a declaration of conformity on request. 4.1.2 UL approval / CSA / GOST-R certificate / C-Tick UL and cUL approval (USA) has been granted for the following MOVITRAC® B units: • 230 V / single-phase • 230 V / 3-phase • 400/500 V / 3-phase (0.25 ... 45 kW / 0.34 ... 60 HP) cUL approval has been applied for the other units. cUL is equivalent to CSA approval. The GOST-R certificate (Russia) is approved for the MOVITRAC® B unit series. C-Tick approval has been granted for the entire MOVITRAC® B series. C-Tick certifies conformity with ACMA (Australian Communications and Media Authority) standards. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 17 4 kVA i 4.2 f n Technical Data General technical data P Hz General technical data The following technical data applies to all MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters independent of size and power. MOVITRAC® B All sizes Interference immunity Complies with EN 61800-3 Interference emission with EMC-compliant installation According to limit value class1) • Sizes 0 ... 2: C2 without further measures • Sizes 0 ... 5: C1 with corresponding filters / folding ferrites C1/C2 to EN 61800-3 Leakage current > 3.5 mA • Ambient temperature ϑA (up to 60 °C (140 °F) with current reduction) • • 18 230 V, 0.25 ... 2.2 kW (0.34 ... 3.0 HP) / 400/500 V, 0.25 ... 4.0 kW (0.34 ... 5.4 HP) With overload capacity (max. 150% for 60 s): ID = 100 % IN / fPWM = 4 kHz: -10 °C ... +40 °C (14 °F ... 104 °F) Without high overload capacity: ID = 100 % IN / fPWM = 4 kHz: -10 °C ... +50 °C (14 °F ... 122 °F) ID = 100 % IN / fPWM = 8 kHz: -10 °C ... +40 °C (14 °F ... 104 °F) ID = 125 % IN / fPWM= 4 kHz: -10 °C ... +40 °C (14 °F ... 104 °F) 3 × 230 V, 3.7 ... 30 kW (5.0 ... 40 HP) / 400/500 V, 5.5 ... 75 kW (7.4 ... 100 HP) With overload capacity (max. 150% for 60 s): ID = 100 % IN / fPWM = 4 kHz: 0 °C ... +40 °C (32 °F ... 104 °F) Without overload capacity: ID = 100 % IN / fPWM = 4 kHz: 0 °C ... +50 °C (32 °F ... 122 °F) ID = 100 % IN / fPWM = 8 kHz: 0 °C ... +40 °C (32 °F ... 104 °F) ID = 125 % IN / fPWM = 4 kHz: 0 °C ... +40 °C (32 °F ... 104 °F) Mounting plate with "cold plate" < 70°C (+158 °F) Derating ambient temperature (current reduction) 2.5 % IN per K at 40 °C ... 50 °C (104 °C ... 122 °F) 3 % IN per K at 50 °C ... 60 °C (122 °F ... 140 °F) Climate class EN 60721-3-3, class 3K3 Storage temperature Transportation temperature -25 °C ... +75 °C (–13 °F ... 167 °F) -25 °C ... +75 °C (–13 °F ... 167 °F) Cooling type 230 V: ≤ 0.75 kW (1.0 HP) 400/500 V: ≤ 1.1 kW (1.5 HP) Forced cooling: 230 V: ≥ 1.1 kW (1.5 HP) (temperature controlled fan, 400/500 V: ≥ 1.5 kW (3.0 HP) Response threshold 45 °C (113 °F]) Degree of protection EN 60529 (NEMA1) Sizes 0 ... 3: IP20 Sizes 4 ... 5 power connections: • IP00 • With the supplied Plexiglas cover mounted and mounted shrinking tube (not supplied) IP10 Operating mode Continuous duty Self-cooling: Overvoltage category III according to IEC 60664-1 (VDE 0110-1) Mains voltage tolerance EN 50160: ±10 % Pollution class 2 according to IEC 60664-1 (VDE 0110-1) System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data General technical data MOVITRAC® B All sizes Installation altitude Up to h ≤ 1000 m (3281 ft) without restrictions. At h ≥ 1000 m (3281 ft), the following restrictions apply: • from 1,000 m (3281 ft) to max. 4000 m (13120 ft): – IN reduction by 1% per 100 m (328 ft) • kVA i f n 4 P Hz from 2000 m (6562 ft) to max. 4000 m (13120 ft): – AC 230 V units: Reduction of the rated mains voltage Vsupply by AC 3 V per 100 m (328 ft) – AC 500 V units: Reduction of the rated mains voltage Vsupply by AC 6 V per 100 m (328 ft) Over 2000 m (6562 ft) only overvoltage class 2, external measures are required for overvoltage class 3. Overvoltage classes according to DIN VDE 0110-1. Dimensioning According to DIN ISO 276-v Size 0: Restrictions for continuous duty with 125 % IN • • • • Maximum ambient temperature ϑA: 40 °C (104 °F) Maximum rated mains voltage Vsupply: 400 V No DIN rail mounting / submounting resistor With 1 × 230 V: Provide line choke ND 1) Electrical installation in compliance with applicable regulations is necessary for maintaining the EMC limit value class. Comply with the installation notes. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 19 4 kVA i 4.3 f n P Hz MOVITRAC® B electronics data Function Terminal Designation Setpoint input1) (differential input) X10:1 X10:2 X10:3 REF1 AI11 (+) AI12 (–) X10:4 GND Binary inputs X12:1 X12:2 X12:3 X12:4 X12:5 X12.6 DI00 DI01 DI02 DI03 DI04 DI05TF Supply voltage for TF X12:7 VOTF Special characteristics for TF according to DIN EN 60947-8 / trigger value 3 k Auxiliary voltage output / external voltage supply2) X12:8 24VIO Auxiliary supply output: V = DC 24 V, current carrying capacity Imax = 50 mA External voltage supply: V = DC 24 V –15 % / +20 % to EN 61131-2 See section Project planning/external DC 24 V voltage supply. Reference terminal X12:9 GND Reference potential for binary and analog signals, PE potential Binary outputs X13:1 X13:2 X13:3 X13:4 GND DO02 DO03 GND X13:5 X13:6 X13:7 DO01-C DO01-NO DO01-NC Relay output 20 Technical Data MOVITRAC® B electronics data Default Data +10 V, RLmin = 3 k 0 ... +10 V (Ri > 200 k) 0 ... 20 mA / 4 ... 20 mA (Ri = 250 ), 10 bit resolution, sampling time 1 ms GND = Reference potential for binary and analog signals, PE potential Fault reset CW/stop CCW/stop Enable/stop n11/n21 n12/n22 Brake released Ready Ri = 3 k, IE = 10 mA, sampling time 5 ms, PLC compatible Signal level according to EN 61131-2 type 1 or 3: • +11 ... +30 V → 1 / contact made • –3 ... +5 V → 0 / contact open • X12:2 / DI01 with fixed assignment CW/Stop • X12:5 / DI04 can be used as frequency input • X12:6 / DI05 can be used as TF input PLC compatible, response time 5 ms, Imax DO02 = 150 mA, Imax DO03 = 50 mA, Short-circuit proof, protected against external voltage up to 30 V GND = Reference potential for binary and analog signals, PE potential Shared relay contact NO contact NC contact Load capacity: Vmax = 30 V, Imax = 800 mA System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data MOVITRAC® B electronics data Default kVA i f n 4 P Hz Function Terminal Designation Data Safety contact X17:1 DGND: Reference potential for X17:3 X17:2 VO24: : VOUT = DC 24 V, only to supply X17:4 of the same unit; it cannot be used to supply other units. X17:3 SOV24: Reference potential for DC+24 V input "Safe stop" (safety contact) X17:4 SVI24: DC+24 V input "Safe stop" (safety contact) Permitted cable cross section One core per terminal: 0.08...1.5 mm2 (AWG 28...16) Two cores per terminal: 0.25 ... 1.0 mm2(AWG 23...17) Power consumption X17:4 Size 0: 3 W Size 1: 5 W Size 2, 2S: 6 W Size 3: 7.5 W Size 4: 8 W Size 5: 10 W Input capacitance X17:4 Size 0: 27 μF Sizes 1..0.5: 270 μF Time for restart Time to inhibit output stage tA = 200 ms tS = 200 ms Signal level DC +19.2 V...+30 V = "1" = Contact closed DC –30 V...+5 V = "0" = Contact open Terminal response times Binary input and output terminals are updated every 5 ms Max. cable cross-section 1.5 mm2 (AWG15) without conductor end sleeves 1.0 mm2 (AWG17) with conductor end sleeves 1) If the setpoint input is not used, it should be set to GND. Otherwise a measured input voltage of –1 V ... +1 V is set. 2) The MC07B...-S0 unit type must always be supplied with external voltage. 4.3.1 DC 24 V power demand for 24 V backup mode Size 0 MC07B...-00 Basic unit power demand1) DBG60B FIO11B Fieldbus option2)3) DHP11B3) 1W 2W 3W 4.5 W 5W 0 MC07B...-S0 12 W 1, 2S, 2 17 W 3 23 W 4, 5 25 W 1) FBG11B, FSC11B (UWS11A/USB11A) included. Take account of the additional load of the binary inputs with 2.4 W per 100 mA. 2) Fieldbus options are: DFP21B, DFD11B, DFE11B, ... 3) These options must always be externally supplied. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 21 4 kVA i f n Technical Data Technical data of MOVITRAC® B P Hz 4.4 Technical data of MOVITRAC® B 4.4.1 Overview MOVITRAC® B 400 / 500 V 0XS 230 V 0S 0XS 0L 0S 0L 1 2 2 2S 3 4 3 4 5 Power supply connection 400 / 500 V / 3-phase Size Power [kW / HP] 0XS 0S 0L 2S 2 3 4 5 0.25 / 0.34 0.37 / 0.50 0.55 / 0.74 0.75 / 1.0 1.1 / 1.5 1.5 / 2.0 2.2 / 3.0 3.0 / 4.0 4.0 / 5.4 5.5 / 7.4 7.5 / 10 11 / 15 15 / 20 22 / 30 30 / 40 37 / 50 45 / 60 55 / 74 75 / 100 Power supply connection 230 V / 1-phase Size Power [kW / HP] 0XS 0S 0L 0.25 / 0.34 0.37 / 0.50 0.55 / 0.74 0.75 / 1.0 1.1 / 1.5 1.5 / 2.0 2.2 / 3.0 Power supply connection 230 V / 3-phase Size Power [kW / HP] 22 0XS 0.25 / 0.34 0.37 / 0.50 0S 0L 1 2 3 4 0.55 / 0.74 0.75 / 1.0 1.1 / 1.5 1.5 / 2.0 2.2 / 3.0 3.7 / 5.0 5.5 / 7.4 7.5 / 10 11 / 15 15 / 20 22 / 30 30 / 40 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B kVA Technical Data Technical data of MOVITRAC® B n 4 P Hz AC 400 / 500 V / 3-phase / size 0XS / 0.25 ... 0.37 kW / 0.34 ... 0.50 HP 163.5 (6.437) 54.5 (2.15) 49.5 (1.95) 149 (5.87) 285 (11.2) 196 (7.72) 220 (8.66) 6 (0.2) 185 (7.28) 4.4.2 i f 6 (0.2) 159.5 (6.280) MOVITRAC® MC07BB (3-phase supply system) Part number 0003-5A3-4-00 0004-5A3-4-00 828 515 2 828 516 0 INPUT Rated mains voltage Vsupply 3 × AC 380 ... 500 V Rated mains frequency fsupply 50 / 60 Hz ± 5% Rated mains current, 100 % operation Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply Isupply 125 AC 0.9 A AC 1.1 A AC 1.4 A AC 1.8 A OUTPUT Output voltage UA Recommended motor power 100 % operation Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot PMot 125 Rated output current 100 % operation Rated output current 125 % operation 3 × 0 ... Vsupply 0.25 kW / 0.34 HP 0.37 kW / 0.50 HP 0.37 kW / 0.50 HP 0.55 kW / 0.74 HP IN IN 125 AC 1.0 A AC 1.3 A AC 1.6 A AC 2.0 A Apparent output power 100 % operation Apparent output power 125 % operation SN SN 125 0.7 kVA 0.9 kVA 1.1 kVA 1.4 kVA Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 quadrant operation) RBW_min 68 GENERAL INFORMATION Power loss 100 % operation Power loss 125 % operation PV PV 125 Current limitation 30 W 35 W 35 W 40 W 150 % IN for at least 60 seconds Terminal cross section / tightening torque Terminals 4 mm2 / AWG12 / 0.5 Nm / 4 lb in Dimensions W×H×D 54.5 × 185 × 163.5 mm / 2.15 × 7.28 × 6.437 in Weight m System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 1.3 kg / 2.9 lb 23 kVA i f n Technical Data Technical data of MOVITRAC® B P Hz 4.4.3 AC 400 / 500 V / 3-phase / size 0S / 0.55 ... 1.5 kW / 0.74 ... 2.0 HP 80 (3.1) 163.5 (6.437) 70 (2.8) 149 (5.87) 285 (11.2) 196 (7.72) 220 (8.66) 6 (0.2) 185 (7.28) 4 6 (0.2) 159.5 (6.280) MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) Part number, standard unit (-00) Part number "Safe stop" (-S0)1) 0005-5A3-4x0 0008-5A3-4x0 0011-5A3-4x0 0015-5A3-4x0 828 517 9 828 995 6 828 518 7 828 996 4 828 519 5 828 997 2 828 520 9 828 998 0 INPUT Rated mains voltage Vsupply 3 × AC 380 ... 500 V Rated mains frequency fsupply 50 / 60 Hz ± 5% Rated mains current, 100 % operation Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply Isupply 125 AC 1.8 A AC 2.3 A AC 2.2 A AC 2.6 A AC 2.8 A AC 3.5 A AC 3.6 A AC 4.5 A OUTPUT Output voltage UA Recommended motor power 100 % operation PMot Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot 125 3 × 0 ... Vsupply 0.55 kW / 0.74 HP 0.75 kW / 1.0 HP 0.75 kW / 1.0 HP 1.1 kW / 1.5 HP 1.1 kW / 1.5 HP 1.5 kW / 2.0 HP 1.5 kW / 2.0 HP 2.2 kW / 3.0 HP Rated output current 100 % operation Rated output current 125 % operation IN IN 125 AC 2.0 A AC 2.5 A AC 2.4 A AC 3.0 A AC 3.1 A AC 3.9 A AC 4.0 A AC 5.0 A Apparent output power 100 % operation Apparent output power 125 % operation SN SN 125 1.4 kVA 1.7 kVA 1.7 kVA 2.1 kVA 2.1 kVA 2.7 kVA 2.8 kVA 3.5 kVA Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 quadrant operation) RBW_min 50 W 60 W 60 W 75 W 68 GENERAL INFORMATION Power loss 100 % operation Power loss 125 % operation PV PV 125 40 W 45 W Current limitation 45 W 50 W 150 % IN for at least 60 seconds Terminal cross section / tightening torque Terminals Dimensions W×H× D Weight m 4 mm2 / AWG12 / 0.5 Nm / 4 lb in 80 × 185 × 163.5 mm / 3.1 × 7.28 × 6.437 in 1.5 kg / 3.3 lb 1) The MC07B...-S0 unit type must always be supplied with external voltage. 24 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data Technical data of MOVITRAC® B i f n 4 P Hz AC 400 / 500 V / 3-phase / size 0L / 2.2 ... 4.0 kW / 3.0 ... 5.4 HP 80 (3.1) 163.5 (6.437) 70 (2.8) 149 (5.87) 373.5 (14.70) 284.5 (11.20) 308.5 (12.15) 6 (0.2) 273.5 (10.77) 4.4.4 kVA 6 (0.2) 159.5 (6.280) MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) 0022-5A3-4-x0 0030-5A3-4-x0 0040-5A3-4-x0 828 521 7 828 999 9 828 522 5 829 000 8 828 523 3 829 001 6 Part number, standard unit (-00) Part number "Safe stop" (-S0)1) INPUT Rated mains voltage Vsupply 3 × AC 380 ... 500 V Rated mains frequency fsupply 50 / 60 Hz ± 5% Rated mains current, 100 % operation Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply Isupply 125 AC 5.0 A AC 6.2 A AC 6.3 A AC 7.9 A AC 8.6 A AC 10.7 A OUTPUT Output voltage UA Recommended motor power 100 % operation Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot PMot 125 Rated output current 100 % operation Rated output current 125 % operation 3 × 0 ... Vsupply 2.2 kW / 3.0 HP 3.0 kW / 4.0 HP 3.0 kW / 4.0 HP 4.0 kW / 5.4 HP 4.0 kW / 5.4 HP 5.5 kW / 7.4 HP IN IN 125 AC 5.5 A AC 6.9 A AC 7.0 A AC 8.8 A AC 9.5 A AC 11.9 A Apparent output power 100 % operation Apparent output power 125 % operation SN SN 125 3.8 kVA 4.8 kVA 4.8 kVA 6.1 kVA 6.6 kVA 8.2 kVA Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 quadrant operation) RBW_min 68 GENERAL INFORMATION Power loss 100 % operation Power loss 125 % operation 80 W 95 W PV PV 125 Current limitation 95 W 120 W 125 W 180 W 150 % IN for at least 60 seconds Terminal cross section / tightening torque Terminals 4 mm2 / AWG12 / 0.5 Nm / 4 lb in Dimensions W×H×D 80 × 273.5 × 163.5 mm / 3.1 × 10.77 × 6.437 in Weight m 2.1 kg / 4.6 lb 1) The MC07B...-S0 unit type must always be supplied with external voltage. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 25 kVA i f n Technical Data Technical data of MOVITRAC® B P Hz AC 400 / 500 V / 3-phase / size 2S / 5.5 ... 7.5 kW / 7.4 ... 10 HP 105 (4.13) 238 (9.37) 70 (2.8) 234 (9.21) 325 (12.8) 4.4.5 335 (13.2) 4 7 (0.3) MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) Part number 0055-5A3-4-00 0075-5A3-4-00 828 524 1 828 526 8 INPUT Rated mains voltage Vsupply 3 × AC 380 ... 500 V Rated mains frequency fsupply 50 / 60 Hz ± 5% Rated mains current, 100 % operation Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply Isupply 125 AC 11.3 A AC 14.1 A AC 14.4 A AC 18.0 A OUTPUT Output voltage UA Recommended motor power 100 % operation Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot PMot 125 Rated output current 100 % operation Rated output current 125 % operation 3 × 0 ... Vsupply 5.5 kW / 7.4 HP 7.5 kW / 10 HP 7.5 kW / 10 HP 11 kW / 15 HP IN IN 125 AC 12.5 A AC 15.6 A AC 16 A AC 20 A Apparent output power 100 % operation Apparent output power 125 % operation SN SN 125 8.7 kVA 10.8 kVA 11.1 kVA 13.9 kVA Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 quadrant operation) RBW_min 47 GENERAL INFORMATION Power loss 100 % operation Power loss 125 % operation PV PV 125 Current limitation 26 220 W 290 W 290 W 370 W 150 % IN for at least 60 seconds Terminal cross section / tightening torque Terminals 4 mm2 / AWG12 / 1.5 Nm / 13 lb Dimensions W×H×D 105 × 335 × 238 mm / 4.13 × 13.2 × 9.37 in Weight m 5.0 kg / 11 lb System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data Technical data of MOVITRAC® B i f n 4 P Hz AC 400 / 500 V / 3-phase / size 2 / 11 kW / 15 HP 225 (8.86) 335 (13.2) 229 (9.02) 105 (4.13) 315 (12.4) 130 (5.12) 300 (11.8) 4.4.6 kVA 6.5 (0.26) MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) 0110-5A3-4-00 Part number 828 527 6 INPUT Rated mains voltage Vsupply 3 × AC 380 ... 500 V Rated mains frequency fsupply 50 / 60 Hz ± 5% Rated mains current, 100 % operation Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply Isupply 125 AC 21.6 A AC 27.0 A OUTPUT Output voltage UA 3 × 0 ... Vsupply Recommended motor power 100 % operation Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot PMot 125 11 kW / 15 HP 15 kW / 20 HP Rated output current 100 % operation Rated output current 125 % operation IN IN 125 AC 24 A AC 30 A Apparent output power 100 % operation Apparent output power 125 % operation SN SN 125 16.6 kVA 20.8 kVA Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 quadrant operation) RBW_min 22 GENERAL INFORMATION Power loss 100 % operation Power loss 125 % operation PV PV 125 Current limitation 400 W 500 W 150 % IN for at least 60 seconds Terminal cross section / tightening torque Terminals 4 mm2 / AWG12 / 1.5 Nm / 5.90 kg in Dimensions W×H×D 130 × 335 × 229 mm / 5.12 × 13.2 × 9.02 in Weight m System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 6.6 kg / 15 lb 27 4 kVA i f n Technical Data Technical data of MOVITRAC® B P Hz 4.4.7 AC 400 / 500 V / 3-phase / size 3 / 15 ... 30 kW / 20 ... 40 HP 251 (9.88) 247 (9.72) 445 (17.5) 465 (18.3) 200 (7.87) 105 (4.13) 7 (0.3) MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) Part number 0150-503-4-00 0220-503-4-00 0300-503-4-00 828 528 4 828 529 2 828 530 6 INPUT Rated mains voltage Vsupply 3 × AC 380 ... 500 V Rated mains frequency fsupply 50 / 60 Hz ± 5% Rated mains current, 100 % operation Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply Isupply 125 AC 28.8 A AC 36.0 A AC 41.4 A AC 51.7 A AC 54.0 A AC 67.5 A OUTPUT Output voltage UA Recommended motor power 100 % operation Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot PMot 125 Rated output current 100 % operation Rated output current 125 % operation 3 × 0 ... Vsupply 15 kW / 20 HP 22 kW / 30 HP 22 kW / 30 HP 30 kW / 40 HP 30 kW / 40 HP 37 kW / 50 HP IN IN 125 AC 32 A AC 40 A AC 46 A AC 57.5 A AC 60 A AC 75 A Apparent output power 100 % operation Apparent output power 125 % operation SN SN 125 22.2 kVA 27.7 kVA 31.9 kVA 39.8 kVA 41.6 kVA 52.0 kVA Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 quadrant operation) RBW_min 15 12 GENERAL INFORMATION Power loss 100 % operation Power loss 125 % operation PV PV 125 550 W 690 W Current limitation Terminal cross section / tightening torque 750 W 940 W 950 W 1250 W 150 % IN for at least 60 seconds Terminals 2 6 mm / AWG10 10 mm2 / AWG8 16 mm2 / AWG6 3.5 Nm / 31 lb in 28 Dimensions W×H×D Weight m 200 × 465 × 251 mm / 7.87 × 18.3 × 9.88 in 15 kg / 33 lb System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B kVA Technical Data Technical data of MOVITRAC® B 4.4.8 i f n 4 P Hz AC 400 / 500 V / 3-phase / size 4 / 37 ... 45 kW / 50 ... 60 HP 280 (11.0) 140 (5.51) 499 (19.6) 522 (20.6) 250 (9.84) 246 (9.69) 7 (0.3) MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) Part number 0370-503-4-00 0450-503-4-00 828 531 4 828 532 2 INPUT Rated mains voltage Vsupply Rated mains frequency fsupply Rated mains current, 100 % operation Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply Isupply 125 3 × AC 380 ... 500 V 50 / 60 Hz ± 5% AC 65.7 A AC 81.9 A AC 80.1 A AC 100.1 A OUTPUT Output voltage UA Recommended motor power 100 % operation Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot PMot 125 Rated output current 100 % operation Rated output current 125 % operation 3 × 0 ... Vsupply 37 kW / 50 HP 45 kW / 60 HP 45 kW / 60 HP 55 kW / 74 HP IN IN 125 AC 73 A AC 91.3 A AC 89 A AC 111.3 A Apparent output power 100 % operation Apparent output power 125 % operation SN SN 125 50.6 kVA 63.2 kVA 61.7 kVA 77.1 kVA Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 quadrant operation) RBW_min 6 GENERAL INFORMATION Power loss 100 % operation Power loss 125 % operation PV PV 125 Current limitation Terminal cross section / tightening torque 1200 W 1450 W 1400 W 1820 W 150 % IN for at least 60 seconds Terminals 25 mm2 / AWG4 35 mm2 / AWG2 14 Nm / 120 lb in Dimensions W×H×D Weight m System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 280 × 522 × 250 mm / 11.0 × 20.6 × 9.84 in 27 kg / 60 lb 29 4 kVA i f n Technical Data Technical data of MOVITRAC® B P Hz 4.4.9 AC 400 / 500 V / 3-phase / size 5 / 55 ... 75 kW / 74 ... 100 HP 280 (11.0) 330 (13.0) 610 (24.0) 590 (23.2) 140 (5.51) 7 (0.3) MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) Part number 0550-503-4-00 0750-503-4-00 829 527 1 829 529 8 INPUT Rated mains voltage Vsupply 3 × AC 380 ... 500 V Rated mains frequency fsupply 50 / 60 Hz ± 5% Rated mains current, 100 % operation Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply Isupply 125 AC 94.5 A AC 118.1 A AC 117 A AC 146.3 A OUTPUT Output voltage UA Recommended motor power 100 % operation Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot PMot 125 Rated output current 100 % operation Rated output current 125 % operation 3 × 0 ... Vsupply 55 kW / 74 HP 75 kW / 100 HP 75 kW / 100 HP 90 kW / 120 HP IN IN 125 AC 105 A AC131 A AC 130 A AC 162 A Apparent output power 100 % operation Apparent output power 125 % operation SN SN 125 73.5 kVA 90.8 kVA 91.0 kVA 112.2 kVA Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 quadrant operation) RBW_min 6 4 1700 W 2020 W 2000 W 2300 W GENERAL INFORMATION Power loss 100 % operation Power loss 125 % operation PV PV 125 Current limitation 150 % IN for at least 60 seconds Terminal cross section / tightening torque Terminals Dimensions W×H×D Weight m 35 mm2 / AWG2 50 mm2 / AWG0 14 Nm / 120 lb in 30 280 × 610 × 330 mm / 11.0 × 24.0 × 13.0 in 35 kg / 77 lb System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B kVA Technical Data Technical data of MOVITRAC® B i f n 4 P Hz 4.4.10 AC 230 V / 1-phase / size 0XS / 0.25 ... 0.37 kW / 0.34 ... 0.50 HP 163.5 (6.437) 49.5 (1.95) 149 (5.87) 285 (11.2) 185 (7.28) 54.5 (2.15) 196 (7.72) 220 (8.66) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 159.5 (6.280) MOVITRAC® MC07B (1-phase supply system) Part number 0003-2B1-4-00 0004-2B1-4-00 828 491 1 828 493 8 INPUT Rated mains voltage Vsupply 1 × AC 200 ... 240 V Rated mains frequency fsupply 50 / 60 Hz ± 5% Rated mains current, 100 % operation Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply Isupply 125 AC 4.3 A AC 5.5 A AC 6.1 A AC 7.5 A OUTPUT Output voltage UA Recommended motor power 100 % operation Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot PMot 125 Rated output current 100 % operation Rated output current 125 % operation 3 × 0 ... Vsupply 0.25 kW / 0.34 HP 0.37 kW / 0.50 HP 0.37 kW / 0.50 HP 0.55 kW / 0.74 HP IN IN 125 AC 1.7 A AC 2.1 A AC 2.5 A AC 3.1 A Apparent output power 100 % operation Apparent output power 125 % operation SN SN 125 0.7 kVA 0.9 kVA 1.0 kVA 1.3 kVA Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 quadrant operation) RBW_min 27 GENERAL INFORMATION Power loss 100 % operation Power loss 125 % operation PV PV 125 Current limitation 30 W 35 W 35 W 45 W 150 % IN for at least 60 seconds Terminal cross section / tightening torque Terminals 4 mm2 / AWG12 / 0.5 Nm / 4 lb in Dimensions W×H×D 54.5 × 185 × 163.5 mm / 2.15 × 7.28 × 6.437 in Weight m System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 1.3 kg / 2.9 lb 31 4 kVA i f n Technical Data Technical data of MOVITRAC® B P Hz 4.4.11 AC 230 V / 1-phase / size 0S / 0.55 ... 0.75 kW / 0.74 ... 1.0 HP 163.5 (6.437) 70 (2.8) 149 (5.87) 285 (11.2) 185 (7.28) 80 (3.1) 196 (7.72) 220 (8.66) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 159.5 (6.280) MOVITRAC® MC07B (1-phase supply system) Part number 0005-2B1-4-00 0008-2B1-4-00 828 494 6 828 495 4 INPUT Rated mains voltage Vsupply 1 × AC 200 ... 240 V Rated mains frequency fsupply 50 / 60 Hz ± 5% Rated mains current, 100 % operation Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply Isupply 125 AC 8.5 A AC 10.2 A AC 9.9 A AC 11.8 A OUTPUT Output voltage UA Recommended motor power 100 % operation Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot PMot 125 Rated output current 100 % operation Rated output current 125 % operation 3 × 0 ... Vsupply 0.55 kW / 0.74 HP 0.75 kW / 1.0 HP 0.75 kW / 1.0 HP 1.1 kW / 1.5 HP IN IN 125 AC 3.3 A AC 4.1 A AC 4.2 A AC 5.3 A Apparent output power 100 % operation Apparent output power 125 % operation SN SN 125 1.4 kVA 1.7 kVA 1.7 kVA 2.1 kVA Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 quadrant operation) RBW_min 27 GENERAL INFORMATION Power loss 100 % operation Power loss 125 % operation PV PV 125 Current limitation 32 45 W 50 W 50 W 65 W 150 % IN for at least 60 seconds Terminal cross section / tightening torque Terminals 4 mm2 / AWG12 / 0.5 Nm / 4 lb in Dimensions W×H×D 80 × 185 × 163.5 mm / 3.1 × 7.28× 6.437 in Weight m 1.5 kg / 3.3 lb System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data Technical data of MOVITRAC® B kVA i f n 4 P Hz 4.4.12 AC 230 V / 1-phase / size 0L / 1.1 ... 2.2 kW / 1.5 ... 3.0 HP 163.5 (6.437) 70 (2.8) 149 (5.87) 373.5 (14.70) 273.5 (10.77) 80 (3.1) 284.5 (11.20) 308.5 (12.15) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 159.5 (6.280) MOVITRAC® MC07B (1-phase supply system) Part number 0011-2B1-4-00 0015-2B1-4-00 0022-2B1-4-00 828 496 2 828 497 0 828 498 9 INPUT Rated mains voltage Vsupply 1 × AC 200 ... 240 V Rated mains frequency fsupply 50 / 60 Hz ± 5% Rated mains current, 100 % operation Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply Isupply 125 AC 13.4 A AC 16.8 A AC 16.7 A AC 20.7 A AC 19.7 A AC 24.3 A 1.1 kW / 1.5 HP 1.5 kW / 2.0 HP 1.5 kW / 2.0 HP 2.2 kW / 3.0 HP 2.2 kW / 3.0 HP 3.0 kW / 4.0 HP OUTPUT 3 × 0 ... Vsupply Output voltage UA Recommended motor power 100 % operation Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot PMot 125 Rated output current 100 % operation Rated output current 125 % operation IN IN 125 AC 5.7 A AC 7.1 A AC 7.3 A AC 9.1 A AC 8.6 A AC 10.8 A Apparent output power 100 % operation Apparent output power 125 % operation SN SN 125 2.3 kVA 2.9 kVA 3.0 kVA 3.7 kVA 3.5 kVA 4.3 kVA Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 quadrant operation) RBW_min 27 GENERAL INFORMATION Power loss 100 % operation Power loss 125 % operation PV PV 125 Current limitation 70 W 90 W 90 W 110 W 105 W 132 W 150 % IN for at least 60 seconds Terminal cross section / tightening torque Terminals 4 mm2 / AWG12 / 0.5 Nm / 4 lb in Dimensions W×H×D 80 × 273.5 × 163.5 mm / 3.1 × 10.77 × 6.437 in Weight m System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 2.2 kg / 4.9 lb 33 4 kVA i f n Technical Data Technical data of MOVITRAC® B P Hz 4.4.13 AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 0XS / 0.25 ... 0.37 kW / 0.34 ... 0.50 HP 163.5 (6.437) 49.5 (1.95) 149 (5.87) 285 (11.2) 185 (7.28) 54.5 (2.15) 196 (7.72) 220 (8.66) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 159.5 (6.280) MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) Part number 0003-2A3-4-00 0004-2A3-4-00 828 499 7 828 500 4 INPUT Rated mains voltage Vsupply 3 × AC 200 ... 240 V Rated mains frequency fsupply 50 / 60 Hz ± 5% Rated mains current, 100 % operation Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply Isupply 125 AC 1.6 A AC 1.9 A AC 2.0 A AC 2.4 A OUTPUT Output voltage UA Recommended motor power 100 % operation Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot PMot 125 Rated output current 100 % operation Rated output current 125 % operation 3 × 0 ... Vsupply 0.25 kW / 0.34 HP 0.37 kW / 0.50 HP 0.37 kW / 0.50 HP 0.55 kW / 0.74 HP IN IN 125 AC 1.7 A AC 2.1 A AC 2.5 A AC 3.1 A Apparent output power 100 % operation Apparent output power 125 % operation SN SN 125 0.7 kVA 0.9 kVA 1.0 kVA 1.3 kVA Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 quadrant operation) RBW_min 27 GENERAL INFORMATION Power loss 100 % operation Power loss 125 % operation PV PV 125 Current limitation 34 35 W 40 W 40 W 50 W 150 % IN for at least 60 seconds Terminal cross section / tightening torque Terminals 4 mm2 / AWG12 / 0.5 Nm / 4 lb in Dimensions W×H×D 54.5 × 185 × 163.5 mm / 2.15 × 7.28 × 6.437 in Weight m 1.3 kg / 2.9 lb System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B kVA Technical Data Technical data of MOVITRAC® B i f n 4 P Hz 4.4.14 AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 0S / 0.55 ... 0.75 kW / 0.74 ... 1.0 HP 163.5 (6.437) 70 (2.8) 149 (5.87) 285 (11.2) 185 (7.28) 80 (3.1) 196 (7.72) 220 (8.66) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 159.5 (6.280) MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) Part number 0005-2A3-4-00 0008-2A3-4-00 828 501 2 828 502 0 INPUT Rated mains voltage Vsupply 3 × AC 200 ... 240 V Rated mains frequency fsupply 50 / 60 Hz ± 5% Rated mains current, 100 % operation Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply Isupply 125 AC 2.8 A AC 3.4 A AC 3.3 A AC 4.1 A OUTPUT Output voltage UA Recommended motor power 100 % operation Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot PMot 125 Rated output current 100 % operation Rated output current 125 % operation 3 × 0 ... Vsupply 0.55 kW / 0.74 HP 0.75 kW / 1.0 HP 0.75 kW / 1.0 HP 1.1 kW / 1.5 HP IN IN 125 AC 3.3 A AC 4.1 A AC 4.2 A AC 5.3 A Apparent output power 100 % operation Apparent output power 125 % operation SN SN 125 1.4 kVA 1.7 kVA 1.7 kVA 2.1 kVA Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 quadrant operation) RBW_min 27 GENERAL INFORMATION Power loss 100 % operation Power loss 125 % operation PV PV 125 Current limitation 50 W 60 W 60 W 75 W 150 % IN for at least 60 seconds Terminal cross section / tightening torque Terminals 4 mm2 / AWG12 / 0.5 Nm / 4 lb in Dimensions W×H×D 80 × 185 × 163.5 mm / 3.1 × 7.28 × 6.437 in Weight m System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 1.5 kg / 3.3 lb 35 4 kVA i f n Technical Data Technical data of MOVITRAC® B P Hz 4.4.15 AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 0L / 1.1 ... 2.2 kW / 1.5 ... 3.0 HP 163.5 (6.437) 70 (2.8) 149 (5.87) 373.5 (14.70) 273.5 (10.77) 80 (3.1) 284.5 (11.20) 308.5 (12.15) 6 (0.2) 6 (0.2) 159.5 (6.280) MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) Part number 0011-2A3-4-00 0015-2A3-4-00 0022-2A3-4-00 828 503 9 828 504 7 828 505 5 INPUT Rated mains voltage Vsupply 3 × AC 200 ... 240 V Rated mains frequency fsupply 50 / 60 Hz ± 5% Rated mains current, 100 % operation Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply Isupply 125 AC 5.1 A AC 6.3 A AC 6.4 A AC 7.9 A AC 7.6 A AC 9.5 A 1.1 kW / 1.5 HP 1.5 kW / 2.0 HP 1.5 kW / 2.0 HP 2.2 kW / 3.0 HP 2.2 kW / 3.0 HP 3.0 kW / 4.0 HP OUTPUT 3 × 0 ... Vsupply Output voltage UA Recommended motor power 100 % operation Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot PMot 125 Rated output current 100 % operation Rated output current 125 % operation IN IN 125 AC 5.7 A AC 7.1 A AC 7.3 A AC 9.1 A AC 8.6 A AC 10.8 A Apparent output power 100 % operation Apparent output power 125 % operation SN SN 125 2.3 kVA 2.9 kVA 3.0 kVA 3.7 kVA 3.5 kVA 4.3 kVA Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 quadrant operation) RBW_min 27 GENERAL INFORMATION Power loss 100 % operation Power loss 125 % operation PV PV 125 Current limitation 36 75 W 90 W 90 W 110 W 105 W 140 W 150 % IN for at least 60 seconds Terminal cross section / tightening torque Terminals 4 mm2 / AWG12 / 0.5 Nm / 4 lb in Dimensions W×H×D 80 × 273.5 × 163.5 mm / 3.1 × 10.77 × 6.437 in Weight m 2.2 kg / 4.9 lb System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data Technical data of MOVITRAC® B kVA i f n 4 P Hz 4.4.16 AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 1 / 3.7 kW / 5.0 HP 105 (4.13) 85 (3.3) 177 (6.97) 315 (12.4) 300 (11.8) 343 (13.5) 173 (6.81) 6 (0.2) MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) 0037-2A3-4-00 Part number 828 506 3 INPUT Rated mains voltage Vsupply 3 × AC 200 ... 240 V Rated mains frequency fsupply 50 / 60 Hz ± 5% Rated mains current, 100 % operation Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply Isupply 125 AC 12.9 A AC 16.1 A OUTPUT Output voltage UA 3 × 0 ... Vsupply Recommended motor power 100 % operation Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot PMot 125 3.7 kW / 5.0 HP 5.5 kW / 7.4 HP Rated output current 100 % operation Rated output current 125 % operation IN IN 125 AC 14.5 A AC 18.1 A Apparent output power 100 % operation Apparent output power 125 % operation SN SN 125 5.8 kVA 7.3 kVA Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 quadrant operation) RBW_min 27 GENERAL INFORMATION Power loss 100 % operation Power loss 125 % operation PV PV 125 Current limitation 210 W 270 W 150 % IN for at least 60 seconds Terminals 4 mm2 / AWG12 / 0.5 Nm / 4 lb in Dimensions W×H×D 105 × 315 × 173 mm / 4.13 × 12.4 × 6.81 in Weight m Terminal cross section / tightening torque System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 3.5 kg / 7.7 lb 37 4 kVA i f n Technical Data Technical data of MOVITRAC® B P Hz 4.4.17 AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 2 / 5.5 ... 7.5 kW / 7.4 ... 10 HP 225 (8.86) 300 (11.8) 335 (13.2) 229 (9.02) 105 (4.13) 315 (12.4) 130 (5.12) 6.5 (0.26) MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) Part number 0055-2A3-4-00 0075-2A3-4-00 828 507 1 828 509 8 INPUT Rated mains voltage Vsupply Rated mains frequency fsupply Rated mains current, 100 % operation Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply Isupply 125 3 × AC 200 ... 240 V 50 / 60 Hz ± 5% AC 19.5 A AC 24.4 A AC 27.4 A AC 34.3 A OUTPUT Output voltage UA Recommended motor power 100 % operation Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot PMot 125 Rated output current 100 % operation Rated output current 125 % operation 3 × 0 ... Vsupply 5.5 kW / 7.4 HP AC 7.5 kW (10 HP) 7.5 kW / 10 HP 11 kW / 15 HP IN IN 125 AC 22 A AC 27.5 A AC 29 A AC 36.3 A Apparent output power 100 % operation Apparent output power 125 % operation SN SN 125 8.8 kVA 11.0 kVA 11.6 kVA 14.5 kVA Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 quadrant operation) RBW_min 12 GENERAL INFORMATION PV PV 125 300 W 375 W Terminal cross section / tightening torque Terminals 4 mm2 / AWG12 / 1.5 Nm / 13 lb in Dimensions W×H×D 130 × 335 × 229 mm / 5.12 × 13.2 × 9.02 in Weight m Power loss 100 % operation Power loss 125 % operation Current limitation 38 380 W 475 W 150 % IN for at least 60 seconds 6.6 kg / 15 lb System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B kVA Technical Data Technical data of MOVITRAC® B i f n 4 P Hz 4.4.18 AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 3 / 11 ... 15 kW / 15 ... 20 HP 251 (9.88) 247 (9.72) 445 (17.5) 465 (18.3) 200 (7.87) 105 (4.13) 7 (0.3) MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) Part number 0110-203-4-00 0150-203-4-00 828 510 1 828 512 8 INPUT Rated mains voltage Vsupply 3 × AC 200 ... 240 V Rated mains frequency fsupply 50 / 60 Hz ± 5% Rated mains current, 100 % operation Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply Isupply 125 AC 40.0 A AC 50.0 A AC 48.6 A AC 60.8 A OUTPUT Output voltage UA Recommended motor power 100 % operation Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot PMot 125 Rated output current 100 % operation Rated output current 125 % operation 3 × 0 ... Vsupply 11 kW / 15 HP 15 kW / 20 HP 15 kW / 20 HP 22 kW / 30 HP IN IN 125 AC 42 A AC 52.5 A AC 54 A AC 67.5 A Apparent output power 100 % operation Apparent output power 125 % operation SN SN 125 16.8 kVA 21.0 kVA 21.6 kVA 26.9 kVA Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 quadrant operation) RBW_min 7.5 5.6 PV PV 125 580 W 720 W 720 W 900 W GENERAL INFORMATION Power loss 100 % operation Power loss 125 % operation Current limitation Terminal cross section / tightening torque 150 % IN for at least 60 seconds Terminals 2 6 mm / AWG10 10 mm2 / AWG8 3.5 Nm / 31 lb in Dimensions W×H×D Weight m System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 200 × 465 × 251 mm / 7.87 × 18.3 × 9.88 in 15 kg / 33 lb 39 4 kVA i f n Technical Data Technical data of MOVITRAC® B P Hz 4.4.19 AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 4 / 22 ... 30 kW / 30 ... 40 HP 280 (11.0) 140 (5.51) 499 (19.6) 522 (20.6) 250 (9.84) 246 (9.69) 7 (0.3) MOVITRAC® MC07B (3-phase supply system) Part number 0220-203-4-00 0300-203-4-00 828 513 6 828 514 4 INPUT Rated mains voltage Vsupply Rated mains frequency fsupply Rated mains current, 100 % operation Rated mains current, 125 % operation Isupply Isupply 125 3 × AC 200 ... 240 V 50 / 60 Hz ± 5% AC 72 A AC 90 A AC 86 A AC 107 A OUTPUT Output voltage UA Recommended motor power 100 % operation Recommended motor power 125 % operation PMot PMot 125 Rated output current 100 % operation Rated output current 125 % operation 3 × 0 ... Vsupply 22 kW / 30 HP 30 kW / 40 HP 30 kW / 40 HP 37 kW / 50 HP IN IN 125 AC 80 A AC 100 A AC 95 A AC 118.8 A Apparent output power 100 % operation Apparent output power 125 % operation SN SN 125 31.9 kVA 39.9 kVA 37.9 kVA 47.4 kVA Minimum permitted braking resistance value (4 quadrant operation) RBW_min 3 GENERAL INFORMATION Power loss 100 % operation Power loss 125 % operation PV PV 125 Current limitation Terminal cross section / tightening torque 1100 W 1400 W 1300 W 1700 W 150 % IN for at least 60 seconds Terminals 25 mm2 / AWG4 35 mm2 / AWG2 14 Nm / 120 lb in 40 Dimensions W×H×D Weight m 280 × 522 × 250 mm / 11.0 × 20.6 × 9.84 in 27 kg / 60 lb System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data Front option FBG11B keypad 4.5 kVA i f n 4 P Hz Front option FBG11B keypad The FBG11B front option can be used for simple diagnostics and startup. Part number 1820 635 2 Functions • • • • • • Display process values and status Error memory and error reset queries Displaying and setting parameters Back up and transfer of parameter sets Easy-to-use startup menu for SEW and non-SEW motors Manual control for MOVITRAC® B Features • • • • 5-digit, 7-segment display / 6 buttons / 8 icons / setpoint control module Selection of short or long menu Can be plugged onto the inverter (during operation) Degree of protection IP20 (EN 60529) System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 41 4 kVA i f n Technical Data FSC11B communication module P Hz 4.6 FSC11B communication module The FSC11B communication module enables communication with other units. These may include: PC, operator terminals, MOVITRAC® or MOVIDRIVE®. Part number 1820 716 2 Functions • • • Communication with PLC / MOVITRAC®B / MOVIDRIVE® / PC Operation/parameter setting/service (PC) The options FSC11B and FIO11B are installed at the same fastening place and therefore cannot be used simultaneously. Features • • • RS-485 (one interface): Plug-in terminals and service interface (RJ10 socket) CAN-based system bus (SBus) (plug-in terminals) Supported protocols: MOVILINK® / SBus / RS-485 / CANopen S1 S2 ON X44 OFF FSC11B X45 X46 HL A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 Function Terminal Designation Data System bus (SBus) X46:1 X46:2 X46:3 X46:4 X46:5 X46:6 X46:7 SC11: SBus high SC12: SBus low GND: Reference potential SC21: SBus high SC22: SBus low GND: Reference potential 24VIO: Auxiliary voltage / external voltage supply CAN bus according to CAN specification 2.0, parts A and B, transmission technology according to ISO 11898, max. 64 stations, terminating resistor (120 ) can be activated using DIP switches Terminal cross-section: 1.5 mm2 (AWG15) without conductor end sleeves 1.0 mm2 (AWG17) with conductor end sleeves RS-485 interface X45:H X45:L X45:⊥ ST11: RS-485+ ST12: RS-485– GND: Reference potential EIA standard, 9.6 kbaud, max. 32 stations Maximum cable length 200 m (656 ft) Dynamic terminating resistor with fixed installation Terminal cross-section: – 1.5 mm2 (AWG15) without conductor end sleeves – 1.0 mm2 (AWG17) with conductor end sleeves X44 RJ10 Service interface Connection: Only for service purposes, exclusively for point-to-point connection Maximum cable length 3 m (10 ft) System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data FIO11B analog module 4.7 kVA i f n 4 P Hz FIO11B analog module Part number 1820 637 9 4.7.1 Description The FIO11B analog module adds the following interfaces to the basic version: • Setpoint input • Analog output • RS-485 interface • The options FIO11B and FSC11B are mounted on the same fastening place and therefore cannot be used simultaneously. X44 FIO11B X45 X40 HL A 1 2 3 4 5 4.7.2 Electronics data FIO11B analog module Function Terminal Designation Data X40:1 X40:2 AI2: Voltage input GND: Reference potential –10 ... +10 V Ri > 40 k Resolution 10 bit Sampling time 5 ms Analog output/ X40:3 alternative as cur- X40:4 rent output or volt- X40:5 age output GND: Reference potential AOV1: Voltage output AOC1: Current output RS-485 interface X45:H X45:L X45:⊥ ST11: RS-485+ ST12: RS-485– GND: Reference potential EIA standard, 9.6 kbaud, max. 32 stations Maximum cable length 200 m (656 ft) Dynamic terminating resistor with fixed installation Terminal cross-section: – 1.5 mm2 (AWG15) without conductor end sleeves – 1.0 mm2 (AWG17) with conductor end sleeves X44 RJ10 Service interface Connection: Only for service purposes, exclusively for point-to-point connection Maximum cable length 5 m (20 ft) 1) Setpoint input 0 ... +10 V / Imax = 2 mA 0 (4) ... 20 mA Resolution 10 bit Sampling time 5 ms Short-circuit proof, protected against external voltage up to 30 V Load impedance RL ≤ 750 Ω 1) If the setpoint input is not used, it should be set to GND. Otherwise a measured input voltage of –1 V ... +1 V is set. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 43 4 kVA i f n Technical Data DBG60B keypad P Hz 4.8 DBG60B keypad 4.8.1 Description The basic version of MOVITRAC® does not have a DBG60B keypad but has the option of an upgrade to include the plain text keypad. Keypad Language Part number DBG60B-01 DE/EN/FR/IT/ES/PT/NL (German / English / French / Italian / Spanish / Portuguese / Dutch) 1 820 403 1 DBG60B-02 DE / EN / FR / FI / SV / DA / TR (German / English / French / Finnish / Swedish / Danish / Turkish) 1 820 405 8 DBG60B-03 DE/EN/FR/RU/PL/CS (German / English / French / Russian / Polish / Czech) 1 820 406 6 DBG60B-04 DE / EN / FR / ZH (German / English / French / Chinese) 1 820 850 9 Door installation set1) Description (= scope of delivery) DBM60B • • Housing for DBG60B (IP65) DKG60B extension cable, length 5 m (20 ft) Part number 824 853 2 Extension cables Description (= scope of delivery) Part number DKG60B • • 817 583 7 5 m long (20 ft) 4-core, shielded cable (AWG26) 1) The DBG60B keypad is not included in the scope of delivery and must be ordered separately. 4.8.2 44 Functions • Display process values and status • Status displays of the binary inputs / outputs • Error memory and error reset queries • Option to display and set the operating parameters and service parameters • Data backup and transfer of parameter sets to other MOVITRAC® B units. • User-friendly startup menu • Manual control for MOVITRAC® B • The FSC11B front option or FIO11B is required for connection System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data DBG60B keypad 4.8.3 kVA i f n 4 P Hz Features • Illuminated plain text display, choice of 7 languages • Keypad with 21 keys • Can be connected via extension cable DKG60B (5 m (20 ft)) • Degree of protection IP40 (EN 60529) NOTE The DBG60B keypad option is connected to the FSC11B or FIO11B communication front option. Simultaneous operation of DBG60B and PC, RS-485 connection, MOVIDRIVE® or MOVITRAC® is not possible. 4.8.4 Dimension drawing for DBG60B 135 (5.31) DBG60B dimension drawing, dimensions in mm 45 (1.8) System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 18 (0.71) 45 4 kVA i 4.8.5 f n Technical Data DBG60B keypad P Hz DBG60B housing dimension drawing The DBM60B option can be used to mount the DBG60B keypad in the control cabinet door, for example. The DBM60B option consists of housing in enclosure IP65 and a 5 m (20 ft) DKG60B extension cable. 3) 16 .0) .1) 67 (2 .6) 139 (5.47) (1 26 54 (2 151 (5.94) Ø4 (0.2) (0.6 R5 (0.2) 46 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data Parameter module UBP11A 4.9 kVA i f n 4 P Hz Parameter module UBP11A Part number: 823 933 9 Functional description: • Saving data from the inverter to the parameter module • Loading data back from the parameter module to the inverter • Operating status display • The UBP11A parameter module requires the front option FSC11B or FIO11B. Simultaneous operation of UBP11A and PC, RS-485 connection, MOVIDRIVE® or MOVITRAC® is not possible. • Meaning of the LED: – Green: Data available – Flashing green: Data transmission in progress – Yellow: No data available – Red: Copy fault System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 47 4 kVA i 4.10 f n Technical Data MBG11A setpoint control module P Hz MBG11A setpoint control module Functional description: • The MBG11A setpoint control module has 2 keys and a display. They make it possible to adjust the speed remotely in the range from -100 %... +100 % fmax (potentiometer f1). • Up to 31 MOVITRAC® B units can be controlled at the same time (broadcasting). • The MBG11A setpoint control module requires the front option FSC11B or FIO11B. Technical data: MBG11A option Part number 822 547 8 Input voltage DC 24 V ±25 % Current consumption approx. 70 mA Setpoint resolution 1% Serial interface1) RS-485 for connecting max. 31 MOVITRAC® inverters (max. 200 m, (656 ft), 9600 baud) Degree of protection IP 65 Ambient temperature –15 ... 60 °C (5 ... 140 °F) 1) with integrated dynamic terminating resistor Dimensions and connection assignment: 5) M4 [2] [2] 60 (2.4) ( ) 88 (3.5) [1] [1] 28 (1.1) ) (2.8 70 38 (1. [1] [1] 90 (3 (3.5) 56 (2.2) 68 (2.7) RS- RS+ 24V MBG11A [1] Tapped hole on the rear [2] Retaining holes for M4 screws 48 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data UWS11A interface adapter RS-232 / RS-485 for mounting rail 4.11 kVA i f n 4 P Hz UWS11A interface adapter RS-232 / RS-485 for mounting rail Part number Ambient temperature Degree of protection Description RS-232 interface RS-485 interface 822 689 X The FSC11B or FIO11B is required for connecting the UWS11A. 0 ... 40 °C (32 ... 104 °F) IP20 The UWS11A option converts RS-232 signals, for example from the PC, into RS-485 signals. These RS-485 signals can then be routed to the RS-485 interface of the MOVITRAC® B. The UWS11A option requires a DC 24 V voltage supply (Imax = DC 100 mA). The connection between UWS11A and PC is made using a commercially available serial interface cable (shielded!). You can use the RS485 interface of the UWS11A to network up to 32 MOVITRAC® B units for communication (max. total cable length 200 m (656 ft)). Do not connect external terminating resistors because dynamic terminating resistors are already installed. Permitted cable cross-section: One core per terminal 0.20...2.5 mm2 (AWG 24...12) 2 cores per terminal 0.20...1 mm2 (AWG 24...17) Dimension drawing 24V RS+ RS- X2: RS-232 X1: RS-485 1 2 3 4 5 75 (3.0) 1 2 3 4 5 UWS 5 (0.2) 68 (2.7) 22.5 (0.886) 83 (3.3) The UWS11A option is mounted on a mounting rail (EN 50022-35 × 7.5) in the control cabinet. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 49 4 kVA i 4.12 f n Technical Data UWS21B interface adapter RS-232/RS-485 P Hz UWS21B interface adapter RS-232/RS-485 Part number Ambient temperature Degree of protection Description RS-232 interface RS-485 interface Scope of delivery 18204562 The FSC11B or FIO11B is required for connecting the UWS21B. 0... 40 °C (32 ... 104 °F) IP20 The UWS21B option converts RS-232 signals, for example from the PC, into RS-485 signals. These RS-485 signals can then be routed to the interface of the MOVITRAC® B. The connection between UWS21B and PC connection is made using a standard serial interface cable (shielded!). The connection between UWS21B and MOVITRAC® B is made using a serial interface cable with RJ10 plugs. The scope of delivery for the UWS21B option includes: • UWS21B unit • Serial interface cable with 9-pin sub D socket and 9-pin sub D connector to connect the UWS21B option to the PC. • Serial interface cable with two RJ10 plugs to connect UWS21B and MOVITRAC® B. • CD-ROM with drivers and MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio UWS21B dimension drawing 96 (3.8) 90 (3.5) 43 (1.7) 25 (0.98) 4.13 USB11A interface adapter USB/RS-485 Part number Ambient temperature Degree of protection Description USB interface Scope of delivery USB11A dimension drawing 824 831 1 The FSC11B or FIO11B is required for connecting the USB11A. 0 ... 40 °C (32 ... 104 °F) IP20 The USB11A option is used to connect a PC or laptop with USB interface to the X44 interface of the MOVITRAC® unit. The USB11A interface adapter supports USB1.1 and USB2.0. The connection between USB11A and PC is made using a standard USB cable type USB A-B (shielded!). The scope of delivery for the USB11A option includes: • USB11A unit • USB connection cable type USB A-B to connect USB11A to PC. • Serial interface cable with two RJ10 connectors to connect MOVITRAC® B and USB11A. • CD-ROM with drivers and MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio. 25 (0.98) 92.5 (3.64) 43 (1.7) 90 (3.5) 50 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data BW series braking resistors 4.14 kVA i f n 4 P Hz BW series braking resistors 4.14.1 General information BW series braking resistors are adapted to the MOVITRAC® B inverter series. The type of cooling is KS = self-cooling (air ventilation). The resistor surfaces will heat up under a load of PN. Make sure that you select an installation site that will accommodate these high temperatures. As a rule, braking resistors are therefore mounted on the control cabinet roof. Provide for a load derating of 4 % per 10 K from an ambient temperature of 45 °C (118 °F). Do not exceed the maximum ambient temperature of 80 °C (176 °F). Note the maximum permissible temperature of other components (e.g. MOVITRAC® B) when installing in the control cabinet. 4.14.2 PTC braking resistors Observe the following points for the PTC braking resistors: • 4-quadrant operation is recommended for applications in which the level of regenerative energy is low. • The resistor protects itself (reversible) against regenerative overload by changing abruptly to high resistance and no longer consuming any more energy. • The inverter then switches off and signals a brake chopper fault (fault code 04). Assignment of the PTC braking resistors: Braking resistor type Part number Ambient temperature ϑA For MOVITRAC® B System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B BW1 BW2 BW3 BW4 800 621 0 800 622 9 800 623 7 800 624 5 -25 °C ... +60 °C (–13 °F ... 140 °F) 0003 / 0004 (400/500 V) 0003 / 0004 (230 V) 51 4 kVA i f n Technical Data BW series braking resistors P Hz 4.14.3 Flat design The flat-design resistors have degree of protection IP54 and are equipped with internal thermal overload protection (cannot be replaced). Depending on their type, you can install the resistors as follows: • With support rail mounting FHS or submounting FKB under the heat sink. The braking resistors in the submounting do not achieve the specified CDF power. The FHS and FKB options are only suitable for the BW027-003 and BW072-003 braking resistors. • Attach to a mounting rail using a BS touch guard. Caution: The load capacity applies for a horizontal mounting position [2]. Values are reduced by 10 % for a vertical mounting position [1]. [1] [2] 230 V Braking resistor type Part number 100 % cdf 50 % cdf 25 % cdf 12 % cdf 6 % cdf Resistance value RBW Trip current Ambient temperature ϑA For MOVITRAC® B 230 V BW027-003 BW027-005 826 949 1 826 950 5 230 W 310 W 410 W 550 W 980 W 450 W 610 W 840 W 1200 W 2360 W 27 ±10% 27 ±10% 1.0 A 1.4 A -20 °C ... +45 °C (-4 °F ... 113 °F) 0003 ... 0022 0003 ... 0022 400 / 500 V Braking resistor type Part number 100 % cdf 50 % cdf 25 % cdf 12 % cdf 6 % cdf Resistance value RBW Trip current Ambient temperature ϑA For MOVITRAC® B 400/500 V 52 BW072-003 BW072-005 826 058 3 826 060 5 230 W 310 W 420 W 580 W 1000 W 450 W 600 W 830 W 1110 W 2000 W 72 ±10% 72 ±10% 0.6 A 1.0 A -20 °C ... +45 °C (-4 °F ... 113 °F) 0003 ... 0040 0003 ... 0040 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data BW series braking resistors kVA i f n 4 P Hz 4.14.4 Wire resistors and grid resistors • Perforated sheet cover (IP20) open to mounting surface • The short-term load capacity of the wire and grid resistors is higher than in the flattype braking resistors (→ MOVIDRIVE® B system manual, section "Selecting the braking resistor"). • A temperature switch is integrated in the BW...-T braking resistor • A thermal overcurrent relay is integrated in the BW...-P braking resistor SEW-EURODRIVE recommends also protecting the wire and grid resistors against overload using a bimetallic relay with trip characteristics of trip class 10 or 10A (in accordance with EN 60947-4-1). Set the trip current to the value IF (→ following tables). Do not use electronic or electromagnetic fuses because these can be triggered even in case of short-term excess currents that are still within the tolerance range. For braking resistors of the BW..-T / BW...-P series, you can connect the integrated temperature sensor / overcurrent relay using a 2-core, shielded cable as an alternative to a bimetallic relay. The cable entry for the BW...-T and BW...-P braking resistors can be run from the front or the back (→ dimension drawing for BW... / BW...-T / BW...-P braking resistors). Use filler plugs for tapped holes that are not connected. The resistor surfaces will heat up under a load of PN. Make sure that you select an installation site that will accommodate these high temperatures. As a rule, braking resistors are therefore mounted on the control cabinet roof. The performance data listed in the following tables indicate the load capacity of the braking resistors depending on their cyclic duration factor. The cyclic duration factor cdf of the braking resistor is indicated in % and is based on a cycle duration of ≤ 120 s. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 53 kVA 4 i f n Technical Data BW series braking resistors P Hz 230 V Type Part number Type BW..-T part number Type BW..-P part number 100 % cdf 50 % cdf 25 % cdf 12 % cdf 6 % cdf BW027006 BW027012 BW018015 822 422 6 822 423 4 – – – 1820 416 3 BW018075 BW012025 – – 821 680 0 – – 1820 138 5 1820 139 3 – 1820 140 7 1820 141 5 – – – – 1820 414 7 – – 1.2 kW 2.3 kW 5.0 kW 7.5 kW 8.5 kW1) 1.5 kW 2.5 kW 4.5 kW 6.7 kW 11.4 kW 3.5 kW 5.9 kW 10.5 kW 15.7 kW 25.6 kW1) 7.5 kW 12.7 kW 22.5 kW 25.6 kW1) 25.6 kW1) 2.5 kW 4.2 kW 7.5 kW 11.2 kW 19.0 kW 5.0 kW 8.5 kW 15.0 kW 19.2 kW1) 19.2 kW1) 10 kW 17 kW 19.2 kW1) 19.2 kW1) 19.2 kW1) 14 ARMS 10 ARMS 27 ±10% 18 ±10% 6.7 ARMS 4.0 ARMS 12 ±10% 8.1 ARMS 2 Connections BW012100 – 4.7 ARMS Ceramic terminals 2.5 mm (AWG12) Tightening torque BW012050 0.6 kW 1.2 kW 2.0 kW 3.5 kW 6.0 kW Resistance Trip current IF BW018035 Wire resistor For MOVITRAC® B 0015 ... 0022 27 ARMS M8 stud 0.5 Nm / 4 lb in Design 19 ARMS 6 Nm / 50 lb in Grid resistor 2 x parallel with 0110 0055 / 0075 1) Physical power limit due to DC link voltage and resistance value. Type Part number Type BW..-T part number 100 % cdf 50 % cdf 25 % cdf 12 % cdf 6 % cdf BW039-003 BW039-006 821 687 8 821 688 6 821 689 4 – – – – – – 1820 136 9 1820 415 5 1820 413 9 1820 083 4 1820 412 0 0.3 kW 0.5 kW 1.0 kW 1.7 kW 2.8 kW 0.6 kW 1.1 kW 1.9 kW 3.5 kW 5.7 kW 1.2 kW 2.1 kW 3.8 kW 5.9 kW1) 5.9 kW1) 2.6 kW 4.6 kW 5.9 kW1) 5.9 kW1) 5.9 kW1) 16.0 kW 27.0 kW 30.7 kW1) 30.7 kW1) 30.7 kW1) 13 kW 24 kW 38.4 kW1) 38.4 kW1) 38.4 kW1) 18 kW 32 kW 38.4 kW1) 38.4 kW1) 38.4 kW1) Resistance 2.8 ARMS Connections Tightening torque Design For BW039-026 39 ±10% Trip current IF MOVITRAC® BW039-012 B 3.9 ARMS 5.5 ARMS BW915 15 ±10% 8.1 ARMS 28 ARMS BW106 6 ±10% 38 ARMS Ceramic terminals 2.5 mm2 (AWG12) M8 stud 0.5 Nm / 4 lb in 6 Nm / 50 lb in Wire resistor Grid resistor 0015 ... 0022 2 x parallel with 0110 BW206 42 ARMS 0150 / 2 x parallel with 0220/ 0300 1) Physical power limit due to DC link voltage and resistance value. 54 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B kVA Technical Data BW series braking resistors i n f 4 P Hz 400 V BW100-006 BW168 BW268 BW147 BW247 BW347 Part number Type 821 701 7 820,604 X 820 715 1 820 713 5 820 714 3 820 798 4 Type BW..-T part number 1820 419 8 1820 133 4 1820 417 1 1820 134 2 1820 084 2 1820 135 0 100 % cdf 50 % cdf 25 % cdf 12 % cdf 6 % cdf 0.6 kW 1.1 kW 1.9 kW 3.6 kW 5.7 kW 0.8 kW 1.4 kW 2.6 kW 4.8 kW 7.6 kW 1.2 kW 2.2 kW 3.8 kW 6.7 kW 10 kW1) 1.2 kW 2.2 kW 3.8 kW 7.2 kW 11 kW 2.0 kW 3.8 kW 6.4 kW 12 kW 19 kW 4.0 kW 7.6 kW 12.8 kW 20 kW1) 20 kW1) Resistance 100 ±10% 5 ARMS 6.5 ARMS Trip current IF 68 ±10% 2.4 ARMS 3.4 ARMS 47 ±10% 4.2 ARMS 9.2 ARMS 2 Connections Ceramic terminals 2.5 mm (AWG12) Ceramic terminals 10 mm2 (AWG8) 0.5 Nm / 4 lb in 1.6 Nm / 14 lb in Tightening torque Design Wire resistor For MOVITRAC® B 0015 ... 0040 0055 / 0075 1) Physical power limit due to DC link voltage and resistance value. Type BW039-012 BW039-026 BW039-050 BW018-015 BW018-035 BW018-075 Part number 821 689 4 – – 821 684 3 – – Type BW..-T part number 1820 1369 1820 415 5 1820 137 7 – 1820 138 5 1820 139 3 Type BW..-P part number 100 % cdf 50 % cdf 25 % cdf 12 % cdf 6 % cdf – – – 1820 416 3 – – 1.2 kW 2.1 kW 3.8 kW 7.0 kW 11.4 kW 2.6 kW 4.6 kW 8.3 kW 15.3 kW 24.0 kW1) 5.0 kW 8.5 kW 15.0 kW 24.0 kW1) 24.0 kW1) 1.5 kW 2.5 kW 4.5 kW 6.7 kW 11.4 kW 3.5 kW 5.9 kW 10.5 kW 15.7 kW 26.6 kW 7.5 kW 12.7 kW 22.5 kW 33.7 kW 52.2 kW1) 11.3 ARMS 9.1 ARMS M8 stud Ceramic terminals 2.5 mm2 (AWG12) M8 stud 6 Nm / 50 lb in 1.0 Nm / 8.9 lb in 6 Nm / 50 lb in Resistance Trip current IF Connections Tightening torque 39 ±10% 5.5 ARMS 8.1 ARMS Ceramic terminals 2.5 mm (AWG12) 2 0.5 Nm / 4 lb in Design 18 ±10% Wire resistor For MOVITRAC® B 13.9 ARMS 20.4 ARMS Grid resistor 0110 0110 0150 / 0220 1) Physical power limit due to DC link voltage and resistance value. Type Part number Type BW..-T part number Type BW..-P part number BW915 BW012-025 BW012-050 BW012-100 BW0106 BW206 – 821 680 0 – – – – 1820 413 9 – 1820 140 7 1820 141 5 1820 083 4 1820 412 0 – 1820 414 7 – – – – 100 % cdf 50 % cdf 25 % cdf 12 % cdf 6 % cdf 16 kW 27 kW 45 kW1) 45 kW1) 45 kW1) 2.5 kW 4.2 kW 7.5 kW 11.2 kW 19.0 kW 5.0 kW 8.5 kW 15.0 kW 22.5 kW 38.0 kW 10 kW 17 kW 30 kW 45 kW 56 kW1) 13.5 kW 23 kW 40 kW 61 kW 102 kW 18 kW 30.6 kW 54 kW 81 kW 136.8 kW Resistance 15 ±10% Trip current IF 32.6 ARMS 28.8 ARMS 47.4 ARMS 12 ±10% 14.4 ARMS 20.4 ARMS Connections 54.7 ARMS M8 stud Tightening torque 6 Nm / 50 lb in Design For MOVITRAC® B 6 ±10% Grid resistor 0220 0300 0370 ... 0750 1) Physical power limit due to DC link voltage and resistance value. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 55 4 kVA i f n Technical Data BW series braking resistors P Hz 4.14.5 Dimensions of BW braking resistors Flat-design Flat-design resistors: The connecting lead is 500 mm (19.69 in) long. The scope of delivery includes four M4 threaded bushes each of type 1 and 2. B C 2 x1 A a M4 1 Type 12 (0.47) b x2 Main dimensions [mm (in)] Fastening parts [mm (in)] A B C a b/c/e x1 x2 Weight [kg (lb)] BW072-003 BW027-003 110 (4.33) 80 (3.1) 15 (0.59) 98 (3.9) 60 (2.4) 6 (0.2) 10 (0.39) 0.3 (0.7) BW072-005 BW027-005 216 (8.50) 80 (3.1) 15 (0.59) 204 (8.03) 60 (2.4) 6 (0.2) 10 (0.39) 0.6 (1) B Wire resistors d e x1 a A Type A BW..-T B BW027-006 486 (19.1) – BW027-012 486 (19.1) – Fastening parts [mm (in)] b/c/e x1 d Weight [kg (lb)] C a 120 (4.72) 92 (3.6) 426 (16.8) 64 (2.5) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 2.2 (4.9) 120 (4.72) 185 (7.28) 426 (16.8) 150 (5.91) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 4.3 (9.5) BW100-006 (-T) 486 (19.1) 486 (19.1) 120 (4.72) 92 (3.6) 426 (16.8) 64 (2.5) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 2.2 (4.9) BW168 (-T) 365 (14.4) 406 (16.0) 120 (4.72) 185 (7.28) 326 (12.8) 150 (5.91) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 3.6 (7.9) BW268 (-T) 465 (18.3) 486 (19.1) 120 (4.72) 185 (7.28) 426 (16.8) 150 (5.91) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 4.3 (9.5) BW147 (-T) 465 (18.3) 486 (19.1) 120 (4.72) 185 (7.28) 426 (16.8) 150 (5.91) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 4.3 (9.5) BW247 (-T) 665 (26.2) 686 (27.0) 120 (4.72) 185 (7.28) 626 (24.6) 150 (5.91) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 6.1 (13) BW347 (-T) 670 (26.4) 750 (29.5) 145 (5.71) 340 (13.4) 630 (24.8) 300 (11.8) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 13.2 (29.1) BW039-003 286 (11.3) – 120 (4.72) 92 (3.6) 226 (8.9) 64 (2.5) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 1.5 (3.3) BW039-006 486 (23.1) – 120 (4.72) 92 (3.6) 426 (16.8) 150 (5.91) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 2.2 (4.9) BW039-012 (-T) 486 (19.1) 486 (19.1) 120 (4.72) 185 (7.28) 426 (16.8) 150 (5.91) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 4.3 (9.5) – 586 (23.1) 120 (4.72) 275 (10.8) 530 (20.9) 240 (9.45) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 7.5 (17) BW039-026-T 56 Main dimensions [mm (in)] A c C System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B kVA Technical Data BW series braking resistors i f n 4 P Hz Grid resistors B D a A d c C Type Main dimensions [mm (in)] Fastening parts [mm (in)] Weight [kg (lb)] A A BW..-T B C a b/c/e x1 d BW012-025 295 (11.6) – 260 (10.2) 490 (19.3) 270 (10.6) 380 (15.0) – 10.5 (0.413) 8.0 (18) BW012-025-P1) 295 (11.6) – 260 (10.2) 490 (19.3) 270 (10.6) 380 (15.0) – 10.5 (0.413) 8.0 (18) BW012-050-T – 395 (15.6) 260 (10.2) 490 (19.3) 370 (14.6) 380 (15.0) – 10.5 (0.413) 12 (26) BW012-100-T – 595 (23.4) 260 (10.2) 490 (19.3) 570 (22.4) 380 (15.0) – 10.5 (0.413) 21 (46) BW018-015 600 (23.6) – 120 (4.72) 92 (3.6) 540 (21.3) 64 (2.5) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 4.0 (8.8) BW018-015-P 620 (24.4) – 120 (4.72) 92 (3.6) 540 (21.3) 64 (2.5) 10 (0.39) 5.8 (0.23) 4.0 (8.8) BW018-035-T – 295 (11.6) 260 (10.2) 490 (19.3) 270 (10.6) 380 (15.0) – 10.5 (0.413) 9.0 (20) BW018-075-T – 595 (23.4) 260 (10.2) 490 (19.3) 570 (22.4) 380 (15.0) – 10.5 (0.413) 21 (46) BW039-050-T – 395 (15.6) 260 (10.2) 490 (19.3) 370 (14.6) 380 (15.0) 10 (0.39) 10.5 (0.413) 12 (26) BW915-T – 795 (31.3) 260 (10.2) 490 (19.3) 770 (30.3) 380 (15.0) – 10.5 (0.413) 26 (57) BW106-T – 795 (31.3) 260 (10.2) 490 (19.3) 770 (30.3) 380 (15.0) – 10.5 (0.413) 32 (71) BW206-T – 995 (39.2) 260 (10.2) 490 (19.3) 970 (38.2) 380 (15.0) – 10.5 (0.413) 43 (95) 1) D = 355 mm (14.0 in) PTC braking resistors ≥1 (0.04) >0 (L4) max. 14 (0.55) (L3) L Type 34 ±0.3 (1.3 ±0.01) ≥11 (0.43) 4.5 ±0.1 (0.18 ±0.004) L1 L2 L1 L2 L3 L4 L BW1 89 (3.5) 82 (3.2) 64 (2.5) 60 (2.4) 100 (3.94) BW2 124 (4.88) 117 (4.61) 97 (3.8) 95 (3.7) 165 (6.50) BW3 89 (3.5) 82 (3.2) 64 (2.5) 60 (2.4) 100 (3.94) BW4 124 (4.88) 117 (4.61) 97 (3.8) 95 (3.7) 165 (6.50) System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 57 4 kVA i 4.15 f n Technical Data Touch guard BS P Hz Touch guard BS Touch guard dimension drawing: [1] Grommet [2] Support rail mounting Type 4.16 Main dimensions [mm (in)] Mounting dimensions [mm (in)] A B C b d e a x BS-003 60 (2.4) 160 (6.30) 146 (5.75) 125 (4.92) 40 (1.6) 20 (0.8) 6 (0.2) 17.5 (0.689) BS-005 60 (2.4) 160 (6.30) 252 (9.92) 125 (4.92) 40 (1.6) 20 (0.8) 6 (0.2) 17.5 (0.689) Type Weight [kg (lb)] Part number Mounting rail installation BW BS-003 0.35 (0.77) 813 151 3 BW027-003 / BW072-003 BS-005 0.5 (1) 813 152 X Accessory S001 / part number 822 194 4 BW027-005 / BW072-005 Mounting PTC braking resistors FKB10B 65 (2.6) For sizes 0XS, 0S, 0L 125 (4.92) 58 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data Submounting FKB11/12/13B flat-design resistors 4.17 kVA i f n 4 P Hz Submounting FKB11/12/13B flat-design resistors FKB..B is used for submounting flat-design resistors under the inverter. Type Part number Size FKB11B 1820 728 6 0XS FKB12B 1820 729 4 0S FKB13B 1820 730 8 0L Braking resistor 230 V 400/500 V BW4 BW2 BW027-003 BW072-003 The braking resistors in the submounting do not achieve the specified CDF power. Dimension drawing: 185 (7.28) a b d M5 21.5 (0.846) MOVITRAC® B size 0XS a b d 55 (2.2) 196 (7.72) 220 (8.66) 0S 80 (3.1) 196 (7.72) 220 (8.66) 0L 80 (3.1) 284.5 (11.20) 308.5 (12.15) System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 59 4 kVA i 4.18 f n Technical Data Support rail mounting FHS11B/12B/13B P Hz Support rail mounting FHS11B/12B/13B The FHS is used for support rail mounting of MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters and for the submounting of flat-design resistors. Type Part number Size FHS11B 1820 724 3 0XS FHS12B 1820 725 1 0S FHS13B 1820 727 8 0L Braking resistor 230 V 400/500 V BW4 BW2 BW027-003 BW072-003 Dimension drawing: 196 (7.72) 32.5 (1.28) MOVITRAC® B size 0XS 60 10 (0.39) 5 (0.2) b d a 4.5 (0.18) e a b d e 55 (2.2) 171.5 (6.752) 220 (8.66) 7.5 (0.30) 0S 80 (3.1) 171.5 (6.752) 220 (8.66) 32.5 (1.28) 0L 80 (3.1) 260.3 (10.25) 308.5 (12.15) 32.5 (1.28) System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B kVA Technical Data Line chokes ND 4.19 i f n 4 P Hz Line chokes ND The line choke assists in overvoltage protection. The line choke limits the charging current when several inverters are connected together in parallel on the input end with shared mains contactors. ND line filters have cRUus approval independent of the MOVITRAC® B. The ambient temperature range is –25 ... +45 °C (–13 ... 113 °F). The degree of protection is IP00 (EN 60529). Line choke type ND 010-301 ND 020-151 826 972 6 826 973 4 Part number Rated voltage VN 1 x AC 230 V ±10 % AC 10 A Rated current IN Power loss at IN PV AC 20 A 6W 10 W Inductance LN 3 mH 1.5 mH Terminal strip 4 mm2 (AWG10) 10 mm2 (AWG8) 0.6 Nm / 5 lb in 1.5 Nm / 13 lb in 0003 ... 0008 0011 ... 0022 Tightening torque ® Suitable for MOVITRAC B 1-phase 230 V Line choke type Part number ND 020-013 ND045-013 ND085-013 ND150-013 826 012 5 826 013 3 826 014 1 825 548 2 3 x AC 380 ... 500 V ± 10 % Rated voltage VN Rated current IN AC 20 A AC 45 A AC 85 A AC 150 A 10 W 15 W 25 W 65 W 4 mm2 (AWG10) 10 mm2 (AWG8) 35 mm2 (AWG2) M10/PE stud: M8 0.6 ... 0.8 Nm / 5 ... 7 lb in 2.5 Nm / 22 lb in 3.2 ... 3.7 Nm / 28 ... 33 lb in Power loss at IN PV 0.1 mH Inductance LN Terminal strip Tightening torque M10 stud: 10 Nm / 89 lb in PE: 6 Nm / 50 lb in Suitable for MOVITRAC® B 3-phase 400/500 V 100 % IN 0003 ... 0075 0110 ... 0220 125 % IN 0003 ... 0075 3-phase 230 V 100 % IN 0003 ... 0055 125 % IN 0003 ... 0037 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 0300 ... 0450 0550 ... 0750 0110 ... 0150 0220 ... 0370 0450 ... 0750 0075 ... 0110 0150 ... 0220 0300 0055 ... 0750 0110 ... 0150 0220 ... 0300 61 4 kVA i f n Technical Data Line chokes ND P Hz 4.19.1 Dimension drawing for ND 010-301 / ND 020-151 Type Main dimensions [mm (in)] Mounting dimensions [mm (in)] A B C1 C2 a c d e Weight [kg (lb)] ND 010-301 90 (3.5) 100 (3.94) 80 (3.1) 70 (2.8) 64 (2.5) 52 (2.0) 4.4 (0.17) 7.4 (0.29) 1.4 (3.1) ND 020-151 90 (3.5) 100 (3.94) 90 (3.5) 70 (2.8) 64 (2.5) 52 (2.0) 4.4 (0.17) 7.4 (0.29) 1.4 (3.1) 4.19.2 Dimension drawing for ND 020-013 / ND 045-013 / ND 085-013 / ND 150-013 A a c c [1] B b 1U1 1U2 1V1 1V2 1W1 1W2 [1] C [1] = Space for touch-safe terminal strips Type ND 020-013 62 Main dimensions [mm (in)] Mounting dimensions [mm (in)] Weight [kg (lb)] A B C a b d/e 85 (3.3) 60 (2.4) 120 (4.72) 50 (2.0) 31 (1.2) 5 - 10 (0.2 - 0.39) 0.5 (1) ND 045-013 125 (4.92) 95 (3.7) 170 (6.69) 84 (3.3) 55 ... 75 (2.2 ... 3.0) 6 (0.2) 2.5 (5.5) ND 085-013 185 (7.28) 115 (4.53) 235 (9.25) 136 (5.35) 56 (2.2) 7 (0.3) 8 (20) ND 150-013 257 (10.1) 145 (5.71) 230 (9.06) 170 (6.69) 77 (3.0) 8 (0.3) 17 (37) System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B kVA Technical Data NF line filter 4.20 i n f 4 P Hz NF line filter The line filter suppresses interference emissions on the line side of inverters. The ambient temperature range is –25 ... +45 °C (–13 ... 113 °F). The degree of protection is IP20 (EN 60529). NF line filters have cRUus approval independent of the MOVITRAC® B. Type NF009-503 NF014-503 NF018-503 NF035-503 NF048-503 Part number 827 412 6 827 116 X 827 413 4 827 128 3 827 117 8 Rated current AC 9 A AC 14 A AC 18 A AC 35 A AC 48 A 6W 9W 12 W 15 W 22 W ≤ 25 mA ≤ 25 mA ≤ 25 mA ≤ 40 mA Power loss ≤ 25 mA Earth-leakage current 4 mm2 (AWG10) M5 10 mm2 (AWG8) M5/M6 0.6 ... 0.8 Nm / 5 ... 7 lb in 1.8 Nm / 16 lb in Connections PE screw Tightening torque ® Suitable for MOVITRAC B 3 x 400/ 500 V 100 % IN 0003 ... 0040 0055 / 0075 – 0110 / 0150 0220 125 % IN 0003 ... 0030 0040 / 0055 3 x 230 V 100 % IN 0015 / 0022 0037 0075 0110 0150 – 0055 / 0075 0110 125 % IN 0015 0022 0037 0055 / 0075 – Type NF063-503 NF085-503 NF115-503 NF150-503 Part number 827 414 2 827 415 0 827 416 9 827 417 7 Rated current AC 63 A AC 85 A AC 115 A AC 150 A 30 W 35 W 60 W 90 W Power loss ≤ 30 mA ≤ 30 mA ≤ 30 mA ≤ 30 mA 16 mm2 (AWG6) M6 35 mm2 (AWG2) M8 50 mm2 (AWG1/0) M10 50 mm2 (AWG1/0) M10 Earth-leakage current Connections PE screw Tightening torque 3 Nm / 30 lb in 3.7 Nm / 33 lb in Suitable for MOVITRAC® B 3 x 400/ 500 V 3 x 230 V System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 100 % IN 0300 0370 / 0450 0550 0750 125 % IN 0220 0300 / 0370 0450 0550 / 0750 100 % IN 0150 0220 0300 – 125 % IN 0110 / 0150 – 0220 / 0300 – 63 4 kVA i f n Technical Data NF line filter P Hz Dimension drawing for line filter [mm (in)]: Line filter type Main dimensions A NF009-503 55 (2.2) NF014-503 NF018-503 NF035-503 NF115-503 NF063-503 NF085-503 NF115-503 64 b 320 (12.6) 140 (5.51) 330 (13.0) 155 (6.10) Hole dimension PE connection d 20 (0.79) 210 (8.27) 240 (9.45) 30 (1.2) 60 (2.4) 65 (2.6) Weight kg (lb) 0.8 (2) 180 (7.09) NF018-503 NF035-503 100 (3.94) 260 (10.2) Installation dimensions a NF048-503 315 (12.4) 100 (3.94) NF009-503 NF014-503 275 (10.8) 90 (3.5) NF085-503 80 (3.1) 255 (10.0) 60 (2.4) NF063-503 C 225 (8.86) 50 (2.0) NF048-503 Line filter type B 195 (7.68) 5.5 (0.22) M5 0.9 (2) 1.1 (2.4) 255 (10.0) 1.7 (3.7) 295 (11.6) 2.1 (4.6) M6 235 (9.25) 255 (10.0) 6.5 (0.26) 2.4 (5.3) M8 3.5 (7.7) M10 4.8 (11) System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data ULF11A folding ferrites 4.21 kVA i f n 4 P Hz ULF11A folding ferrites Folding ferrites are used to reduce intereference emitted from the mains cable. Only use folding ferrites with single-phase units. The delivery scope contains 3 folding ferrites, which much be installed according to the installation instructions. Technical data: Part number 1821 213 1 (3 pcs) For cable diameter 10.5 ... 12.5 mm (0.413 ... 0.492 in) Storage temperature –40 °C ... +85 °C (–40 ... +185 °F) Operating temperature –25 °C ... +105 °C (–13 ... +221 °F) 28.8 (1.13) Dimension drawing for folding ferrites: Ø 1 (0 3.0 .5 12 ) 33 (1 .5 .3 2) 4.22 .6 37 8) 4 (1. HD series output chokes You can reduce the radiated interference of the unshielded motor cable by using an output choke. Output choke type Part number Max. power loss PVmax Weight For cable cross sections Output choke type Part number HD001 HD002 HD003 output choke 813 325 5 813 557 6 813 558 4 15 W 8W 30 W 0.5 kg (1 lb) 0.2 kg (0.4 lb) 1.1 kg (2.4 lb) 1.5 ... 16 mm2 AWG16 ... 6 ≤ 1.5 mm2 ≤ AWG16 ≥ 16 mm2 ≥ AWG6 HD012 HD100 HD101 1821 217 4 829 837 8 829 838 6 Rated current Power loss (at rated current) Ambient temperature AC 12 A 11 W 20 W –10 °C ... +60 °C (+14 ... 140 °F) Derating 3 % IN at 40 °C ... 60 °C (113 ... 140 °F) Degree of protection Mains and the motor connection IP20 ≤ 4 mm2 ≤ AWG12 Inverter connection Weight Screw terminals 4 mm2 (AWG 10) Cables with conductor end sleeves 0.40 kg (0.88 lb) 0.48 kg (1.1 lb) 0S 0L for MOVITRAC® B ...-5A3 0005 / 0008 / 0011 / 0015 0022 / 0030 / 0040 for MOVITRAC® B ...-2A3 0005 / 0008 0011 / 0015 / 0022 Can be sub-mounted for sizes System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 0.55 kg (1.2 lb) 65 4 kVA i f n Technical Data HD series output chokes P Hz HD dimension drawing 001 / 002 / 003 [mm (in)]: Output choke type HD001 HD002 HD003 output choke Main dimensions Installation dimensions Inside diameter Hole dimension A B C a b d e 121 (4.76) 64 (2.5) 131 (5.16) 80 (3.1) 50 (2.0) 50 (2.0) 5.8 (0.23) 66 (2.6) 49 (1.9) 73 (2.9) 44 (1.7) 38 (1.5) 23 (0.91) 5.8 (0.23) 170 (6.69) 64 (2.5) 185 (7.28) 120 (4.72) 50 (2.0) 88 (3.5) 7.0 (0.28) 130 (5.12) 24 (0.94) 158 (6.22) [1] 178 (7.01) 5 (0.2) Dimension drawing for HD012 5 (0.2) 80 (3.1) 45 (1.8) [1] Length = 100 mm (3.94 in) 66 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data HD series output chokes kVA i f n 4 P Hz Dimension drawing for HD100 / HD101: 208.5 (8.209) 80 (3.1) e b d e M5 45 (1.8) Output choke type MOVITRAC® B HD100 Size 0S 226 (8.90) 248 (9.76) 196 (7.72) HD101 Size 0L 314.5 (12.38) 336.5 (13.25) 284.5 (11.20) System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B b d e 67 4 kVA i 4.23 f n Technical Data EMC-module FKE12B/13B P Hz EMC-module FKE12B/13B Using the EMC module, you can reach limit class C1 (B) on the input and output sides. The EMC module is designed for 100 % operation and 125 % operation. Type Part number FKE12B FKE13B 829 590 5 829 591 3 Rated voltage 3 × AC 230 ... 500 V Voltage drop in the filter (at rated current) <1% Rated current AC 12 A Power loss (at rated current) 20 W Ambient temperature -10 °C ... +60 °C (+14 ... 140 °F) Derating 3 % IN at 40 °C ... 60 °C (113 ... 140 °F) Degree of protection IP20 Mains and the motor connection Screw terminals 4 mm2 (AWG 10) Inverter connection Cables with conductor end sleeves Weight 0.40 kg (0.88 lb) 0.48 kg (1.1 lb) 0S 0L for MOVITRAC B ...-5A3 0005 / 0008 / 0011 / 0015 0022 / 0030 / 0040 for MOVITRAC® B ...-2A3 0005 / 0008 0011 / 0015 / 0022 Can be sub-mounted for sizes ® Dimension drawing: 208.5 (8.209) 80 (3.1) 68 e b d e M5 45 (1.8) EMC module MOVITRAC® B FKE12B Size 0S 226 (8.90) 248 (9.76) 196 (7.72) FKE13B Size 0L 314.5 (12.38) 336.5 (13.25) 284.5 (11.20) b d e System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B kVA Technical Data HF output filter 4.24 i f n 4 P Hz HF output filter SEW output filters of the HF type are sine filters. Sine filters smoothen the output voltage of inverters. Use output filters in the following cases: • In group drives (several motor leads in parallel); the discharge currents in the motor cables are suppressed. • To protect the motor winding insulation of non-SEW motors, which are not suitable for inverters. • To protect against overvoltage spikes in long motor cables (> 100 m (328 ft)) NOTE Do not use output filters in hoists because of the voltage drop in the filter! NOTE During project planning of the drive, take into account the voltage drop in the output filter and consequently the reduced motor torque available. This applies particularly to AC 230 V units with output filters. Output filters attenuate interference emission via unshielded motor lines. The ambient temperature is 0 ... +45 °C (32 ... 113 °F) (reduction: 3 % per K up to max. 60 °C (140 °F)). Output filter type Part number HF008-5031) HF015-5031) HF022-5031) HF030-5031) HF040-5031) HF055-5031) 826 029 X 826 030 3 826 031 1 826 032 X 826 311 6 826 312 4 2) Rated voltage VN 3 × AC 200 V –10 % ... 3 × AC 500 V +10 %, 50/60 Hz Earth-leakage current at UN I 0 mA Power loss at IN PV 25 W 35 W 55 W Degree of protection (EN 60529) 65 W 90 W 115 W IP20 Connections / tightening torque M4 terminal stud 1.6 Nm ± 20 % / 14 lb in ± 20 % 3.1 kg (6.8 lb) Weight 4.4 kg (9.7 lb) 10.8 kg (23.8 lb) Assignment to AC 400/500 V units Voltage drop at IN U < 6.5 % (7.5 %) at AC 400 V / < 4 % (5 %) at AC 500 V and fAmax = 50 Hz (60 Hz) 3) Rated throughput current IN 400 V at Vsupply = 3 × AC 400 V Rated throughput current3) IN 500 V at Vsupply = 3 × AC 500 V AC 2.5 A AC 4 A AC 6 A AC 8 A AC 10 A AC 12 A AC 2 A AC 3 A AC 5 A AC 6 A AC 8 A AC 10 A Rated operation (100 %) 3) 0003 ... 0011 0015 0022 0030 0040 0055 Increased power (125 %) 3) 0003 ... 0005 0008/0011 0015 0022 0030 0040 Assignment to AC 230 V units Voltage drop at IN U 3) Rated throughput current at Vsupply = AC 230 V IN 230 V AC 4.3 A < 18.5 % (19 %) at AC 230 V with fAmax = 50 Hz (60 Hz) AC 6.5 A AC 10.8 A AC 13 A AC 17.3 A AC 22 A Nennbetrieb (100 %) 3) 0003 ... 0008 0011 0015/0022 - 0037 0055 Increased power (125 %) 3) 0003 ... 0005 0008 0011 ... 0022 - - 0037 1) Approved to UL/cUL in conjunction with MOVITRAC® inverters. SEW-EURODRIVE will provide a certificate on request. 2) A reduction of 6 % IN per 10 Hz applies above fN = 60 Hz for the rated through current IN. 3) Only applies to operation without VDC link connection. For operating the inverter with VDC link connection, observe the project planning notes in the system manual of the respective inverter. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 69 4 kVA i f n Technical Data HF output filter P Hz Output filter type Part number HF075-5031) HF023-4031) HF033-4031) HF047-4031) 826 313 2 825 784 1 825 785 X 825 786 8 Rated voltage VN 3 × AC 200 V – -10 %... 3 × AC 500 V +10 %, 50/60 Hz Earth-leakage current at UN I Power loss at IN HF450-503 826 948 3 2) 0 mA PV 135 W Degree of protection (EN 60529) 90 W IP 20 Connections / tightening torque M4 terminal stud 1.6 Nm ± 20 % / 14 lb in ± 20 % Weight 10.8 kg (23.8 lb) 120 W 200 W IP20 400 W IP 10 35 mm2 (AWG 2) 3.2 Nm / 28 lb in 15.9 kg (35.1 lb) 16.5 kg (36.4 lb) 23 kg (51 lb) 32 kg (71 lb) Assignment to AC 400/500 V units Voltage drop at IN U < 6.5 % (7.5 %) at AC 400 V / < 4 % (5 %) at AC 500 V and fAmax = 50 Hz (60 Hz) 3) IN 400 V AC 16 A AC 23 A AC 33 A AC 47 A AC 90 A IN 500 V AC 13 A AC 19 A AC 26 A AC 38 A AC 72 A Rated operation (100 %) 3) 0075 0110 0150/03004) 0220 0370/0450/ 05504)/07504) Increased power (125 %) 3) 0055 0075 0110/02204) 0150 0300/0370/ 0450/05504)/ 07504) Rated throughput current at Vsupply = 3 × AC 400 V Rated throughput current3) at Vsupply = 3 × AC 500 V Assignment to AC 230 V units Voltage drop at IN U < 18.5 % (19 %) at AC 230 V with fAmax = 50 Hz (60 Hz) Rated throughput current3) at Vsupply = AC 230 V Rated operation (100 %) 3) Increased power (125 %) 3) IN 230 V AC 29 A AC 42 A AC 56.5 A AC 82.6 A AC 156 A 0075 0110 0150/03004) 0220 0300 0055 0075 0110/02204) 0150 0220/0300 1) Approved to UL/cUL in conjunction with MOVITRAC® frequency inverters. SEW-EURODRIVE will provide a certificate on request. 2) A reduction of 6 % IN per 10 Hz applies above fN = 60 Hz for the rated through current IN. 3) Only applies for operation without VDC link connection. For operation with VDClink connection, observe the project planning instructions in the MOVITRAC® system manual, section "Project Planning/Connecting the optional power components". 4) Connect 2 HF... output filters together in parallel for operation with these MOVITRAC® units. 70 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B kVA Technical Data HF output filter i f n 4 P Hz HF...-503 dimension drawing [mm (in)]: 1 1 1 M ~ MOVIDRIVE® MOVIDRIVE® V2 U2 V5 B b B b W2 U1 V1 4 5 W1 6 8 MOVIDRIVE® c c A a C A C Type Main dimensions A HF008 / 015 / 022 / 030-503 HF040 / 055 / 075-503 Type B 80 (3.1) 286 (11.3) 176 (6.93) 135 (5.31) 296 (11.7) 216 (8.50) Installation dimensions Hole dimension Ventilation clearances a b – 265 (10.4) 7 (0.3) 100 (3.94) 100 (3.94) 70 (2.8) 283 (11.1) 7 (0.3) 100 (3.94) 100 (3.94) HF008 / 015 / 022 / 030-503 HF040 / 055 / 075-503 C c Top Bottom H b HF450-503 dimension drawing [mm (in)]: c 4 5 6 7 U VW a B T Only the mounting position shown in the dimension drawing is permitted Main dimensions Output filter type HF450-503 Output filter type HF450-503 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B B H T 465 (18.3) 385 (15.2) 240 (9.45) Installation dimensions Hole dimension Ventilation clearances a b c Top Bottom 436 (17.2) 220 (8.66) 8.5 (0.33) 100 (3.94) 100 (3.94) 71 4 kVA i f n Technical Data HF output filter P Hz HF...-403 dimension drawing [mm (in)]: Type Main dimensions Standard mounting position A B C/C1 b a 145 (5.71) 284 (11.2) 365/390 (14.4/ 15.4) 268 (10.6) 60 (2.4) HF047-403 190 (7.48) 300 (11.8) 385/400 (15.2/ 15.7) 284 (11.2) 80 (3.1) Type Horizontal mounting position HF023-403 HF033-403 Hole dimension Ventilation clearances d c1 e At the side Top Bottom 210 (8.27) 334 (13.1) 6.5 (0.26) 30 (1.2) 150 (5.91) 150 (5.91) HF023-403 HF033-403 HF047-403 72 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B kVA Technical Data Fieldbus connection 4.25 i f n 4 P Hz Fieldbus connection 4.25.1 Fieldbus gateways The fieldbus gateways convert standard fieldbuses into the SEW SBus. This means that up to 8 inverters can be triggered using one gateway. The controller (PLC or PC) and the MOVITRAC® frequency inverter exchange process data such as a control word or speed using the fieldbus. You need an FSC11B communication option for connecting the MOVITRAC® B unit to the fieldbus gateway. This is also necessary if the gateway is integrated in the inverter. The FIO11B module cannot be used for connecting. In general, you can also connect and operate other SEW units (such as MOVIDRIVE® inverters) using the SBus. There are two different versions of gateway functionality: • Integrated in the inverter: The DFx..B fieldbus interface is mounted in MOVITRAC® B. PROFIBUS DeviceNet EtherCAT PROFINET EtherNet/IP PROFIBUS / PROFIsafe® PROFINET / PROFIsafe® MOVITRAC® B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SPS / PLC SBus • In separate housing: The DFx..B fieldbus interface is mounted in an UOH11B housing. The UFI11A gateway is available for INTERBUS. MOVITRAC® B PROFIBUS DeviceNet EtherCAT PROFINET EtherNet/IP PROFIBUS / PROFIsafe® PROFINET / PROFIsafe® 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SPS / PLC SBus NOTE If a fieldbus interface is factory-installed in MOVITRAC® B, then SBus address P881 is already factory set to "1". In MOVITRAC® B without fieldbus interface, SBus address P881 is factory set to "0". System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 73 4 kVA i f n Technical Data Fieldbus connection P Hz Gateways are available for the following bus systems for connection to fieldbuses. Bus Separate housing Integrated in inverter1) PROFIBUS DFP21B / UOH11B MC07B.../FSC11B/DFP21B DeviceNet DFD11B/UOH11B MC07B.../FSC11B/DFD11B EtherCAT DFE24B/UOH11B MC07B.../FSC11B/DFE24B PROFINET DFE32B/UOH11B MC07B.../FSC11B/DFE32B EtherNet/IP DFE33B / UOH11B MC07B.../FSC11B/DFE33B PROFIBUS / PROFIsafe® DFS11B / UOH11B MC07B.../FSC11B/DFS11B PROFINET / PROFIsafe® DFS21B / UOH11B MC07B.../FSC11B/DFS21B INTERBUS UFI11A (823 898 7) – 1) Integration in inverter not for size 0XS. MOVITRAC® B must be supplied with DC 24 V at terminals X12.8 and X12.9 when it supplies the gateways. Theory of operation The fieldbus gateways have standardized interfaces. Connect lower-level MOVITRAC® B units to the fieldbus gateway via the SBus unit system bus. Front view of MOVITRAC® B / UOH 11B H1 H2 X24 74 Description Function LED H1 (red) System error (only for gateway functions) LED H2 (green) Reserved X24 X terminal RS-485 interface for diagnostics via PC and MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data Fieldbus connection Dimension drawing for UOH kVA i f n 4 P Hz 185 (7.28) 234.5 (9.232) 28 (1.1) 257.5 (10.14) 224 (8.82) 5.5 (0.22) 4.5 (0.18) 30 (1.2) System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 22.5 (0.886) 100 (3.94) 75 4 kVA i f n Technical Data Fieldbus connection P Hz 4.25.2 Fieldbus interface DFP21B for PROFIBUS Description The MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter enables you to use the DFP21B option to connect to higher-level automation systems via PROFIBUS DP and DP-V1 thanks to its powerful, universal fieldbus interface. Refer to the publication "Fieldbus interface DFP21B PROFIBUS DP-V1" for installation. Electronics data DFP21B option DFP21B External voltage supply via X26 U = DC 24 V (–15 %, +20 %) Imax = DC 200 mA Pmax = 3.4 W PROFIBUS protocol options PROFIBUS DP and DP-V1 acc. to IEC 61158 Automatic baud rate detection 9.6 kBaud ... 12 MBaud Connection technology • • RUN BUS FAULT X30 Bus termination 20 21 22 23 Station address 1 ... 125, adjustable via DIP switches Name of the GSD file SEW_6009.GSD DP ident number 6009hex = 24585dec Applicationspecific parameter-setting data (Set-Prm-UserData) • • Diagnostics data 0 76 Not integrated, must be implemented using suitable PROFIBUS connector with switchable terminating resistors. DP configurations for DDLM_Chk_Cfg 24 25 26 AS Via 9-pin sub D connector Pin assignment acc. to IEC 61158 Length: 3 bytes Hex parameter setting 00,00,00 See publication "Fieldbus Interface DFP21B PROFIBUS DPV1". • Standard diagnostics: 6 bytes 1 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data Fieldbus connection kVA i f n 4 P Hz 4.25.3 Fieldbus Interface DFD11B for DeviceNet Description The MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter together with the DFD11B option and its highperformance universal fieldbus interface enable the connection to higher-level automation systems via the open and standardized DeviceNet fieldbus system. Refer to the publication "DFD11B DeviceNet Fieldbus Interface" for installation. Electronics data DFD11B option System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B External voltage supply via X26 U = DC 24 V (–15 %, +20 %) Imax = DC 200 mA Pmax = 3.4 W Communication protocol Master/slave connection set according to DeviceNet specification version 2.0 Number of process data words Can be set using DIP switch: • 1 ... 24 process data words with polled I/O • 1 ... 4 process data words with bit-strobe I/O Baud rate 125, 250 or 500 kbaud, can be set using DIP switch Bus cable length For thick cable according to DeviceNet specification 2.0 appendix B: • 500 m (1640 ft) with 125 kBaud • 250 m (820 ft) with 250 kBaud • 100 m (656 ft) with 500 kBaud Transmission level ISO 11 98 - 24 V Connection technology • • MAC ID 0 ... 63, can be set using DIP switch Max. 64 stations Supported services • • • EDS file name SEW_GATEWAY_DFD11B.eds 5-pin Phoenix-Kombicon terminal Pin assignment according to DeviceNet specification Polled I/O Bit-strobe I/O Explicit messages: – Get_Attribute_Single – Set_Attribute_Single – Reset – Allocate_MS_Connection_Set – Release_MS_Connection_Set 77 4 kVA i f n Technical Data Fieldbus connection P Hz 4.25.4 Fieldbus interface DFE24B for EtherCAT Description The MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter enables you to use the DFE24B option to connect to higher-level automation systems via EtherCAT thanks to its powerful, universal fieldbus interface. Refer to the publication "DFE24B EtherCAT Fieldbus Interface" for installation. Electronics data DFE24B option External voltage supply via X26 U = DC 24 V (–15 %, +20 %) Imax = DC 200 mA Pmax = 3.4 W Standards IEC 61158, IEC 61784-2 Baud rate 100 Mbaud full duplex Connection technology 2 × RJ45 (8x8 modular jack) Bus termination OSI Layer 1/2 78 Not integrated because bus termination is automatically activated. Ethernet II Station address Setting via EtherCAT master (→ Display with P093) Name of the XML file SEW_DFE24B.xml Vendor ID 0x59 (CANopenVendor ID) EtherCAT services • • CoE (CANopen over EtherCAT) VoE (Simple MOVILINK protocol over EtherCAT) System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data Fieldbus connection kVA i f n 4 P Hz 4.25.5 Fieldbus interface DFE32B for PROFINET IO RT Description The MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter enables you to use the DFE32B option to connect to higher-level automation systems via PROFINET IO RT thanks to its powerful, universal fieldbus interface. Refer to the publication "DFE32B PROFINET IO Fieldbus Interface" for installation. Electronics data DFE32B option External voltage supply via X26 U = DC 24 V (–15 %, +20 %) Imax = DC 200 mA Pmax = 3.4 W Application protocols • • • System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B PROFINET IO (Ethernet frames with frame identification 8892hex) to control and set parameters for the inverter. HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) for diagnostics using a Web browser. SMLP (Simple Movilink Protocol), protocol used by MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio. Port numbers used • • 300 (SMLP) 80 (HTTP) Ethernet services • • ARP ICMP (Ping) OSI Layer 1/2 Ethernet II Baud rate 100 Mbaud in full duplex process Connection technology 2 x RJ45 with internal switch and auto crossing Addressing 4 byte IP address or MAC-ID (00:0F:69:xx:xx:xx) Manufacturer ID (vendor ID) 010Ahex GSD file name GSML-V2.1-SEW-DFE-DFS-2Ports-YYYYMMTT.xml 79 4 kVA i f n Technical Data Fieldbus connection P Hz 4.25.6 DFE33B fieldbus interface for EtherNet/IP Description The MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter enables you to use the EtherNet/IP DFE33B option to connect to higher-level automation systems via EtherNet/IP thanks to its powerful, universal fieldbus interface. Refer to the publication "DFE33B EtherNet/IP Fieldbus Interface" for installation. Electronics data DFE33B option DFE33B MODULE STATUS NETWORK STATUS External voltage supply via X26 U = DC 24 V (–15 %, +20 %) Imax = DC 200 mA Pmax = 3.4 W Application protocols • • xx xx xx xx • ETHERNET/IP 80 • EtherNet/IP (Industrial Protocol) to control and set parameters for the inverter. HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) for diagnostics using a Web browser. SMLP (Simple Movilink Protocol), protocol used by MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) to assign address parameter automatically. Port numbers used • • • • • 44818 (EtherNet/IP TCP) 2222 (EtherNet/IP UDP) 300 (SMLP) 80 (HTTP) 67 / 88 (DHCP) Ethernet services • • ARP ICMP (Ping) ISO/OSI Layer 1/2 ISO/OSI Layer 3/4 Ethernet II TCP/IP and UDP/IP Baud rate 10 / 100 MBaud Connection technology 2 x RJ45 with internal switch and auto crossing Addressing 4 byte IP address or MAC-ID (00:0F:69:xx:xx:xx) Manufacturer ID (vendor ID) 013Bhex EDS file name SEW_GATEWAY_DFE33B.eds System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data Fieldbus connection kVA i f n 4 P Hz 4.25.7 Fieldbus interface DFS11B for PROFIBUS / PROFIsafe® Description The MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter enables you to use the DFS11B option to connect to higher-level automation systems via PROFIBUS with PROFIsafe® thanks to its powerful, universal fieldbus interface. Refer to the publication "DFS11B PROFIBUS DP-V1 with PROFIsafe® Fieldbus Interface" for installation. Electronics data DFS11B option External voltage supply via X26 U = DC 24 V (–15 %, +20 %) Imax = DC 200 mA Pmax = 3.4 W PROFIBUS protocol options PROFIBUS DP and DP-V1 acc. to IEC 61158 Automatic baud rate detection 9.6 kBaud ... 12 MBaud Connection technology • • Bus termination Via 9-pin sub D connector Pin assignment acc. to IEC 61158 Not integrated, must be implemented using suitable PROFIBUS connector with switchable terminating resistors. Station address 1 ... 125, adjustable via DIP switches F address 1 ... 1022, adjustable via DIP switches Name of the GSD file SEW_6009.GSD DP ident number 6009hex = 24585dec Applicationspecific parameter-setting data (Set-Prm-UserData) • • DP configurations for DDLM_Chk_Cfg Diagnostics data Length: 3 bytes Hex parameter setting 00,00,00 See publication "DFS11B PROFIBUS DP-V1 with PROFIsafe® Fieldbus Interface". • Standard diagnostics: 6 bytes NOTE Safety-oriented applications are implemented using PROFIsafe® interfaces. Refer to the publication "DFS11B PROFIBUS DP-V1 with PROFIsafe® Fieldbus Interface" for installation. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 81 4 kVA i f n Technical Data Fieldbus connection P Hz 4.25.8 Fieldbus interface DFS21B for PROFINET / PROFIsafe® Description The MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter enables you to use the DFS21B option to connect to higher-level automation systems via PROFINET IO RT with PROFIsafe® thanks to its powerful, universal fieldbus interface. Refer to the publication "DFS21B PROFINET with PROFIsafe®" for installation. Electronics data DFS21B option External voltage supply via X26 U = DC 24 V (–15 %, +20 %) Imax = DC 200 mA Pmax = 3.4 W Application protocols • • • PROFINET IO (Ethernet frames with frame identification 8892hex) to control and set parameters for the inverter. HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) for diagnostics using a Web browser. SMLP (Simple Movilink Protocol), protocol used by MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio. Port numbers used • • 300 (SMLP) 80 (HTTP) Ethernet services • • ARP ICMP (Ping) OSI Layer 1/2 Ethernet II Baud rate 100 Mbaud in full duplex process Connection technology 2 x RJ45 with internal switch and auto crossing Addressing 4 byte IP address or MAC-ID (00:0F:69:xx:xx:xx) F address 1 ... 1022, adjustable via DIP switches Manufacturer ID (vendor ID) 010Ahex GSD file name GSML-V2.1-SEW-DFE-DFS-2Ports-YYYYMMTT.xml NOTE Safety-oriented applications are implemented using PROFIsafe® interfaces. Refer to the publication "DF21B PROFINET with PROFIsafe® Fieldbus Interface" for installation. 82 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data MOVI-PLC® 4.26 kVA i f n 4 P Hz MOVI-PLC® 4.26.1 Unit versions The MOVI-PLC® controller is available in different variants, which differ in the modules available from a range of libraries. Refer to the publication "MOVI-PLC® Controller" for installation. MOVI-PLC® unit type: MOVI-PLC® basic MOVI-PLC® advanced Description DHP11B-T0 1) MOVI-PLC® basic controller DHP11B-T1 Application version I includes the functions electronic cam and synchronous operation in addition to the T0 version. DHP11B-T21) Application version II includes, for example, handling in addition to the T1 version. DHE41B Functionality of MOVI-PLC® basic, but also enormous power reserves and high-speed interfaces. 1) Versions T1 and T2 are only partly useful together with MOVITRAC® B. Please contact SEWEURODRIVE in this case. 4.26.2 Description With the MOVI-PLC® basic DHP11B controller, SEW-EURODRIVE's product portfolio offers a user-programmable controller compliant with the IEC 61131-3 and PLCopen standards for the first time. The DHP11B option is integrated ex works (not in size 0XS) or supplied in a separate UOH housing. Only SEW EURODRIVE can carry out an expansion of the unit with this option. The MOVI-PLC® DHP11B.. controller is equipped with a PROFIBUS DPV1 slave interface, 2 SBus interfaces (CAN), RS-485, and 8 digital inputs/outputs, of which 5 are interrupt capable. The DHP11B control card can control 12 units simultaneously (MOVIDRIVE®, MOVITRAC®, MOVIMOT®). System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 83 4 kVA i f n Technical Data MOVI-PLC® P Hz 4.26.3 Electronics data Electronics data of MOVI-PLC® basic DHP11B: Status display LEDs for • Voltage supply I/O • Firmware • Program • PROFIBUS • System buses Fieldbus • • • • • • PROFIBUS DP and DPV1 to IEC 61158 Automatic detection of baud rate from 9.6 kbaud to 12 Mbaud Implement bus connection with suitable connector GSD file SEW_6007.GSD DP ident. number 6007hex (24579dec) Maximum 32 process data System bus • 2 system buses (CAN) for control of 12 inverters and CANopen I/O modules CAN layer 2 (SCOM cyclic, acyclic) or via the SEW MOVILINK® protocol Baud rate: 125 kBaud ... 1 MBaud External bus terminator Address range: 0 ... 127 • • • • 84 Engineering Via RS-485, PROFIBUS and the system buses Panel operation Via RS-485 and CAN 2 (in preparation) Connection technology • • • Binary inputs/ outputs 8 I/Os to IEC 61131-2; can be configured as inputs or outputs, 5 of which are interrupt-capable. Memory • • • Program: 512 kByte Data: 128 kByte Retain: 24 kByte Tools for startup • Programming languages – STL – ST – LD – FUP – CFC – AS • Libraries for optimized inverter control PROFIBUS: 9-pole sub-D connector according to IEC 61158 System buses and I/Os: plug-in terminals RS-485: RJ10 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Technical Data UWU52A switched-mode power supply 4.27 kVA i f n 4 P Hz UWU52A switched-mode power supply UWU52A switched-mode power supply Part number 188 181 7 Input voltage 1 × AC 110 V ... AC 240 V Voltage range AC 95 ... 265 V, DC 110 … 300 V Frequency 50/60 Hz Maximum no-load current AC 40 mA Rated input current at 1 × AC 110 V at 1 × AC 230 V AC 1.04 A AC 0.63 A Output voltage DC 24 V (–1 % / +3 %) Rated output current at 40 °C at 55 °C DC 2.5 A DC 2.0 A Residual ripple < 50 mVeff Interference voltage < 120 mVSS Power loss < 5.5 W Weight 0.23 kg (0.51 lb) Working temperature 0 ... +55 °C (+32 ... +131 °F) (condensation not permitted) Degree of protection IP20 (EN 60529) Protection class I Connection Screw terminals for cable cross sections 0.20 ... 2.5 mm2 (AWG24 ... AWG13) 109 (4.29) 38 (1.5) 76 (3.0) 101 (3.98) EN 60715TM35 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 4 (0.2) 85 kVA 5 i 5 f n Parameters Explanation of the parameters P Hz Parameters As a rule, you only set the parameters during startup and if servicing is required. You can set the MOVITRAC® B parameters in various ways: • With the keypad • With the MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio program on a PC via the RS-485 interface • Copy the parameters using the keypad If you set the parameters other than the factory setting: Enter changes in the parameter list in the "Startup" section. 5.1 Explanation of the parameters If a choice is offered, the factory setting is indicated in bold. The parameters for motor startup are described in the section "Startup with the FGB keypad". You can select the parameters on the FBG11B keypad as follows: Selection in the FBG11B long menu Selection in the FBG11B short and long menus Direct selection in the FBG11B keypad and in the FBG11B long menu Selection within FGB motor startup The following symbols explain the parameters: 1 2 These parameters are switch-selectable and available in parameter sets 1 and 2. These parameters can only be changed with INHIBITED inverter status (= output stage at high resistance). The startup function automatically changes this parameter. AUTO No. 86 FBG Name 0__ Display values 00_ Process values Description 000 Speed (signed) [rpm] The displayed speed is the calculated actual speed. 001 User display for DBG11B The user display is defined by the following parameters: • P850 Scaling factor numerator • P851 Scaling factor denominator • P852 User-defined unit 002 Frequency (signed) [Hz] Output frequency of the inverter. 004 Output current (amount) [% IN] Apparent current of the rated unit current. 005 Active current (signed) [% IN] Active current in the range 0... 200 % of the rated unit current. The display value is positive when torque is in positive sense of rotation, and negative when torque is in negative sense of rotation. 008 DC link voltage [V] DC link voltage. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Parameters Explanation of the parameters No. FBG kVA i f n P Hz Name Description 009 Output current [A] Apparent current at the inverter output, displayed in AC A. 01_ Status displays 010 Inverter status Status of the unit output stage: • INHIBITED • ENABLED 011 Operating status The following operating states are available: • 24 V OPERATION • CONTROLLER INHIBIT • NO ENABLE • CURRENT AT STANDSTILL • ENABLE • FACTORY SETTING • ERROR • SAFE STOP 012 Error status Fault number and fault in plain text. 013 Current parameter set Parameter set 1 or 2. 014 Heat sink temperature [°C] Heat sink temperature of the inverter. 02_ Analog setpoints 020 Analog input AI1 [V] Voltage 0 ... +10 V at analog input AI1. When S11 = ON and P112 AI1 operating mode: • = NMAX, 0 ... 20 mA: Display 0 ... 10 V = → 0 ... 20 mA • = NMAX, 4 ... 20 mA: Display 2 ... 10 V = → 4 ... 20 mA 021 Analog input AI2 (optional) Unit: [V] Voltage (-10 V ... +10 V) 03_ Binary inputs 030 Binary input DI00 Status of binary input DI00 (Fault reset = factory setting) 031 Binary input DI01 Status of binary input DI01 (CW/STOP= fixed assignment) 032 Binary input DI02 Status of binary input DI02 (CCW/STOP = factory setting) 033 Binary input DI03 Status of binary input DI03 (ENABLE = factory setting) 034 Binary input DI04 Status of binary input DI04 (n11/n21 = factory setting) 035 Binary input DI05 Status of binary input DI05 (n12/n22 = factory setting) 039 Binary inputs DI00 ... DI05 Collective display of binary inputs. 05_ Binary outputs 051 Binary output DO01 Status of binary output DO01 (/FAULT = factory setting) 052 Binary output DO02 Status of binary output DO02 (BRAKE RELEASED = factory setting) 053 Binary output DO03 Status of binary output DO03 (READY FOR OPERATION = factory setting) 059 Binary outputs DO01 ... DO03 Collective display of binary outputs. 07_ Unit data 070 Unit type The unit type is displayed, e.g. MC07B0008-2B1 071 Rated output current [A] The rated unit current is displayed in [A] 076 Firmware basic unit Part number and firmware version 077 DBG firmware Part number and firmware version System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 5 87 5 kVA i No. 88 f n Parameters Explanation of the parameters P Hz FBG Name Description 08_ Fault memory 080 ... 084 Fault t-0 ... Fault t-4 (FBG11B keypad: fault t-0 only) 09_ Bus diagnostics 094 PO 1 Setpoint [hex] Process data output word 1, setpoint 095 PO 2 Setpoint [hex] Process data output word 2, setpoint 096 PO 3 Setpoint [hex] Process data output word 3, setpoint 097 PI 1 Actual value [hex] Process data input word 1, actual value 098 PI 2 Actual value [hex] Process data input word 2, actual value 099 PI 3 Actual value [hex] Process data input word 3, actual value The unit saves the following information when an error occurs. MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio can display this information if required: • P036/P053 Status of binary inputs/binary outputs • P013 Current parameter set • P011 Operating status of the inverter • P010 Inverter status • P014 Heat sink temperature • P000 Speed • P004 Output current • P005 Active current • Unit utilization • P008 DC link voltage 1__ Setpoints/ramp generators 10_ Setpoint selection/frequency input 100 Setpoint source 0 / Bipolar / Fixed setpoint The setpoint is provided by the analog input or the fixed setpoints. The unit processes the fixed setpoints according to their value. The speed is limited by the maximum set speed P302/P312 in the event of a wire breakage. 1 / Unipolar / Fixed setpoint The setpoint is provided by the analog input or the fixed setpoints. The unit processes the fixed setpoints according to their value. The binary inputs specify the direction of rotation. 2/ RS-485 / Fixed setpoint The setpoint is provided by the RS-485 interface. The sign of the setpoint determines the direction of rotation. 4 / Motor potentiometer / Fixed setpoint Set the setpoint by programming the terminals Motor potentiometer up and Motor potentiometer down accordingly. The motor potentiometer is a virtual potentiometer that does not correspond to the setpoint potentiometer on the unit. 6 / Fixed setpoint + AI1 The setpoint is calculated by adding the selected fixed setpoint and analog input AI1. The binary inputs specify the direction of rotation. Furthermore, P112 AI1 operation mode applies. 7 / Fixed setpoint * AI1 The value at the analog input AI1 serves as an evaluation factor for the selected fixed setpoint (0 ... 10 V = 0 ... 100 %). If no fixed setpoint is selected, nmin applies. The binary inputs specify the direction of rotation. 8 / MASTER SBus1 In master/slave mode, the setpoint is provided by the master via system bus 1. See P75x master/slave function. 9 / MASTER RS-485 The setpoint is provided by the master in master/slave mode via the RS-485 interface. See P75x master/slave function. 10 / SBus 1 / Fixed setpoint The system bus specifies the setpoint. The sign of the setpoint determines the direction of rotation. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Parameters Explanation of the parameters No. 100 FBG kVA i f n 5 P Hz Name Description Setpoint source 11 / Frequency setpoint input / Fixed setpoint The frequency at binary input DI04 specifies the setpoint. Set the value with the P102 Frequency scaling parameter. You can influence the value with P110 AI1 scaling. The following parameters are included in the scaling if the PI controller is activated: • P254 PI actual value scaling • P255 PI actual value offset The optimum pulse duty factor (pulse width of the high and low signal) should be 1 : 1. The factor determines the rising edge and the falling edge of the input signal. Use P102 Frequency scaling to determine at which input frequency the system setpoint 100 % is reached. The reference of the system setpoint is set via P112 AI1 Operating mode. The direction of rotation is set via the binary inputs CW/STOP and CCW/STOP. Frequency scaling 25 ... 120 kHz 12.5 ... 24.99 kHz 10 ... 12.49 kHz 1 ... 9.99 kHz Minimum response time (delay) 20 ms 40 ms 60 ms 500 ms Resolution Frequency input 50 Hz 25 Hz 16.7 Hz 2 Hz Setpoint cascade 3000 · rpm DI04 f P110 · P102 · P302 P112 P100 P302: Maximum speed in rpm P110: Gain 0.1 ... 1 ... 10 P102: Frequency scaling 1 ... 120 kHz P112: Operation mode setpoint Example: A setpoint generator with the value range 1 ... 50 kHz is to set the motor speed of 30 ... 1500 rpm. Set the following parameters for this: • P102 Frequency scaling: 50 kHz • P112 Operation mode setpoint: 3000 rpm • Setpoint scaling P110: 0.5 14 / Bipolar AI2 / Fixed setpoint The setpoint is provided by the optional analog input AI2 or the fixed setpoints. The unit processes the fixed setpoints according to their value. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 89 5 kVA i No. 101 f n Parameters Explanation of the parameters P Hz FBG Name Description Control signal source 0 / Terminals The binary inputs determine the control. 1 / RS-485 The RS-485 interface and the binary inputs determine the control. 3 / SBus The system bus and the binary inputs determine the control. 4 / 3-Wire Control The 3-wire control principle determines the control. In this case, the enable and direction of rotation signals will respond edgecontrolled. • Connect start key CW with contact to binary input "CW/Stop". • Connect start key CCW with contact to binary input "CCW/Stop". • Connect stop key with normally open input "Enable/Stop". If you connect CW and CCW at the same time, the drive decelerates with downwards ramp P131/P141. If the 3-WIRE CONTROL control signal source is active and the drive is started by a start edge: You can stop the drive using the STOP button when the RUN/STOP buttons are enabled. Then you can restart the drive with the RUN button without another start edge being required. The unit stores a start edge if you stop the drive using the stop button. If you then press the RUN key, the unit will enable the drive immediately. Control source 3-WIRE CONTROL X12:2 X12: X12:2 = CW/Stop X12:3 = CCW/Stop X12:4 = Enable/Stop X10 = Setpoint input AI fA = Output frequency f0 = Start/Stop frequency CW = Clockwise CCW = Counterclockwise t11 [1] = t11 UP t11 [2] = t11 DOWN t13 = Stop ramp X12:3 X12:4 X10 X10: fA [Hz] 102 90 Frequency scaling fFI1max Setting range: 0.1 ... 10 ... 120.00 [kHz] System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Parameters Explanation of the parameters No. FBG kVA i f n 5 P Hz Name Description 103 FI1 reference 0 / nmax 1 / nreference 104 Setpoint reference speed nreference for frequency input FI1 and analog inputs AI1 and AI2 Setting range: 0 ... 3000 ... 6000 rpm 105 Wire breakage detection Wire breakage detection is only available in operating mode 4 ... 20 mA. 0 / No response 2 / Immediate stop/fault The inverter performs an emergency stop with an error message. The inverter inhibits the output stage and the brake is applied. The inverter revokes the ready signal and sets the programmed fault output. A restart is only possible after a fault reset has been performed during which the inverter is reinitialized. 4 / Rapid stop / Fault The inverter brakes the drive at the specified stop ramp (P136/P146). The inverter brakes with DC braking in 2-quadrant operation. Once the stop speed is reached, the inverter inhibits the output stage and the brake is applied. The fault is signaled immediately. The inverter revokes the ready signal and sets the programmed fault output. A restart is only possible after a fault reset has been performed during which the inverter is reinitialized. 7 / Rapid stop / Warning The fault response corresponds to STOP/FAULT, except the inverter does not revoke the ready signal and the fault output is set. Frequency input FI1 characteristic curve The frequency input can be configured using a characteristic curve: FI1 operating mode Maximum speed Setpoint reference speed Input value 0 ... fFI1max [Hz] 106 Normalization Normalized input value 0 ... +100 % FI1charact. curve Normalized setpoint Speed setpoint –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % in rpm FI1 characteristic curve x1 Setting range: 0 ... 100 % 107 FI1 characteristic curve y1 Setting range: –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % 108 FI1 characteristic curve x2 Setting range: 0 ... 100 % 109 FI1 characteristic curve y2 Setting range: –100 ... 0 ... +100 % A 2-point characteristic curve is described by the coordinates x1/y1 and x2/y2, with which the FI1 frequency input is evaluated. Normalized setpoint +100 % Factory setting 0% 0 Hz example System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Input value +100 % fFI1max 91 5 kVA i No. 11_ f n Parameters Explanation of the parameters P Hz FBG Name Description Analog input 1 (0 ... +10 V) The analog input can be configured using a characteristic curve. Maximum speed Setpoint reference speed Normalized input value Input value 0 ... 10 V Normalization 0 ... +100 % AI1 charact. curve AI1 operating mode Speed setpoint in rpm Normalized setpoint –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % Speed setpoint in % PI controller setpoint in % 110 AI1 scaling (up to firmware .12) Setting range: 0.1 ... 1 ... +10. Is used to define the slope of the setpoint characteristic curve. If you set the scaling to the value "1", then the input voltage VI = 10 V at the analog input corresponds to the operating mode of the analog input (P112). This is the speed 3000 rpm or the set maximum speed (P302). n 3000 rpm / nmax 10 2 1 0.5 0.1 10 V U1 Slope of the setpoint characteristic curve You can only use the first quadrant with a unipolar setpoint source. Negative setpoint selections create the setpoint zero. P110 AI1 scaling has no effect if you set the current input operating mode. You set the current input operating mode by setting P112 AI1 to NMAX, 0-20 mA or NMAX, 4-20 mA. 112 92 AI1 Operating mode 1 / 10 V, reference maximum speed Voltage input with reference nmax (0 ... 10 V = 0 ... nmax). You can adjust the characteristic curve with AI1 scaling. Switch S11 = V. 5 / 0 ... 20 mA, reference maximum speed Current input 0 ... 20 mA = 0 ... nmax. P110 AI1 Scaling has no effect. Switch S11 = mA. 6 / 4 ... 20 mA, reference maximum speed Current input 4 ... 20 mA = 0 ... nmax. P110 AI1 Scaling has no effect. Switch S11 = mA. 7 / 0 ... 10 V, n-reference 8 / 0 ... 20 mA, n-reference 9 / 4 ... 20 mA, n-reference System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Parameters Explanation of the parameters No. 113 FBG kVA i f n 5 P Hz Name Description AI1 voltage offset (up to firmware 12) Setting range: –10 V ... 0 ... +10 V The zero passage of the setpoint characteristic curve can be moved along the UE axis. n nmax P302/P312 Reference point with positive offset (P113) U offset UE Reference point with negative offset -nmax P302/P312 0V 1V 2V 3V 4V 116 AI1 characteristic curve x1 Setting range: 0 ... 100 % 117 AI1 characteristic curve y1 Setting range: –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % 118 AI1 characteristic curve x2 Setting range: 0 ... 100 % 119 AI1 characteristic curve y2 Setting range: –100 ... 0 ... +100 % 5V 6V 7V 8V 9V 10V A 2-point characteristic curve is described by the coordinates x1/y1 and x2/y2, with which the AI1 analog input is evaluated. Normalized setpoint +100 % Factory setting 0% 0V 0 mA 4 mA Example System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Input value +100 % 10 V 20 mA 93 5 kVA i No. 12_ f n Parameters Explanation of the parameters P Hz FBG Name Description Analog input AI2 / FBG Setpoint generator (option) Analog input AI2 is only available with the optional analog module FIO11B. Maximum speed Input value –10 V ... 0 ... 10 V Normalization Normalized input value –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % AI2 charact. curve Normalized setpoint Speed setpoint in rpm –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % Speed setpoint in % PI controller actual value in % 94 120 AI2 operating mode 0 / No function The setpoint at AI2 is not used; the external current limitation is set to 100 %. 1 / 0 ... ±10 V + Setpoint / 100 % corresponds to nmax The evaluated setpoint at AI2 is added to setpoint 1 (= AI1) observing the signs; the external current limitation is set to 100 % Imax. 2 / 0 ... 10 V current limit / 100 % corresponds to Imax The input serves as external current limitation. 121 Addition FBG setpoint control module 0 / Off The unit does not take into account the value from the setpoint generator of the FBG11 keypad. 1 / ON The value from the setpoint generator of the FBG11 keypad is added to any set setpoint source bipolar/fixed setpoint, unipolar/fixed setpoint, RS-485/ fixed setpoint, frequency input/fixed setpoint or SBus/fixed setpoint. The addition also affects fixed setpoints. 2 / On (without fixed setpoint) The value from the setpoint generator of the FBG11 keypad is added to any set setpoint source bipolar/fixed setpoint, unipolar/fixed setpoint, RS-485/ fixed setpoint, frequency input/fixed setpoint or SBus/fixed setpoint. The addition does not affect fixed setpoints. 122 Direction of rotation FBG manual operation Setting the setpoint with the setpoint generator of the FBG11 keypad in FBG manual operation. 0 / Unipolar CW Adjustable speed: 0 ... + nmax. 1 / Unipolar CCW Adjustable speed: 0 ... – nmax. 2 / Bipolar CW and CCW Adjustable speed: – nmax ... + nmax. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Parameters Explanation of the parameters No. FBG kVA i n 5 P Hz Name Description 126 AI2 characteristic curve x1 Setting range –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % (–10 V ... 0 ... +10 V) 127 AI2 characteristic curve y1 Setting range –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % (–nmax ... 0 ... +nmax / 0 ... Imax) 128 AI2 characteristic curve x2 Setting range –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % (–10 V ... 0 ... +10 V) AI2 characteristic curve y2 Setting range –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % (–nmax ... 0 ... +nmax / 0 ... Imax) 129 f The characteristic curve is described by the coordinates x1/y1 and x2/y2, with which the analog input is evaluated. Normalized setpoint +100 % Factory setting –100 % –10 V 0% 0V Example Input value +100 % +10 V –100 % 13_ / 14_ Speed ramps 1 / 2 The ramp times refer to a setpoint change of n = 3000 rpm. Ramps t11/t21 up and t11/t21 down are effective when the setpoint is changed. The stop ramp t13/t23 is in effect when the enable is withdrawn by pressing the STOP/RESET key or via the terminals. 130 / 140 Ramp t11 / t21 up Setting range 0 ... 2 ... 2000 [s]; Acceleration ramp 131 / 141 Ramp t11 / t21 down Setting range 0 ... 2 ... 2000 [s]; Deceleration ramp 134 / 144 Ramp t12 / t22 up = down Setting range 0 ... 10 ... 2000 [s] The following applies to this ramp: UP = DOWN and CW = CCW. Ramps t12/t22 are activated by a binary input (→ P601 ... P608), which is set to the function "Ramp switchover". 135 / 145 S pattern t12 / t22 (In preparation) Setting range: 0 / 1 / 2 / 3 (0 = off, 1 = weak, 2 = medium, 3 = strong) The 2nd ramp (t12/ t22) of parameter sets 1 and 2 can be rounded with 3 pattern grades to achieve a smoother acceleration of the drive. Effect of the S pattern: 1 2 UE 1 2 Setpoint specification Without S pattern With S pattern t A started S pattern is interrupted by the stop ramp t13/t23 and a changeover to ramp t11/t21. Revoking the setpoint or a stop via the input terminals causes the started S curve to be completed. This means the drive can still accelerate in spite of the withdrawal of the setpoint. 136 / 146 Stop ramp t13 / t23 up = down System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Setting range 0 ... 2 ... 20 [s]; stop ramp when switching to the NO ENABLE operating status 95 5 kVA i f n Parameters Explanation of the parameters P Hz No. FBG 139 / 149 1 Name Description Ramp monitoring 1 / 2 Setting range: YES / NO If you set the deceleration ramps to a value that is a lot shorter than can be physically accomplished in this system, the turning drive will be stopped after expiration of the monitoring time. Such a setting will cause a fault signal and increase brake wear. This step also entails an increased setting of the respective ramp, if the ramp timeout definitely appears in form of a preset ramp that cannot be traveled. This parameter is an additional monitoring function for speed monitoring. This parameter only applies to the downwards ramp. This means the parameter can be used to monitor the downwards ramp, stop ramp or emergency stop ramp if speed monitoring is not desired. 2 15_ Motor potentiometer functionn (se P100 Setpoint source) The ramp times refer to a setpoint change of n = 3000 rpm. 150 Ramp t3 up = down Setting range 0.2 ... 20 ... 50 [s] The ramp is in effect when using the terminal functions Motor pot. up and Motor pot. down. 152 Save last setpoint off / OFF The inverter starts with nmin: • After power off and on • After revoking ENABLE If you use the motor potentiometer for permanent speed control, you will have to set P152 Save last setpoint to OFF. Otherwise, error message F25 EEPROM will appear after about 100,000 storage operations. Store only after setpoint change. If a fixed setpoint is deselected, the fixed setpoint will be used as motor potentiometer value. on / ON The inverter starts with the last set motor potentiometer setpoint: • After power off and on • After revoking ENABLE If a fixed setpoint is deselected, the old motor potentiometer setpoint will be used again. 16_ / 17_ Fixed setpoints 1 / 2 You can activate the fixed setpoints via the binary inputs DI02 ... DI05 with the arguments n11/n21 / n12/n22 and activate FIXED SETP. CHANGE (parameter 60_). You activate the fixed setpoints n13/n23 by assigning the functions n11/n21 and n12/n22 to two binary inputs and applying a "1" signal to the two inputs. 160 / 170 Internal setpoint n11 / n21 Setting range –5000 ... 150 ... 5000 [rpm] 161 / 171 Internal setpoint n12 / n22 Setting range –5000 ... 750 ... 5000 [rpm] 162 / 172 Internal setpoint n13 / n23 Setting range –5000 ... 1500 ... 5000 [rpm] 163 / 173 n11/n21 PI controller Setting range 0 ... 3 ... 100 [%] (see section Project planning / PI controller) 164 / 174 n12/n22 PI controller Setting range 0 ... 15 ... 100 [%] (see section Project planning / PI controller) 165 / 175 n13/n23 PI controller Setting range 0 ... 30 ... 100 [%] (see section Project planning / PI controller) 2__ Controller parameters 25_ PI controller (for an explanation of the parameters, refer to the project planning/PI-controller section) P250 PI controller Normal Inverted 1 -1 Actual value AI1 % 96 - P301/311 nmax P302/312 nmin nmax x nmin Speed setpoint (value) Correcting variable Setpoint % Control difference P251 P-gain P252 I-component System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Parameters Explanation of the parameters No. Name Description 250 FBG PI controller 0 / Off PI controller deactivated. 1 / Normal PI controller switched on normally. 2 / Inverted PI controller switched on inverted. 251 P-gain Setting range 0 ... 1 ... 64 252 I-component Setting range 0 ... 1 ... 2000 [s] 253 PI actual value mode (up to firmware .12) 1 / 10 V, reference maximum speed 5 / 0 ... 20 mA, reference maximum speed 6 / 4 ... 20 mA, reference maximum speed 7 / 0 ... 10 V, n-reference 8 / 0 ... 20 mA, n-reference 9 / 4 ... 20 mA, n-reference 254 PI actual value scaling (up to .12) 0.1 ... 1.0 ... 10.0 255 PI actual value offset (up to .12) 0.0 ... 100.0 [%] 3__ Motor parameters kVA i f n 5 P Hz Use this parameter group to adjust the inverter to the motor. 30_ / 31_ Limits 1 / 2 300 / 310 Start/stop speed 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 150 [rpm] If the setpoint speed is higher than the start/stop speed, the drive will be enabled with the start/stop speed. The transition to the setpoint speed is made using the active speed ramp. If the setpoint speed is lower than the start/stop speed, the setpoint will become active immediately. In the VFC & hoist operating mode, the drive is always enabled with the rated motor slip speed. During startup, the start/stop speed is set to half the rated slip speed of the connected motor. When a stop command is performed, this setting also defines the slowest speed at which the motor energization is switched off or at which post-magnetization takes effect and the brake is applied. Minimum speed 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 15 ... 5500 [rpm] Speed value, the lower limit of which must not be exceeded even when zero is selected as the setpoint. The minimum speed also applies when nmin < nstart/ stop has been set. Caution: • The slowest speed is 15 rpm when the hoist function is active, even if nmin has been set to a lower value. • To also enable the drive to move clear of the limit switches at low speeds, nmin is not active when drive has contacted the hardware limit switch. Maximum speed 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 1500 ... 5500 [rpm] No setpoint greater than the value set here can be selected. If you set nmin > nmax, then the value set in nmax applies to the minimum speed and the maximum speed. In the VFC and VFC + DC BRAKING operating mode, you may enter the following maximum speed values depending on the number of poles: • 2-pole: max. 5500 rpm • 4-pole: max. 4000 rpm • 6-pole: max. 2600 rpm • 8-pole: max. 2000 rpm 1 2 AUTO 301 / 311 1 2 AUTO 302 / 312 1 2 AUTO Fault 08 Speed monitoring may appear if you enter higher values. When you perform a startup, the unit automatically sets the maximum speed to the transition speed. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 97 5 kVA i f n Parameters Explanation of the parameters P Hz No. FBG 303 / 313 1 Name Description Current limit 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 150 [% IN] The internal current limitation refers to the apparent current, i.e. the output current of the inverter. The inverter automatically decreases the current limit internally in the field weakening range. In this way, the inverter implements a stall protection for the motor. A current limit lower than the rated motor current is ignored when the hoist function is activated. 2 AUTO 32_ / 33_ Motor adjustment 1 / 2 Use function P320 / P330 Automatic adjustment for single-motor operation only. You can use this function for all motors and control modes. The inverter measures the motor during premagnetization and sets the parameters P322 / P332 IxR adjustment and P321 / P 331 Boost. The inverter thereby determines a basic setting that is suitable for many applications. The values are saved in volatile memory. The motor is not calibrated if: • P320/P330 Automatic adjustment = OFF. • VFC & Flying start operating mode is active. • The set pre-magnetization time is more than 30 ms shorter than the pre-magnetization time calculated during startup. If you deactivate automatic adjustment, the values measured last will be not be saved in volatile memory. The factory setting of parameters 321 ... 324 / 331 ... 334 depends on the motor. 320 / 330 Automatic adjustment 1 / 2 off / OFF No automatic adjustment: The inverter does not calibrate the motor. on / ON Automatic adjustment: The inverter always measures the motor when changing to ENABLE operating mode. Boost 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 100 [%] The value is calibrated during startup. The value is 0 for VFC operating modes. Usually, this parameter does not have to be set manually. In exceptional cases, manual setting may be necessary to increase the breakaway torque. In this case, set the values to max. 30% or IxR. One third of IxR is set for V/f operating modes. In exceptional cases, manual setting may be necessary to increase the breakaway torque. In this case, set the values to max. 60 % or IxR. 322 / 332 IxR adjustment 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 100 [%] The inverter sets the value automatically when P320 / P330 Automatic adjustment = ON. Manual alterations to individual controller parameters are reserved for optimization by specialists. 323 / 333 Premagnetization time 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 2 [s] Premagnetization builds a magnetic field in the motor when you enable the inverter. Slip compensation 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 500 [rpm] Slip compensation increases the speed accuracy of the motor. Enter the rated slip of the connected motor as a manual entry. Do not enter a value more than 20 % different from the rated slip to compensate for fluctuations between various motors. The slip compensation is designed for a ratio smaller than 10 of load moment of inertia to motor moment of inertia. If the ratio is larger and the drive vibrates, then slip compensation must be reduced and even be set to 0 if necessary. 321 / 331 1 324 / 334 1 2 2 AUTO 34_ IN UL monitoring 345 / 346 IN UL monitoring 1 / 2 1 2 Setting range 0.1 ... 500 A The function cannot be deactivated. The factory setting depends on the rated power of the MOVITRAC® B and will be added to the rated current of the SEW motor with the same rating. At 150 % rated motor current, the inverter switches off after 5 minutes. At 500 % rated motor current, the inverter switches off after 20 seconds. AUTO 98 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Parameters Explanation of the parameters No. 4__ FBG Name kVA i n f 5 P Hz Description Reference signals The following reference values are used for recording and signaling certain operating states. All signals of parameter group 4__ can be output via binary outputs. The signals are valid if the inverter has signaled ready after switch-on and there is no fault. 40_ Speed reference signal The inverter issues the signal "1" at P403 if the speed is less than or greater than the set reference speed. Speed reference message 400 Speed reference value Setting range 0 ... 750 ... 5000 [rpm] 401 Hysteresis Setting range 0 ... 100 ... 500 [rpm] 402 Delay time Setting range 0 ... 1 ... 9 [s] 403 Signal = "1" when 0 / n < nref 1 / n > nref 43_ Current reference signal (in preparation) Signal if the output current is greater or less than the reference value. I [% IN] P431 Iref P430 t -Iref P432 1 P433: | I | > Iref 0 t 1 P433: | I | < Iref 0 t Current reference signal 430 Current reference value Setting range 0 ... 100 ... 150 % IN 431 Hysteresis Setting range 0 ... 5 ... 30 % IN 432 Delay time Setting range 0 ... 1 ... 9 s 433 Signal = "1" when 0 / I < Iref 1 / I > Iref System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 99 5 kVA i n f Parameters Explanation of the parameters P Hz No. FBG Name Description 44_ Imax signal (in preparation) 440 Hysteresis Setting range 0 ... 5 ... 50 % IN 441 Delay time Setting range 0 ... 1 ... 9 s 442 Signal = "1" when 0 / I < Imax 1 / I > Imax 45_ PI controller reference signal (see project planning/PI controller/reference signal) Signal if the inverter has reached the current limitation. These parameters determine whether and how the PI reference signal responds 450 PI actual value reference 0.0 ... 100.0 [%] 451 Signal = "1" when 0 / PI Actual value < PI Ref 1 / PI Actual value > PI Ref 5__ Monitoring functions 50_ Speed monitoring 1 / 2 The drive reaches the speed specified by the setpoint only with adequate torque. When the inverter reaches P303 Current limit it assumes that it does not reach the required speed. Speed monitoring responds when the inverter exceeds the current limit for longer than P501 delay time. 500 / 502 501 / 503 1 2 54_ Speed monitoring 1 / 2 off / OFF on / Motor / regenerative Function of speed monitoring in motor and regenerative operation of the motor Delay time 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 1 ... 10 [s] The set current limit can be reached briefly during acceleration, deceleration, or load peaks. You prevent the speed monitoring from responding too sensitively by setting the delay time. Monitoring responds when the current limit is reached for the duration of the delay time. Gear unit/motor monitoring (in preparation) These parameters are used to set the response to be triggered in the event of a motor or gear unit problem. The binary inputs have to be set accordingly for this purpose. Fault responses are triggered in the Controller inhibit or No enable inverter states. The binary input signals are filtered with a time constant of 10 s. This means the signal has to be present for at least 10 s. 100 Response Description No response Neither a fault is displayed nor a fault response occurs. The fault which is signaled is completely ignored. Display error The fault is displayed and the fault output is set (if programmed). The unit has no other fault responses. The fault can be reset. Immediate stop / fault The inverter performs an immediate switch-off and a fault is signaled. The output stage is inhibited and the brake is applied. The ready signal is revoked and the error output is set, if programmed. A restart is only possible after the fault has been reset during which the inverter is reinitialized. Rapid stop / fault The drive is braked with the set stop ramp t13/t23. Once the stop speed is reached, the output stage is inhibited and the brake is applied. The fault is signaled immediately. The ready signal is revoked and the error output is set, if programmed. A restart is only possible after the fault has been reset during which the inverter is reinitialized. Rapid stop / warning The drive is braked with the set stop ramp t13/t23. Once the stop speed is reached, the output stage is inhibited and the brake applied. The fault is signaled immediately. The fault is signaled via the terminal, if programmed. The ready signal is not revoked. The drive restarts without unit re-initialization if the error is rectified by an internal procedure or by an error reset. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Parameters Explanation of the parameters No. FBG kVA i f n P Hz Name Description 540 Response to drive vibration / warning Factory setting: Display error Once the drive vibration sensor signals a warning, the inverter will respond with the set response. 541 Response to drive vibration / fault Factory setting: Rapid stop / warning Once the drive vibration sensor signals a fault, the inverter will respond with the set response. 542 Response to oil aging / warning Factory setting: Display error Once the oil aging sensor signals a warning, the inverter will respond with the set response. 543 Response to oil aging / fault Factory setting: Display error Once the oil aging sensor signals a fault, the inverter will respond with the set response. 544 Oil aging / overtemperature Factory setting: Display error Once the oil aging sensor signals overtemperature, the inverter will respond with the set response. 545 Oil aging / ready signal Factory setting: Display error Once the oil aging sensor signals ready, the inverter will respond with the set response. 549 Response to brake wear Factory setting: Display error Once the brake wear sensor signals a fault, the inverter will respond with the set response. 6__ Terminal assignment 60_ Binary inputs (DI01 with fixed assignment to CW/STOP) Effect of 0: No function: 1: Enable / Stop: 2: CW / stop: 3: CCW / stop: 4: n11 / n21 5: n12 / n22 6: Fixed setpoint switchover: 7: Parameter set switchover: 8: Ramp switchover: 9: Motor potentiometer up: 10: Motor potentiometer down: 11: /External fault: 12: Fault reset: 19: Free-running slave: 20: Setpoint acceptance active: 26: TF signal (DI05 only): 27: Vibration / warning 28: Vibration / fault 29: Brake wear 30: /Controller inhibit: 33: Oil aging / warning 34: Oil aging / fault 35: Oil aging / overtemperature 36: Oil aging / ready Fixed setpoints n11/n21 = 0 and n12/n22 = 0: n11/n21 = 1 and n12/n22 = 0: n11/n21 = 0 and n12/n22 = 1: n11/n21 = 1 and n12/n22 = 1: 0 signal – Stop at P136 Stop ramp Stop at P131 Ramp down Stop at P131 Rampe down 5 1 signal – Enable Enable CW Enable CCW Takes effect when: No enable – no no no no no Fixed setpoints n11/n12/n13 Fixed setpoints n21/n22/n23 yes Parameter set 1 Parameter set 2 yes t11/t21 active t12/t22 active yes – Increase setpoint no – Decrease setpoint no External fault – no Reset on positive edge 0 to 1 yes Master-slave mode Free-running slave yes Do not accept Accept setpoint no Motor overtemperature No signal no Sensor signals warning Sensor does not signal warning yes Sensor signals fault Sensor does not signal fault yes Brake is worn Brake OK yes Inhibited Enable yes Sensor signals warning Sensor does not signal warning yes Sensor signals fault Sensor does not signal fault yes Sensor signals overtemperatureSensor does not signal overtemperatureyes Sensor not ready Sensor ready yes External setpoints only n11/n21 n12/n22 n13/n23 601 Binary input DI02 Factory setting: CCW/stop 602 Binary input DI03 Factory setting: Enable 603 Binary input DI04 Factory setting: n11/n21 604 Binary input DI05 Factory setting: n12/n22 608 Binary input DI00 Factory setting: Fault reset System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 101 5 kVA i No. 62_ f n Parameters Explanation of the parameters P Hz FBG Name Description Binary outputs (for controlling the brake rectifier use only binary output DO02) Effect of 0 signal 1 signal 0: No function: – – 1: /Fault: Collective fault signal – 2: Ready: Not ready ready 3: Output stage on: Unit inhibited Unit enabled and motor is energized 4: Rotating field on: No rotating field Rotating field 5: Brake released: Brake applied Brake released (not with DO03) 8: Parameter set: 1 active 2 active n < nref / n > nref (P403) 9: Speed reference signal: n > nref / n < nref (P403) n = nsetp 11: Set/actual value comparison signal: n ≠ nsetp 12: Current reference signal: I > Iref / I < Iref (P433) I < Iref / I > Iref (P433) I = Imax / I < Imax (P442) 13: Imax signal: I < Imax / I = Imax (P442) 21: IPOS output: – Depends on IPOS program 22: /IPOS fault: IPOS fault signal – 23: PI ACTUAL VALUE REF.: – PI controller actual value has exceeded the set threshold 24: Ex-e current limit active (in preparation) 27: Safe stop: The display "Safe stop" is not safety-related and must not be used as a safety function. 30: /Ixt warning (in preparation) Normal operation Ixt > 115 % 31: /Ixt fault (in preparation) Normal operation Ixt > 125 % 620 Binary output DO01 Factory setting: /FAULT 621 Binary output DO02 Factory setting: BRAKE RELEASED 622 Binary output DO03 Factory setting: READY (selection 5 (BRAKE RELEASED) not possible) 64_ Analog outputs AO1 (optional) Analog output AO1 is only available with the optional analog module FIO11B Output value 100 % = –3000 ... 0 ... 3000 rpm –100 ... 0 ... 100 Hz 0 ... 100 % = 0 ... 150 % IN = 0 ... 150 % unit utilization 102 obtained output value Normalization –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % AO1 characteristic curve Output 0 ... 10 V 0 / 4 ... 20 mA System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Parameters Explanation of the parameters No. FBG kVA i f n P Hz Name Description 640 Analog output AO1 0 / No function The value 0 % evaluated by the characteristic curve is displayed. 1 / Ramp generator input (amount) / 100 % corresponds to 3000 rpm Setpoint speed at the input of the internal ramp generator 2 / Setpoint speed (amount) / 100 % corresponds to 3000 rpm Valid setpoint speed (output ramp generator or correcting variable of the higher-level controller) 3 / Actual speed (amount) / 100 % corresponds to 3000 rpm 4 / Actual frequency (amount) / 100 % corresponds to 100 Hz Rotating field frequency 5 / Output current (amount) / 100 % corresponds to 150 % Irated Apparent current 6 / Apparent current (amount) / 100 % corresponds to 150 % Irated 7 / Unit utilization / 100 % corresponds to 150 % unit utilization Current unit utilization 11 / Actual speed (signed) / ±100 % corresponds to ±3000 rpm 12 / Actual frequency (signed) / ±100 % corresponds to ±100 Hz Rotating field frequency 641 AO1 reference (as of firmware .13) 0 / 3000 rpm , 100 Hz, 150 % 1 / nmax 2 / nset reference 642 AO1 Operating mode 0 / No function Output: Always 0 V or 0 mA 2 / 0 ... 20 mA/100 % corresponds to 20 mA 3 / 4 ... 20 mA/100 % corresponds to 20 mA 4 / 0 ... 10 V/100 % corresponds to 10 V 646 AO1 Characteristic curve x1 –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % –3000 rpm ... 0 ... +3000 rpm –100 Hz ... 0 ... 100 Hz 0 ... 100 % IN 0 ... 100 % = 0 ... 150 % unit utilization 647 AO1 Characteristic curve y1 0 ... 100 % 648 AO1 Characteristic curve x2 –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % –3000 rpm ... 0 ... +3000 rpm –100 Hz ... 0 ... 100 Hz 0 ... 100 % IN 0 ... 100 % = 0 ... 150 % unit utilization 649 AO1 Characteristic curve y2 0 ... 100 % 5 The characteristic curve is described by the coordinates x1/y1 and x2/y2, with which the analog output is evaluated. Output +100 % +10 V +20 mA –100 % –3000 rpm –100 Hz –150 % IN –nmax –nSetpt ref. Example System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B factory setting (x1/y1) 0% 0V 0/4 mA 0% 0 rpm 0 Hz 0% (x2/y2) Output value +100 % +3000 rpm +100 Hz +150 % IN +nmax +nSetpt ref. 103 5 kVA i f n Parameters Explanation of the parameters P Hz No. FBG 7__ Name Description Control functions All settings with regard to the fundamental control properties of the inverter are defined within parameter group 7__. This parameter group comprises functions which the inverter automatically executes when they are activated. 70_ Operating mode 1 / 2 This parameter is used to set the basic operating mode of the inverter. Setting on the keypad. VFC / V/f characteristic curve: Default setting for asynchronous motors. Suitable for general applications, such as conveyor belts, trolleys, and hoists with counterweight. VFC & hoist: The hoist function automatically provides all functions necessary for operating an unbalanced hoist. For safety reasons, make sure to activate monitoring functions that prevent the drive from starting. Monitoring functions: • Monitoring the output current during the premagnetization phase • Avoiding sag when the brake is released The unit detects the following incorrect configurations and displays them with the following faults: • 2 or 3-phase motor phase interruption: F82 = Output open • Premagnetization time too short or incorrect motor/inverter combination: F81 = Error start condition • Motor phase failure due to active speed monitoring P500/501: F08 = Fault n-monitoring Caution! • The control must be designed in such a way that the direction of rotation of the drive can only be changed when it is at a standstill. • A single-phase motor phase failure cannot always be detected reliably. • SEW-EURODRIVE strongly recommends activating speed monitoring. • Prerequisite for correct performance of the hoist function: Motor brake controlled by the inverter. • Speed monitoring is set by changing parameters 500 / 502 and 501 / 503. The sagging of hoists cannot be avoided safely when monitoring is deactivated or the delay time is set too long. VFC & DC braking / V/f characteristic curve & DC braking: DC braking means the asynchronous motor brakes by using current injection. The motor brakes without braking resistor on the inverter. The following figure shows the braking torque profile when the braking current is the same as the rated motor current. M/M N 1 0 0 5 Hz fN During braking, the inverter injects a constant current with a rotatingfield frequency of 5 Hz. The braking torque = 0 at standstill. A greater braking torque acts at a slower speed; the braking torque drops as the speed increases. The braking time and consequently the duration of the braking current depends on the load connected to the motor. DC braking stops at a rotating-field frequency of the motor of 5 Hz. The motor stops along the stop ramp. Rated motor current is used for the current injection. In all cases, the inverter limits the current to max. 125 %IN. See "Brake function" for information about the brake f control system. Caution! It is not possible to enable a directed stop or to observe a certain ramp using DC braking. The main purpose of DC braking is to drastically reduce the time the motors need for coasting to a halt. The following graphic shows the braking profile. n1 = Setpoint speed [1] = Enable t13 = Stop ramp tB = Braking phase 104 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Parameters Explanation of the parameters No. FBG Name kVA i f n 5 P Hz Description VFC & flying start function: The flying start function lets you synchronize the inverter to an already running motor. This is used in particular with drives that are not braked actively, run on for a long time or are turned by a flowing medium, e.g. pumps and fans. The maximum flying start time is approx. 200 ms. P320 Automatic adjustment is deactivated in the FLYING START operating mode. It is important that the IxR value P322 stator resistance is set correctly to ensure that the flying start function is performed properly. Startup of an SEW motor: The IxR value is set for an SEW motor at operating temperature. This value has to be reduced if flying start takes place with a cold motor. The IxR value is measured at startup when a non-SEW motor is started up with MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio. n1 = Setpoint speed nM = Motor speed [1] = Enable The flying start function does not function if an output filter is connected to the inverter. Caution! Do not use the flying start function in hoist applications. 700 / 701 Operating mode 1 / 2 1 2 0 / VFC (field-oriented voltage flux control mode) 2 / VFC & hoist (field-oriented control mode for hoist applications, can only be set in MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio) 3 / VFC & DC braking (field-oriented controlled mode with DC braking) 4 / VFC & flying start function (field-oriented control mode with flying start function) 21 / V/f characteristic curve (voltage/frequency controlled mode) 22 / V/f & DC braking (voltage/frequency controlled mode with DC braking) AUTO 71_ Standstill current 1 / 2 With activated standstill current function, the inverter injects a current in the motor at standstill. This allows the inverter to fulfill the following functions: • When the ambient temperature of the motor is low, the standstill current prevents the risk of condensation and freezing (in particular of the disc brake). Set the amount of current in such a way that the motor does not overheat. Recommendation: Motor housing should be hand hot. • With activated standstill current, you can start the motor without premagnetization. Recommendation: For hoists, set to 45 ... 50 %. You can activate the standstill current function by setting P710 = 0. Set the standstill current in % of the rated motor current. The standstill current cannot exceed the current limit (P303). You can switch off the standstill current by setting /CONTROLLER INHIBIT to 0. When the standstill current function is activated, the output stage remains enabled even in the "No enable" status to inject the motor standstill current. The standstill current is not switched off by pressing the stop/reset key. You have to set the function of an input terminal to controller inhibit to activate the standstill current function. Else the output stage will be energized directly. 710 / 711 Standstill current 1 / 2 1 72_ 0 ... 50 % IMot 2 Setpoint stop function 1 / 2 Use the P720 / P723 Setpoint stop function to enable the inverter automatically depending on the main setpoint. The inverter is enabled with all the necessary functions, such as premagnetization and brake control. It is important that you also enable the drive via terminals. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 105 5 kVA i f n Parameters Explanation of the parameters P Hz No. FBG 720 / 723 721 / 724 722 / 725 1 2 73_ Name Description Setpoint stop function 1 / 2 off / OFF on / ON Stop setpoint 1 / 2 0 ... 30 ... 500 [rpm] Start offset 1 / 2 0 ... 30 ... 500 [rpm] Brake function 1 / 2 MOVITRAC® B inverters are capable of controlling a brake installed on the motor. The brake function acts on the binary output which has the assignment of the "/BRAKE" function (24 V = brake released). Use DO02 for the brake control system. The brake is always applied when /CONTROLLER INHIBIT = 0. "1" "0" Enable t Pre-magnetization time Brake release time Post-magnetization time Brake application time n n setpt t n start-stop 0 /BRAKE t "1" "0" t Output stage ON "1" "0" t Rotating field ON "1" "0" 731 / 734 732 / 735 1 2 74_ t t Brake release time 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 2 [s] This parameter determines how long the motor will remain at a standstill after expiration of the premagnetization time and how much time the brake has to release. Brake application time 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 2 [s] You can use this parameter to set the time required for the mechanical brake to apply. This parameter prevents a sagging of the drive especially in hoists. Speed skip function The skip window center and skip width are values and automatically have an effect on positive and negative setpoints when activated. The function is deactivated by setting the skip width to 0. Output speed P740/P742 P741/P743 n-setpoint n-setpoint positive and negative Ramps t11/t12 n-setpoint (integrator input) setpoint (integrator output) The "Speed skip" function makes it possible to prevent the motor speed from remaining within a certain speed window. This suppresses vibration and noise, in particular in machines with pronounced mechanical resonance. 740 / 742 Skip window center 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 1500 ... 5000 rpm 741 / 743 Skip width 1 / 2 Setting range 0 ... 300 rpm 1 106 2 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Parameters Explanation of the parameters No. 75_ FBG Name kVA i f n 5 P Hz Description Master/slave function (in preparation) The master-slave function allows for implementing automatical functions such as speed synchronization, shared load and torque control (slave). The RS-485 interface or the system bus interface can be used as the communication link. P100 "Setpoint source" must then be set to master SBus or master RS485. The process output data PO1 ... PO3 (P870, P871, P872) are automatically set by the firmware. A programmable terminal function, "Slave free runn." (P60_/P61_) makes it possible to separate the slave from the master setpoint of the master and switch it to a local control mode (like control source bipolar/fixed setpoint). For the slave, the process data P87x are automatically assigned as follows: – PO1 = Control word 1 – PO2 = Speed or current in M-control – PO3 = IPOS PO data – PI1 = Status word 1 – PI2 = Speed – PI3: IPOS PI data Slave Master RS-485 / SBus P750 Slave setpoint P751 0 = Master SBus = Master RS-485 1 = Bipolar fixed setpoint / fixed setpoint 0 If P100 = Master , Enable via master * ) 1 = Input terminals P100 setpoint source Scaling slave setpoint P101 control source Slave free-running P811 RS-485 Group address or P882 SBus Group address must be set to the same value in master and slave. For master/slave operation via RS-485 interface, set P811 RS-485 Group address to a value greater than 100. For operation via system bus (e.g. master/slave operation), the bus terminating resistors at the start and end of the system bus must be activated. Connection check • System bus (SBus): P883 SBus timeout interval is in effect when there is a communication link via the SBus. If P883 SBus timeout interval = 0, there is no monitoring of data transmission via the SBus. • RS-485 interface: A connection check is always in effect if the communication link takes place via the RS-485 interface; P812 RS-485 timeout interval does not have any function. The slave inverter must receive a valid RS-485 telegram within the fixed time interval of t = 500 ms. If the time is exceeded, the slave drives are stopped at the emergency stop ramp and fault signal F43 "RS485 timeout" is issued. Overview of functions of master/slave operation Speed synchronization: Master Master controlled P750 Slave setpoint: Slave controlled SPEED (485+SBus) P700 Operating mode 1: VFC VFC & hoist V/f characteristic curve V/f & DC braking Slave P100 Setpoint source: MASTER SBus MASTER RS485: P700 Operating mode 1: VFC VFC & hoist V/f characteristic V/f & DC braking 750 Slave setpoint The setpoint to be transferred to the master is set on the master. The "MASTER-SLAVE OFF" setting must be retained on the slave. • MASTER-SLAVE OFF • SPEED (RS485) • SPEED (SBus1) 751 Scaling slave setpoint Setting range: –10 ... 0 ... 1 ... 10 The setpoint sent from the master is multiplied by this factor which is set in the slave. 76_ Manual operation 760 Locking RUN/STOP keys (see Startup / External setpoint selection) 77_ Energy-saving function System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B off / OFF (RUN/STOP keys are activated and can be used for starting and stopping the motor) on / ON (RUN/STOP keys are locked and therefore do not function) 107 5 kVA i No. 770 f n Parameters Explanation of the parameters P Hz FBG Name Description Energy-saving function off / OFF on / ON 8__ Unit functions 80_ Setup 800 Short menu (FBG11B only) long short Use P800 to switch from the factory set short menu to the detailed parameter menu. 801 Language DBG60B Language selection only for DBG60B keypad. You can use P802 to reset the factory settings stored in the EPROM for almost all parameters. You can also reset the unit to its initial delivery condition. Selecting DELIVERY STATE also resets the parameters listed above. Statistics data have to be reset separately with P804 Reset statistics data. Setting the parameter to YES will restore the factory settings. SEt appears on the display while the factory settings are being restored. The previous operating status of the inverter appears on the display after the factory settings have been restored. P802 automatically reverts to NO. Activating the factory setting causes almost all parameter values to be overwritten. Save the set values using MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio before you restore the factory settings. Once the factory setting function has been used, you must adapt the parameter values and terminal assignments in accordance with the requirements. 802 Factory setting No (do not restore factory setting) Hrs / standard (restore factory setting) All / delivery status (for starting up IEC motors) NEMA / delivery status (for starting up NEMA motors) By setting P803 Parameter lock = ON, you can prevent any change to the parameters. An exception are P841 Manual reset and P803 itself. The parameter lock makes sense after optimizing the settings of the MOVITRAC® B. To enable changes to parameters again, set P803 Parameter lock = OFF. The parameter lock also affects parameter changes via the RS-485 and SBus interfaces. 803 Parameter lock off / OFF (you can change all parameters) on / ON (You can change P803 and P840 only) P804 Reset statistic data lets you reset the statistical data stored in the EEPROM (fault memory). These data are not affected when restoring the factory settings. The parameter automatically reverts to NO after the reset. 804 108 Reset statistical data No action (no reset is performed) Fault memory (the content of the fault memory is reset) 805 Rated mains voltage Setting range 50 ... 500 V 806 Copy DBG → MOVITRAC® B Yes / No The parameter data in the DBG60B are transferred to MOVITRAC® B. 807 Copy MOVITRAC® B → DBG Yes / No The parameter data in MOVITRAC® B are transferred to DBG60B. 808 24 V output voltage Off On 809 IPOS enable This parameter lets you activate the integrated positioning and sequence control System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Parameters Explanation of the parameters No. FBG Name kVA i f n 5 P Hz Description 81_ Serial communication. 810 RS-485 address Setting range 0 ... 99 P810 sets the address of the MOVITRAC® B for communication via the serial interface. MOVITRAC® B units are always set to the address 0 on delivery. To avoid problems during data exchange in serial communication with several inverters, SEW-EURODRIVE recommends that you do not use address 0. 811 RS-485 group address Setting range 100 ... 199 812 RS-485 timeout interval Setting range 0 ... 650 [s] 82_ Brake operation 1 / 2 P820/P821 lets you switch 4-quadrant operation on and off. 4-quadrant operation is possible if you connect a braking resistor to MOVITRAC® B. P820/P821 must be set to OFF if there is no braking resistor connected to MOVITRAC® B, which means regenerative operation is not possible. In this operating mode, the MOVITRAC® B unit attempts to extend the deceleration ramp. As a result, the generated power is not too great and the DC link voltage remains below the switch-off threshold. If the regenerative power becomes too great despite the extended deceleration ramps, then MOVITRAC® B may switch off with the F07 DC link overvoltage fault. In this case you have to extend the deceleration ramps manually (P131). Therefore, do not set unreasonably short deceleration ramps! The unit responds with fault F34 Ramp/timeout if the ramp is set too short and the ramp which can actually be achieved is significantly longer than the set value. 820 / 821 4-quadrant operation 1 / 2 1 83_ off / OFF on / ON 2 Fault responses The fault EXT. FAULT triggers ENABLED in inverter status only. P830 programs the fault response that is triggered by input terminal programmed to /EXT. FAULT. 830 Response terminal "external fault" 833 Response to RS-485 timeout 836 Response to SBus timeout 84_ Reset behavior 840 Manual reset Parameter P840 corresponds to the STOP/RESET key. 2 / Immediate stop/fault The inverter performs an emergency stop with an error message. The inverter inhibits the output stage and the brake is applied. The inverter revokes the ready signal and sets the programmed fault output. A restart is only possible after a fault reset has been performed during which the inverter is reinitialized. 4 / Rapid stop / fault (factory setting for P830) The inverter brakes the drive at the specified stop ramp (P136/P146). The inverter brakes with DC braking in 2-quadrant operation. Once the stop speed is reached, the inverter inhibits the output stage and the brake is applied. The fault is signaled immediately. The inverter revokes the ready signal and sets the programmed fault output. A restart is only possible after a fault reset has been performed during which the inverter is reinitialized. 7 / Rapid stop / warning (factory setting for 833 / 836) The fault response corresponds to STOP/FAULT, except the inverter does not revoke the ready signal and the fault output is set. Yes MOVITRAC® B resets the present fault. P840 automatically reverts to NO after the reset. The motor immediately restarts to the specified setpoint if all required signals are present after the reset has been performed. Activating the manual reset does not have any effect if there is no fault present. No No reset. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 109 5 kVA i n f Parameters Explanation of the parameters P Hz No. FBG 85_ Name Description Scaling actual speed value Scaling actual speed value defines a user-specific display parameter P001 User display. For example, the user display is to be shown in 1/s. Such a setting requires a scaling factor of 1/60. This means the numerator scaling factor has to be set to 1 and the denominator scaling factor to 60. The user-defined unit 1/s is entered in P852. P850 1 = P851 60 Actual speed value (1500 rpm ) 001 USER 25 [1/s ] P852 Scaling actual speed value (example) 850 Scaling factor numerator Setting range 1 ... 65535 851 Scaling factor denominator Setting range 1 ... 65535 852 User travel unit Factory setting: rpm Up to a maximum of eight ASCII characters; is displayed in P001 User display. 853 Scaled speed FBG 0 / Speed 1 / Scaled speed 86_ Modulation 1 / 2 P860/P861 lets you set the nominal cycle frequency at the inverter output. If P862/P863 is set to OFF, the cycle frequency may vary automatically depending on the unit utilization. 860 / 861 862 / 863 87_ 1 2 PWM frequency 1 / 2 4 kHz 8 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz PWM fix 1 / 2 on / ON (no automatic change of the cycle frequency by the inverter) off / OFF (autonomous change of the switching frequency by the inverter depending on the utilization) Process data parameter setting (for more information, refer to the MOVITRAC® B Communication manual) Mit P870 ... P872 lets you define the content of process output data words PO1 ... PO3. This definition is necessary so MOVITRAC® B can allocate the appropriate setpoints. The following process output assignments are available: 0 / No function: The content of the process output data word is ignored. 1 / Setpoint speed: Speed setpoint entry in rpm. 5 / Max. speed: Maximum speed (P302). 8 / Ramp: Ramp time for setpoint selection (P130 / P131). 9 / Control word 1: Control signals for start/stop, etc. 10 / Control word 2: Control signals for start/stop, etc. 11 / Setpoint speed [%]: Selection of a speed setpoint in % of P302. 12 / IPOS PO data Specification of a 16-bit coded value for IPOSplus® 13 / PI controller setpoint [%]: PI controller setpoint 110 870 Setpoint description PO1 Factory setting: Control word 1 871 Setpoint description PO2 Factory setting: Speed 872 Setpoint description PO3 Factory setting: No function System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Parameters Explanation of the parameters No. FBG Name kVA i f n 5 P Hz Description P873 ... P875 can be used to determine the content of the process input data words PI1 ... PI3. This definition is necessary so MOVITRAC® B can allocate the appropriate actual values. The following PI assignments are available: 0 / No function: The content of the process input data word is 0000hex. 1 / Actual speed: Momentary actual speed value in rpm. 2 / Output current: Momentary active current of the inverter in % of IN. 3 / Active current: Momentary output current of the inverter in % of IN. 6 / Status word 1: Status information of the inverter. 8 / Actual speed [%]: Momentary actual speed value in % of P302. 9 / IPOS PI data: IPOS Process input data. 10 / PI controller actual value [%]: Actual value of the PI controller. 873 Actual value description PI1 Factory setting: STATUS WORD 1 874 Actual value description PI2 Factory setting: SPEED 875 Actual value description PI3 Factory setting: OUTP.CURRENT 876 PO data enable no / NO The last valid process output data remain in effect. yes / YES The process output data that was last sent from the fieldbus control become effective. 88_ Serial communication SBus 880 SBus protocol Setting range SBus 0 / MoviLink 1 / CANopen 881 SBus address Setting range 0 ... 63 P881 lets you set the system address of the MOVITRAC® B unit. This address enables the MOVITRAC® B to communicate, for example, with PC, PLC or MOVIDRIVE® via the system bus. MOVITRAC® B units are always set to the address 0 on delivery. To avoid problems during data exchange in serial communication with several inverters, SEW-EURODRIVE recommends that you do not use address 0. 882 SBus group address Setting range 0 ... 63 P882 lets you group several MOVITRAC® B units for communication via the SBus interface. All MOVITRAC® B units with the same SBus group address can be addressed using a multicast telegram via this address. MOVITRAC® B does not acknowledge data received via group address. For example, the SBus group address makes it possible to send setpoint selections to a group of MOVITRAC® B inverters at the same time. An inverter with group address 0 is not assigned to a group. 883 SBus timeout interval Setting range 0 ... 650 [s] Use P883 to set the monitoring time for data transmission via the system bus. MOVITRAC® B performs the fault response Stop/fault if there is no data traffic via the system bus for the period set in P815. Data transmission via the system bus is not monitored when P883 is set to 0. 884 SBus baud rate Use P816 to set the transmission speed of the system bus. 125 / 125 kBaud 250 / 250 kBaud 500 / 500 kBaud 1000 / 1000 kBaud 886 CANopen address Setting range 1 ... 2 ... 127 P886 is used to set the address for serial communication with the SBus. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 111 Project Planning Schematic procedure 6 6 Project Planning 6.1 Schematic procedure Clarification of Technical data and requirements • Basic conditions • System interfacing → • ↓ Calculating the relevant application data • Stationary, dynamic, regenerative power • Speed ↓ Gear unit selection Determine • gear unit version, gear unit size, gear unit reduction ratio Check the gear unit utilization (Mamax ≥ Ma(t)) ↓ → Motor selection • Convert torque and speed for the motor shaft • Define the motor ↓ Check Maximum occurring torque Mmax < 1.5 x MN • Required motor speed < nN • Thermal load by taking into account setting range and cyclic duration factor ← • ↓ Selecting the MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter • Motor/inverter assignment • Continuous power, peak power • Installation conditions • FBG11B keypad option • DBG60B plain text keypad option • FSC11B communication option • FIO11B analog module option • UWS11A / UWS21B / USB11A interface adapter option ↓ Selecting the braking resistor • based on the calculated regenerative power and the cyclic duration factor cdf ↓ Grouping components • Line choke, output choke, touch guard ↓ ← Check whether all requirements are met. 112 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Project Planning Options for standard applications 6.2 6 Options for standard applications Refer to the following table for available options for simple applications. Conditions for simple applications: • Vertical movement: Braking time is less than 25 % of cyclic duration factor CDF and no longer than 30 s. • Horizontal movement: Braking time is less than 12 % of cyclic duration factor CDF and no longer than 15 s. Braking resistor Type MC07B 230 V 1phase 230 V 3phase 400 V 3phase Horizontal movement Vertical movement Output choke Line filter 0003 BW027-003 BW027-003 HD012 0004 BW027-003 BW027-003 HD012 0005 BW027-003 BW027-003 HD012 0008 BW027-003 BW027-005 HD012 0011 BW027-003 BW027-005 HD012 0015 BW027-003 BW027-006 HD012 0022 BW027-005 BW027-012 HD012 0003 BW027-003 BW027-003 HD012 0004 BW027-003 BW027-003 HD012 0005 BW027-003 BW027-003 HD012 0008 BW027-003 BW027-006 HD012 0011 BW027-003 BW027-006 HD012 0015 BW027-003 BW027-006 HD012 0022 BW027-006 BW027-012 HD012 0037 BW027-006 BW027-012 HD012 0055 BW012-025 BW012-025 HD001 0075 BW012-015 BW012-025 HD001 0110 BW012-025 BW012-050 HD003 0150 2 × BW012-025 2 × BW012-050 HD003 NF063-503 0220 2 × BW106 2 × BW106 HD003 NF085-503 NF115-503 Integrated1) Integrated1) NF048-503 0300 2 × BW106 2 × BW106 HD003 0003 BW072-003 BW072-003 HD012 0004 BW072-003 BW072-003 HD012 0005 BW072-003 BW072-003 HD012 0008 BW072-003 BW072-005 HD012 0011 BW072-003 BW072-005 HD012 0015 BW072-003 BW168 HD012 0022 BW072-005 BW168 HD012 0030 BW072-005 BW268 HD012 0040 BW168 BW268 HD012 0055 BW147 BW247 HD001 0075 BW147 BW347 HD001 0110 BW039-026 BW039-050 HD001 0150 BW018-035 BW018-075 HD003 0220 BW018-035 BW018-075 HD003 NF048-503 0300 BW018-075 BW915 HD003 NF063-503 Integrated1) NF035-503 0370 2 × BW012-025 BW106 HD003 NF085-503 0450 BW106 BW206 HD003 NF085-503 0550 BW106 BW206 HD003 NF115-503 0750 BW106 3 × BW012-100 HD003 NF150-503 1) Additional components are required to reach limit value class C1. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 113 Project Planning Description of applications 6 6.3 Description of applications 6.3.1 Project planning for trolleys The motor load in the dynamic sections determines the peak motor power to be dimensioned. The thermal load determines the required continuous motor power. Refer to the travel cycle for determining the thermal load. The speed profile is the significant factor in determining the self-cooling of the motor. 6.3.2 Project planning for hoists In practice, you must take particular account of thermal and safety-relevant criteria when sizing hoists. The control must be designed so that the direction of rotation of the drive can only be changed when it is at a standstill. Caution! Speed monitoring is set by changing parameters 500 / 502 and 501 / 503. The sagging of hoists cannot be avoided safely when monitoring is deactivated or the delay time is set too long. Thermal considerations In contrast to trolleys, hoists require approx. 70 ... 90 % of the rated motor torque 90 % of rated torque of the motor. Starting torque The highest operating torque is required for acceleration with maximum load in the upwards hoisting direction. As a rule, design the 4-pole gearmotor for a maximum speed of • 2100 rpm (70 Hz) at a transition speed of 1500 rpm (50 Hz) • 2500 rpm (83 Hz) at a transition speed of 1800 rpm (60 Hz) This means the gear unit input speed is increased by a factor of 1.4. This is why you have to select a 1.4 times higher gear unit reduction ratio. The motor will not lose any torque on the input shaft in the field weakening range (50 ... 70 Hz or 60 ... 83 Hz). The higher gear unit ratio compensates for the inversely proportionate decrease in torque in relation to speed. Furthermore, the startup torque is 1.4 times greater. Further advantages are that the speed range is greater and the self-cooling of the motor more powerful. Hoist voltage/speed characteristic curve a = Recommended voltage/speed characteristic curve and resultant torque profile B = Torque reserve range Select the motor power for hoists according to the load type: 114 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Project Planning Speed-torque characteristic curve 6 • S1 (100 % cdf): Select the motor power of the next higher motor type than the selected inverter power, e.g. for lengthy upwards travel or continuous elevators. • S3 (40 % cdf): Select the motor power according to the selected inverter power. Activate the hoisting function by selecting operating mode P700 = VFC & hoist regardless of the above guidelines. 6.4 Speed-torque characteristic curve The speed-torque characteristic curve looks as follows: M P MN PN 1.6 Mmax 1.4 1.2 1.0 1 0.8 0.6 2 0.4 0.2 0 0 25 % 50 % 75 % 100 % 125 % 150 % 175 % 200 % n nN [1] M in S1 100 % cdf [2] P in S1 100 % cdf To characteristic curve 1: Below 20 Hz, the drive cannot be loaded with the rated mtoor torque. The reduced speed decreases the self-cooling of the motor. As a result, the motor would heat up excessively. This limit is not caused by the inverter. Motors with sufficient forced cooling can even be loaded with a rated torque below 20 Hz. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 115 Project Planning Motor selection 6 6.5 Motor selection 6.5.1 Basic recommendations 6.5.2 • Only use motors with at least Thermal class F. • Use the TF thermistor or TH bimetallic switch. • Preferably use 4-pole motors. This applies particularly if you are operating gearmotors with a high oil filling level because of their vertical mounting position. The churning losses are very great with 2-pole motors. Voltage-frequency characteristic curve The asynchronous motor follows a load-dependent voltage/frequency characteristic in V/f operating modes. The motor model is continuously calculated in the VFC operating mode. At startup, set the characteristic curve with rated motor voltage and rated motor frequency. The setting determines the speed-dependent torque and power characteristics of the asynchronous motor. The following figure shows an example of the voltage/frequency characteristic curves of an asynchronous AC motor 230 / 400 V, 50 Hz. UA [V] 1 400 2 230 0 3 0 50 87 f [Hz] 1 Star connection; 400 V, 50 Hz 2 Delta connection 230 V / 50 Hz 3 Delta connection 400 V / 87 Hz The MOVITRAC® B output voltage is limited by the provided supply voltage. 6.5.3 Dynamic applications For dynamic applications, you must have a drive with a rated inverter current greater than the rated motor current. Set the following parameters so the motor can generate at most 150 % of the rated motor torque: • Current limit P303 • Slip compensation P324 Increase these parameters manually by a factor of approx. 1.4 for dynamic applications. 116 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Project Planning Motor selection 6.5.4 6 Inverter/motor combinations The following table shows possible inverter/motor combinations. You can also assign the next higher motor size to the inverters. The 4-pole motors (1500 rpm) are included in the factory settings of MOVITRAC® B. Smaller motors can deteriorate the control behavior. MOVITRAC® B Rated power PN SEW motor Speed [rpm] at 50 Hz 3000 1500 Speed [rpm] at 60 Hz 3600 1800 MC07B0003-...-4-00 0.25 kW (0.34 HP) DFR63M2 DFR63L4 MC07B0004-...-4-00 0.37 kW (0.50 HP) DFR63L2 DT71D4 MC07B0005-...-4-00 0.55 kW (0.74 HP) DT71D2 DT80K4 MC07B0008-...-4-00 0.75 kW (1.0 HP) DT80K2 DT80N4 MC07B0011-...-4-00 1.1 kW (1.5 HP) DT80N2 DT90S4 MC07B0015-...-4-00 1.5 kW (2.0 HP) DT90S2 DT90L4 MC07B0022-...-4-00 2.2 kW (3.0 HP) DT90L2 DV100M4 MC07B0030-...-4-00 3.0 kW (4.0 HP) DV100M2 DV100L4 MC07B0040-...-4-00 4.0 kW (5.4 HP) DV112M2 DV112M4 MC07B0055-...-4-00 5.5 kW (7.4 HP) DV132S2 DV132S4 MC07B0075-...-4-00 7.5 kW (10 HP) DV132M2 DV132M4 MC07B0110-...-4-00 11 kW (15 HP) DV160M2 DV160M4 MC07B0150-...-4-00 15 kW (20 HP) DV160L2 DV160L4 MC07B0220-...-4-00 22 kW (30 HP) DV180L2 DV180L4 MC07B0300-...-4-00 30 kW (40 HP) – DV200L4 MC07B0370-...-4-00 37 kW (50 HP) – DV225S4 MC07B0450-...-4-00 45 kW (60 HP) – DV225M4 MC07B0550-...-4-00 55 kW (74 HP) – DV250M4 MC07B0750-...-4-00 75 kW (100 HP) – DV280S4 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 117 Project Planning Overload capacity 6 6.6 Overload capacity MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters permanently calculate the load on the inverter output stage (unit utilization). They can output the maximum possible power in every operating status. The permitted continuous output current depends on: • Ambient temperature • Heat sink temperature • Mains voltage • PWM frequency If a PWM frequency > 4 kHz is set and "P862/P863 PWM fix 1/2" is set to off, the inverter automatically reduces the PWM frequency in the event of a unit overload. The inverter responds to a higher than permitted load by issuing the "F44 Unit utilization" error message and an immediate switch-off. Overload capacity at 40 °C (104 °F) Overload capacity at 25 °C (77 °F) Size T (min) 118 0XS 0S < 1.5 kW 0S 1.5 kW 0L 1 2S 2 3 4 20 20 8 8 3.5 4 5 4 9 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Project Planning Load capacity of the units at low output frequencies 6.7 6 Load capacity of the units at low output frequencies The thermal model in MOVITRAC® B implements dynamic limiting of the maximum output current. Consequently, the thermal model only permits less than 100 % output current at output frequencies less than 2 Hz if the capacity utilization is high. In such operating states, configure the average output current of the inverter to max. 70 % of the rated inverter current. NOTE The output frequency of the inverter is comprised of the rotational frequency (speed) and the slip frequency. Guaranteed continuous currents depending on the output frequency: System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 119 Project Planning Selecting the braking resistor 6 6.8 Selecting the braking resistor HAZARD! The supply cables to the braking resistor carry a high DC voltage (ca. DC 900 V). Severe or fatal injuries from electric shock. • • The braking resistor cables must be suitable for this high DC voltage. Install the braking resistor cables according to the regulations. WARNING! The surfaces of the braking resistors get very hot when the braking resistors are loaded with Prated. Risk of burns and fire. • Choose a suitable installation location. Braking resistors are usually mounted on top of the control cabinet. • Do not touch the braking resistors. NOTES • • • The data applies to BW..., BW...-T and BW...-P braking resistors. For BW..., BW...-T and BW...-P braking resistors, plan for a load derating of 4% per 10 K from an ambient temperature of 45 °C (113 °F). Do not exceed the maximum ambient temperature of 80 °C (176 °F). The overload factor of the BW..-T and BW...-P braking resistors is limited by using an integrated temperature relay: – BW...-T up to overload factor 12 – BW...-P up to overload factor 40 • The maximum permitted line length between MOVITRAC® and braking resistor is 100 m (328 ft). • Parallel connection Two braking resistors must be connected in parallel for some inverter/resistor combinations. In this case, set the trip current on the bimetallic relay to twice the value of IF entered in the table. • Peak braking power The peak breaking power can be lower than the load capacity of the braking resistor due to the DC link voltage and the resistance value. Formula for calculating the peak braking power: Pmax = VDC2/R VDC is the maximum permitted DC link voltage. Its value is 120 • With 400 / 500 V units: DC 970 V • With 230 V units: DC 485 V System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Project Planning Selecting the braking resistor 6 The following table lists the peak braking power levels that are possible for the different resistance values. Resistance [] Peak braking power [KW] 400 / 500 V units 230 V units 100 9.4 – 72 13.0 – 68 13.8 – 47 20.0 – 39 24.0 – 27 34.8 8.7 18 52.2 – 15 62.7 – 12 78.4 19.6 – 26.1 156 39.2 9 (2 × 18 parallel) 6 6.8.1 Load capacity of PTC braking resistors The following diagram shows the load capacity of the braking resistors BW1 ... BW4 per braking operation: BW2 BW1 BW4 BW3 1200 600 [1] [J] 1000 500 800 400 600 300 400 200 200 100 0 [2] [3] 0 0 10 50 100 200 500 1000 [c/h] 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 [1] Brake ramp 10 s [2] Brake ramp 4 s [3] Brake ramp 0.2 s c/h cycles per hour System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 121 Project Planning Selecting the braking resistor 6 Calculation example Given: • Average braking power: 0.25 kW • Brake ramp: 2 s • 200 brake applications per hour Approach: Calculating energy from the power of the brake ramp: W = P × t = 0.25 kW × 2 s = 500 J The brake ramp [3] (0.2 s) can be used for the brake ramp in the diagram. Use the characteristic curve with the shorter brake ramp because a shorter brake ramp means more power. The diagram allows a power of 580 J with a 0.2 s brake ramp at 200 cycles per hour. In this case, the required 500 J can be dissipated with BW2/BW 4. 6.8.2 Load capacity flat design, wire resistors, grid resistors In braking operations within the cycle duration TD (standard: TD ≤ 120 s), the cdf braking power can be used to determine the resulting continuous resistor dissipation (100 % cdf power) by means of the power diagrams. The right-hand y axis shows 100 % cdf power. Observe the conditional peak braking power due to the DC link voltage when determining the load capacity. 6 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 100 6 4 4 BW...-005 2 2 1 0.8 1 0.8 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.4 BW...-003 0.2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 P2 (100% ED) [kW] Power diagram for flat-design braking resistors: P1 [kW] Flat-design power diagram 30 40 50 60 70 80 0,2 100 ED [%] P1 = Short-term power P2 = Continuous power cdf = cyclic duration factor of the braking resistor 122 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Project Planning Selecting the braking resistor Overload factor for wire resistors 6 Overload factor dependent on the cycle duration factor for wire resistors: K 30 10 3 1% 6% 10% 25% 40% 60% 100% ED [%] Cyclic duration factor CDF Overload factor K Overload factor for grid resistors 1% 3% 6% 15 % 25 % 40 % 60 % 80 % 100 % 30 15 9.5 5 3.2 2.2 1.5 1.12 1 Overload factor depending on cycle duration factor for grid resistors: K 20 10 3 1 1% 6% 10% 20% 40% 60% 100% ED [%] Cyclic duration factor CDF Overload factor K System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 1% 3% 6% 15 % 25 % 40 % 60 % 80 % 100 % 20 12 7.6 4 3 2.2 1.5 1.12 1 123 Project Planning Connecting AC brakemotors 6 Calculation example Given: • Peak braking power 13 kW • Average braking power 6.5 kW • Cyclic duration factor cdf 6 % Required: Procedure • BW.. braking resistor • The 100 % cdf power for wire and grid resistors is initially calculated using the following formula: Average braking power / overload factor (wire / grid resistor) Refer to the diagrams for the overload factor (wire and grid resistor) with a cyclic duration factor (cdf) of 6 %. • Results: 100 % cdf power for wire resistors: 685 W. 100 % cdf power for grid resistors: 856 W. • The maximum braking resistance value is 72 for a peak braking power of 13 kW when using a MC07B...-5A3 (AC 400/500 V unit) (→ Peak braking power table). • Select the appropriate braking resistor from the assignment tables with the following points: – Max. permitted braking resistance value – MOVITRAC® unit used Result when using MC07B0110-5A3, for example: BW039-12 6.9 Connecting AC brakemotors For detailed information about the SEW brake system, refer to the "Gearmotors" catalog, which you can order from SEW-EURODRIVE. SEW brake systems are disc brakes with a DC coil that release electrically and brake using spring force. A brake rectifier provides the brake with DC voltage. NOTE The brake rectifier must have a separate supply system cable for inverter operation; it must not be powered using the motor voltage! 124 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Project Planning Mains and motor connection 6.9.1 6 Brake rectifier The brake rectifier can be switched off in two ways causing the brake to be applied: 1. Cut-off in the AC circuit 2. Cut-off in the DC and AC circuit (faster cut-off) Always switch off the brake on the DC and AC sides in: • 6.9.2 All hoist applications Activating the brake Always activate the brake via binary output DOØ2 "/Brake": do not use the PLC. The binary output DOØ2 "/Brake" is configured as an output for operating a relay with free-wheeling diode and a control voltage of DC +24 V / max. 150 mA / 3.6 W. A power contactor can be controlled directly with a DC 24 V coil voltage or the BMK brake rectifier. This power contactor is used to switch the brake. The startup function in the FBG11B keypad and in the MotionStudio software sets the brake parameters for the 2-pole and 4-pole motors from SEW-EURODRIVE. The brake parameters (P73_) must be set manually in the case of SEW-EURODRIVE motors with a higher number of poles and non-SEW motors. 6.9.3 Brake parameters NOTE The brake parameters are adapted to the brake activation arrangement shown in the wiring diagram. If the values set for the brake release and application times are too short, e.g. for long response times in the brake control system, hoists, for example, may sag. 6.10 Mains and motor connection 6.10.1 Permitted voltage supply systems NOTE • • • Voltage supply systems with grounded star point MOVITRAC® B is intended for operation on TN and TT systems with directly grounded star point. Voltage supply systems with non-grounded star point Operation on mains systems with a non-grounded star point (for example IT power systems) is also permitted. SEW recommends using an earth-leakage monitor for this according to the PCM (pulse code measuring) principle. Using such devices prevents the earth-leakage monitor from mis-tripping due to the ground capacitance of the inverter. External conductor grounded voltage supply systems Operate the inverters on supply systems with a maximum phase-to-earth voltage of AC 300 V only. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 125 Project Planning Mains and motor connection 6 6.10.2 Mains contactors and input fuses Input contactor • Only use input contactors of utilization category AC-3 (EN 60947-4-1). Mains activations • Ensure a minimum time of 120 s between two mains activations for AC 230 V / single-phase units. UN t 120 s • Maintain a minimum switch-off time of 10 s for 3-phase units. UN 10 s t NOTE • Input fuses Do not use the K11 input contactor for jog mode, but only for switching the inverter on and off. Use the following commands for jog mode: – Enable/stop – CW/stop – CCW/stop Fusing types: • Line protection types in operation classes gL, gG: – Rated fusing voltage ≥ rated mains voltage – Rated fusing current must be designed for 100 % or 125 % of the rated inverter current depending on the inverter utilization. • Line protection switch with characteristics B, C: – Circuit breaker rated voltage ≥ rated mains voltage – Rated line protection switch currents must be 10 % above the rated inverter current. 126 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Project Planning Mains and motor connection 6 6.10.3 Line protection and core cross section Comply with the regulations of the specific country and for the specific machine regarding fusing and selecting . If required, also adhere to the notes on UL compliant installation. Always size the shared neutral conductor for the total current when using several singlephase units. Also size it according to the total current even if the unit connections are distributed over the three mains phases. This is because the third supply current harmonics are always cumulative. Select the cable cross section of the motor so the voltage drop is as small as possible. An excessively high voltage drop means that the full motor torque is not achieved. Smallest bending space (EN 618005-1) As stipulated in EN 61800-5-1, the distance between a power connection terminal and an obstruction toward which the wire is directed on leaving the terminal must correspond with the minimum values given in the table below. Cable cross section [mm2] Smallest bending space [mm] Wires per connection terminal Recommendation for standard installation, metric 1 2 3 10 ... 16 40 - - 25 50 - - 35 65 - - 50 125 125 180 70 150 150 190 95 180 180 205 120 205 205 230 150 255 255 280 185 305 305 330 If single-core copper cables with PVC insulation routed in cable ducts are used, SEWEURODRIVE proposes the following cable cross-sections and fuses for an ambient temperature of 25 °C and rated mains currents of 100% of the rated inverter current: MOVITRAC® B 1 × 230 V 1-phase 0003 0004 0005 0008 0011 1) 0015 Line protection C16 / gL16 / K16 C32 / gL25 / K25 / D20 Supply system lead 1.5 mm2 4 mm2 PE conductor 2 x 1.5 mm2 2 x 4 mm2 1.5 mm2 Motor lead 0022 2) 1.5 mm2 2 Unit terminal cross section of the power section Disconnectable terminal strip 4 mm conductor end sleeve DIN 46228 1) If there has been a pause of at least two minutes between turning the unit off and on again: B16 2) If there has been a pause of at least two minutes between turning the unit off and on again: B32 MOVITRAC® B 3 × 230 V 3-phase 0003 0004 0005 Line protection 0008 10 A 0011 0015 16 A Supply system lead 1.5 mm2 4 mm2 PE conductor 2 x 1.5 mm2 2 x 4 mm2 Motor lead Unit terminal cross section of the power section System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 1.5 mm2 Disconnectable terminal strip 4 0022 1.5 mm2 mm2 conductor end sleeve DIN 46228 127 Project Planning Mains and motor connection 6 MOVITRAC® B 3 × 230 V 0037 0055 0075 0110 0150 0220 0300 Fuses F11/F12/F13 IN 25 A 25 A 35 A 50 A 63 A 80 A 100 A 4 mm2 4 mm2 6 mm2 10 mm2 16 mm2 25 mm2 35 mm2 2 × 4 mm2 1 × 10 mm2 2 × 4 mm2 1 × 10 mm2 2 × 6 mm2 1 × 10 mm2 1 × 10 mm2 1 × 16 mm2 1 × 16 mm2 1 × 16 mm2 4 mm2 4 mm2 6 mm2 10 mm2 16 mm2 25 mm2 35 mm2 Supply system cable L1/L2/ L3 PE conductor Motor cable U/V/W Unit terminal cross section of the power section MOVITRAC® B 400 / 500 V 3-phase Separable terminal strip 4 mm2 conductor end sleeve DIN 46228 0003 0004 Line protection M4 screw and washer assembly with terminal clip 4 mm2 conductor end sleeve DIN 46228 6 mm2 crimp cable lug DIN 46234 0005 0008 1.5 mm 0040 0055 1.5 mm 2 x 1.5 mm2 1 x 10 mm2 2 Disconnectable terminal strip 4 mm conductor end sleeve DIN 46228 0110 0075 16 A 2 2 x 1.5 mm2 MOVITRAC® B 400 / 500 V 0150 16 A 2 1.5 mm2 2 x 1.5 mm2 1 x 10 mm2 2 x 1.5 mm2 1 x 10 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 M4 screw and washer assembly with terminal clip 4 mm2 conductor end sleeve DIN 46228 0220 0300 Line protection 25 A 35 A 50 A 63 A Supply system lead 4 mm2 6 mm2 10 mm2 16 mm2 PE conductor 2 x 4 mm2 1 x 10 mm2 2 x 6 mm2 1 x 10 mm2 1 x 10 mm2 1 x 16 mm2 4 mm2 6 mm2 10 mm2 16 mm2 Motor lead Unit terminal cross section of the power section MOVITRAC® B 400 / 500 V M4 screw and washer assembly with terminal clip 4 mm2 conductor end sleeve DIN 46228 6 mm2 crimp cable lug DIN 46234 0370 0450 M6 screw and washer assembly with washer max. 25 mm2 Crimp cable lug DIN 46234 0550 0750 Line protection 80 A 100 A 100 A 125 A Supply system lead 25 mm2 35 mm2 35 mm2 50 mm2 1 x 16 mm2 PE conductor Motor lead Unit terminal cross section of the power section 128 0030 1.5 mm2 Unit terminal cross section of the power section 3-phase 0022 16 A Motor lead 3-phase 0015 10 A Supply system lead PE conductor 0011 M10 bolt with nut max. 70 mm2 Press cable lug DIN 46235 M6 screw and washer assembly with washer max. 25 mm2 Crimp cable lug DIN 46234 25 mm2 25 mm2 35 mm2 Bolt M10 with nut max. 70 35 mm2 mm2 50 mm2 crimp cable connector DIN 36235 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Project Planning Mains and motor connection 6 Recommendation for standard installation, USA NEC MOVITRAC® B 1 × 230 V 1-phase 0003 0004 0005 0008 0011 0015 0022 Line protection C161) / gL16 / K16 C322) / gL25 / K25 / D20 Supply system lead AWG16 AWG12 PE conductor 2 x AWG16 2 x AWG12 AWG16 AWG16 Motor lead Unit terminal cross section of the power section Separable terminal strip AWG10 conductor end sleeve 1) If there has been a pause of at least two minutes between turning the unit off and on again: B16 2) If there has been a pause of at least two minutes between turning the unit off and on again: B32 MOVITRAC® B 3 × 230 V 3-phase 0003 0004 0005 Line protection 0008 0011 0015 10 A 0022 16 A Supply system lead AWG16 AWG12 PE conductor 2 x AWG16 2 x AWG12 AWG16 AWG16 Motor lead Unit terminal cross section of the power section Separable terminal strip AWG10 conductor end sleeve MOVITRAC® B 3 × 230 V 0037 0055 0075 0110 0150 0220 0300 Fuses F11/F12/F13 IN 25 A 25 A 35 A 50 A 63 A 80 A 100 A Supply system cable L1/L2/ L3 AWG12 AWG12 AWG10 AWG6 AWG4 AWG4 AWG3 PE conductor AWG12 AWG12 AWG10 AWG10 AWG8 AWG8 AWG6 Motor cable U/V/W AWG12 AWG10 AWG10 AWG6 AWG4 AWG4 AWG3 Separable terminal strip AWG10 conductor end sleeve Unit terminal cross section of the power section MOVITRAC® B 400 / 500 V 0003 M4 screw and washer assembly with terminal clip AWG10 conductor end sleeve AWG10 crimp cable lug 0004 0005 Size Fuses F11/F12/F13 0008 M6 screw and washer assembly with washer Max. AWG10 crimp cable lug 0011 0014 0015 M10 bolt with nut Max. AWG2/0 crimp cable lug 0022 0 IN 0030 0040 1 6A 10A 15 A Supply system cable L1/L2/L3 AWG14 AWG14 PE conductor AWG14 AWG14 Motor cable U/V/W AWG14 AWG14 Separable terminal strip AWG10 conductor end sleeve Separable terminal strip AWG10 conductor end sleeve Unit terminal cross section of the power section MOVITRAC® B 400 / 500 V 0055 0075 Size 0110 0150 0220 2 Fuses F11/F12/F13 IN 0300 3 20 A 30 A 40 A 60 A 80 A Supply system cable L1/L2/ L3 AWG12 AWG10 AWG8 AWG6 AWG4 PE conductor AWG12 AWG10 Motor cable U/V/W AWG12 AWG10 AWG6 AWG4 Unit terminal cross section of the power section M4 screw and washer assembly with terminal clip AWG10 conductor end sleeve AWG10 crimp cable lug System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B AWG10 AWG8 AWG8 M6 screw and washer assembly with washer max. AWG4 crimp cable lug 129 Project Planning Mains and motor connection 6 MOVITRAC® B 400 / 500 V 0370 0450 Size 0550 4 Fuses F11/F12/F13 IN 0750 5 90 A 110 A 150 A 175 A Supply system cable L1/L2/ L3 AWG4 AWG3 AWG1 AWG2/0 PE conductor AWG8 AWG6 AWG6 AWG6 Motor cable U/V/W AWG4 AWG3 AWG1 AWG2/0 M10 bolt with nut Max. AWG2/0 crimp cable lug Unit terminal cross section of the power section 6.10.4 Motor cable length The maximum motor cable length depends on: • Cable type • Voltage drop in the cable • Set PWM frequency. • Using an output filter The limit values in the tables do not apply if you use and output filter. The motor cable length is then solely limited by the voltage drop on the motor cable. MOVITRAC® B Permitted maximum motor cable length in m (ft) Size 0XS / 0S / 0L Voltage Vmains 2S 0055 3 AC 400 V 3 AC 230 V 1 AC 230 V 3 AC 500 V 3 AC 400 V (125 % IN) 2S 0075 / 2/3/4/5 3 AC 230 V 3 AC 400/500 V Shielded cable 4 kHz1) 8 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz 100 (328) 70 (230) 50 (160) 40 (130) 50 (160) 35 (110) 25 (82) 25 (82) 300 (984) 250 (820) 200 (656) 150 (492) 400 (1310) 300 (984) 250 (820) 200 (656) Unshielded cable 4 kHz1) 8 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz 200 (656) 140 (459) 100 (328) 80 (2640 100 (328) 70 (230) 50 (160) 50 (160) 900 (2950) 750 (2460) 600 (1970) 450 (1480) 1200 (3937) 900 (2950) 750 (2460) 600 (1970) 1) Standard setting NOTE Do not use an earth-leakage circuit breaker with long motor cables. The leakage currents caused by cable capacitance may cause mis-tripping. 130 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Project Planning Mains and motor connection 6 6.10.5 Voltage drop Select the cable cross-section of the motor cable so the voltage drop is as small as possible. An excessively high voltage drop means that the full motor torque is not achieved. You can determine the expected voltage drop using the following tables. For shorter cables, you can calculate the voltage drop by converting in proportion to the length. Cable cross section Load with I [A] = 4 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 30 40 50 63 80 100 125 150 Voltage drop U [V] with length = 100 m (328 ft) and ϑ = 70 °C (158 °F) Copper 1.5 mm2 5.3 8 10.6 13.3 17.3 21.3 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 2.5 mm2 3.2 4.8 6.4 8.1 10.4 12.8 16 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 10.0 1) 1) 1) 1) 2 4 mm 1.9 2.8 3.8 4.7 6 mm2 10 6.5 8.0 10 12.5 1) 4.4 5.3 6.4 8.3 9.9 mm2 3.2 4.0 16 mm2 5.0 6.0 8.2 10.2 1) 3.3 3.9 5.2 6.5 7.9 2 25 mm 2.5 3.3 35 mm2 4.1 5.1 6.4 8.0 1) 2.9 3.6 4.6 5.7 7.2 8.6 4.0 5.0 6.0 100 125 150 2 50 mm 1) Loading not permitted, in accordance with VDE 0100 part 430 Cable cross section Load with I [A] = 4 6 8 AWG16 7.0 10.5 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) AWG14 4.2 6.3 8.4 10.5 13.6 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 13.0 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) Copper AWG12 10 13 16 20 25 30 40 50 63 80 Voltage drop U [V] with length = 100 m (328 ft) and ϑ = 70 °C (158 °F) 2.6 3.9 5.2 AWG10 6.4 8.4 10.3 12.9 1) 5.6 6.9 8.7 10.8 7.0 8.4 11.2 1) 4.3 5.1 6.9 8.6 10.8 13.7 1) 1) 1) AWG4 3.2 4.3 5.4 6.8 8.7 10.8 13.5 1) AWG3 2.6 3.4 4.3 5.1 6.9 8.6 10.7 12.8 3.4 4.2 5.4 6.8 8.5 10.2 AWG1 3.4 4.3 5.4 6.8 8.1 AWG1/0 2.6 3.4 4.3 5.4 6.8 2.7 3.4 4.3 5.1 AWG8 4.5 AWG6 AWG2 AWG2/0 5.6 1) More than 3 % voltage drop in relation to Vmains = AC 460 V. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 131 Project Planning Multi-motor drive/group drive 6 6.11 Multi-motor drive/group drive Group drives are mechanically decoupled from each other (e.g. different conveyor belts). In this operating mode, the inverter operates without slip compensation and with a constant V/f ratio. Multi-motor drives are mechanically coupled to each other (e.g. chain drive with multiple motors). Observe the notes in the publication "Multi-Motor Drives". 6.11.1 Motor currents The total of the motor currents must not exceed the rated output current of the inverter. 6.11.2 Motor cable You can calculate the permitted total length of all motor cables connected in parallel as follows: Imax Itotal n ltotal = Total length of the motor cables connected in parallel lmax = Recommended maximum motor cable length for individual drives n = Number of motors connected in parallel 6.11.3 Motor size The motors in a group must not be more than 3 type sizes apart. 6.11.4 Output filter For groups with more than 3 ... 4 motors, SEW-EURODRIVE recommends to use an HF output filter. An output filter HF... is required if the maximum motor cable length (lmax) given in the table is exceeded. This may be the case in large groups (n) or when there are long motor cable lengths connected in parallel (ltot). In this case, it is the voltage drop on the motor cable that limits the maximum motor cable length, not the limit value in the table. The total of the rated motor currents must not exceed the rated throughcurrent of the output filter. 132 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Project Planning Line chokes 6.12 6 Line chokes 6.12.1 1-phase Use is required under the following circumstances: • Mains inductances of less than 100 μH per branch • Using line chokes is required when operating several units that are switched on simultaneously. The line choke limits overvoltages caused by the switching. Use is optional in the following instances: • Reduction in the supply system current harmonics • Support for overvoltage protection 6.12.2 3-phase Using line chokes is required when operating more than 4 units that are switched on simultaneously. The line choke limits overvoltages caused by the switching. Use is optional for supporting overvoltage protection. 6.13 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters are components of machines and systems. They comply with the EMC product standard EN 61800-3 Variable-speed electrical drives. If you want to equip the machine / system with frequency inverters compliant with the EMC directive 89/336/EEC: Adhere to the notes on EMC compliant installation. Following the relationship between new and old limit classes: New limit class according to EN 61800-3 Previous limit class according to EN 55011/55014 C2 A C1 B System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 133 6 Project Planning Electromagnetic compatibility EMC 6.13.1 Interference immunity MOVITRAC® B meets the minimum requirements stipulated in EN 61800-3 with regard to interference immunity. 6.13.2 Interference emission The interference emission of MOVITRAC® B was tested using standard equipment. The limit values complied with allow the units to be used in both the industrial and private sphere. The following measures are recommended depending on the target limit value class. Higher levels of interference are permitted in industrial environments. In industrial environments, you can dispense with the measures listed below depending on the situation of the supply system and the plant configuration. Limit value class The following possible solutions exist for EMC-compliant installation, depending on the plant configuration. Perform an EMC compliant installation. Limit classes C1 and C2 according to EN 61800-3. Limit value class C2 C1 Size 0 230 V 1-phase Input end Output end No additional filtering required Output choke HD012 / HD100 / HD101 or shielded motor cable, or HF output filter Cable conducted No additional filtering required Radiation conducted Foldable ferrites1) Shielded motor cable 1) 3 foldable ferrites ULF11A over the supply system cables L and N (without PE) Limit value class C2 C1 Size 0 400/500 V / 230 V 3-phase Input end Output end No additional filtering required Output choke HD012 / HD100 / HD101 or shielded motor cable, or HF output filter Line filter NF Output choke HD012 / HD100 / HD101 or shielded motor cable FKE EMC-module Limit value class Sizes 1 / 2S / 2 400/500 V / 230 V 3-phase Input end Output end C2 No additional filter required. HD output choke, or shielded motor cable, or HF output filter C1 Line filter NF HD output choke or shielded motor cable Limit value class Size 3 / 4 / 5 400/500 V / 230 V 3-phase Input end C2 Line filter NF C1 134 Output end HD output choke, or shielded motor cable, or HF output filter HD output choke or shielded motor cable System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Project Planning Electromagnetic compatibility EMC 6 6.13.3 Connection Observe the "Installation" section for EMC-compliant connection. 6.13.4 IT systems NOTES • • • No EMC limits are specified for interference emission in voltage supply systems without an NF earthed star point (IT systems). The efficiency of line filters is severely limited. In size 0, you can deactivate the suppression capacitors. See the section "Installation / Installation for IT systems". It is important that you deactivate the suppression capacitors when using earthleakage monitors with pulse code measurement. 6.13.5 Inverter-caused leakage currents Earth-leakage currents ≥ 3.5 mA may occur during normal operation. Earth leakage currents are determined mainly by: • The amount of DC link voltage • The PWM frequency • The motor cable used and its length. • The motor used Reducing earth-leakage currents (size 0 only) You can deactivate the suppression capacitors to PE (see section "Installation / Installation for IT systems") to reduce earth-leakage currents in the inverter. When the suppression capacitors are deactivated, the EMC filter is no longer active. SEW-EURODRIVE recommends that you do not use earth-leakage circuit breakers and instead choose other measures to ensure protection of personnel (e.g. according to EN 61800-5-1, EN 50178, EN 60204-1, etc.). System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 135 Project Planning HF output filters 6 6.14 HF output filters 6.14.1 Important notes Observe the following instructions when using output filters: • Do not use output filters in hoist applications. • During project planning of the drive, take into account the voltage drop in the output filter and consequently the reduced motor torque available. This applies particularly to AC 230 V units with output filters. • Flying start function is not possible with HF.. output filter 6.14.2 Installation, connection and operation NOTES • • • • • • • • • 136 Install output filters next to the corresponding inverter. Leave a ventilation space of at least 100 mm (3.94 in) below and above the output filter. No clearance is required on the sides. Limit the connection cable between inverter and output filter to the absolutely necessary length. Maximum 1 m (3 ft) with unshielded cable, 10 m (33 ft) with shielded cable. An unshielded motor line is sufficient when using an output filter. Note the following instructions when you use an output filter together with a shielded motor cable: – The maximum permitted length of the motor cable for operation without VDC link connection is 20 m (66 ft). – Operation with VDC link connection is required if the motor cable is longer than 20 m (66 ft). – Observe the notes "Operation with VDC link connection" on the next page. The rated through current of the output filter must be higher than or equal to the output current of the inverter. Note whether the projected output current of the inverter is 100 % IN (= rated output current) or 125 % IN (= continous output current). Several motors can be connected together to one output filter when operating a motor group from one inverter. The total value of the rated motor currents must not exceed the rated throughput current of the output filter. It is possible to connect two output filters of the same type to one inverter output to increase the rated through current. To do this, connect all like connections to the output filters in parallel. Considerable noise (magnetostriction) may occur in the output filter especially if operating with fPWM = 4 kHz. In environments susceptible to noise, SEWEURODRIVE recommends operation with fPWM = 12 kHz (or 16 kHz) and VDC link connection. Observe the notes regarding VDC link connection. When the inverter is operated with fPWM = 4 or 8 kHz, the output filter connection V5 (with HF...-503) or 7 (with HF...-403) must not be connected (no VDC link connection). Do not make a VDClink connection when using size 0XS units. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Project Planning HF output filters 6 6.14.3 UZ link Operation without VDC link connection: • Approved only for PWM frequency 4 kHz or 8 kHz. B X1 X2/3 +R Operation with VDClink connection: Connection of inverter terminal + R with HF…-503 terminal V5 or HF…-403 terminal 7 NOTES • • • • • • Optimized grounded filter effect. Improved filter effect in the low-frequency range (≤ 150 kHz). Approved only for PWM frequency 12 kHz or 16 kHz. Note that increased losses (= power reduction) occur in the inverter when operating with 12 kHz or 16 kHz. Set PMW fix = on; the inverter must not be able to reduce the PWM frequency automatically Strictly observe the following for HF...-403: VDC link connection only permitted if Vmains ≤ AC 400 V, not with Vmains = AC 500 V. The VDClink connection increases the inverter load. The DC link connection increases the required inverter output current in relation to the rated output current of the inverter as shown in the following table. fPWM Umains = 3 × AC 230 V Umains = 3 × AC 400 V Umains = 3 × AC 500 V 12 kHz 4% 12 % 15 % 16 kHz 3% 8% 12 % The increased power requirement causes an additional load on the inverter. Take this aspect into account during project planning of the drive. Failure to comply with this aspect may cause the inverter to shut down due to overload. B X1 X2/3 +R NOTE No VDClink connection is possible with size 0XS units. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 137 6 Project Planning HF output filters The procedure for selecting the PWM frequency and checking the inverter is summarized in the following figure. Noise sensitive environment in which HF is used (not motor!) Selecting PWM frequency and VDClink connection Yes No Motor cable type Shielded Unschielded Length of motor cable (also total length for group drive) Motor cable length only limited by voltage drop > 20 m < 20 m High EMC requirements Optimized filtering against ground Yes Motor cable length only limited by voltage drop No With UDC link connection (P860) PWM frequency 12/16 kHz (P862) PWM frequency = FIX With VDC link connection (P862) PWM frequency 4 / 8 kHz 3 x AC 230 V Mains voltage? 3 x AC 500 V 3 x AC 400 V FI output current increases by u = 4 % (12 kHz) u = 3 % (16 kHz) FI output current does not increase (u = 0) Required output current FI = (1+u) x motor current FI output current increases by u = 12 % (12 kHz) u = 8 % (16 kHz) HF...-403 not permitted FI output current increases by u = 15 % (12 kHz) u = 12 % (16 kHz) Checking the frequency inverter (FI) and selecting the HF filter Take minimization of FI output current into account. Requirements: Performance reduction due to PWM frequency, ambient temperature, continuous current consumption. See section "Project Planning" in system manual Select larger FI No FI output current large enough? Yes Choose HF output filter from table depending on motor current (sec. "Technical Data and Dimension Drawings - HF... Output Filters). Please note: I I I HF_rated rated_motor motor 138 . System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Project Planning Electronics cables and signal generation 6.15 6 Electronics cables and signal generation 6.15.1 Cable type The electronic terminals are suitable for: • Cross sections up to 1.5 mm2 (AWG16) without conductor end sleeves • Cross sections up to 1.0 mm2 (AWG17) with conductor end sleeves Use shielded cables as standard. Ground the shield at both ends. Route electronics cables separately from power cables and leads to contactor controls or braking resistors. 6.15.2 0 V cables Never connect 0 V cables GND for generating signals. The 0 V cables of several electrical units which are connected should not be looped from unit to unit, but rather wired up in a star configuration. This means: • Install the units in adjacent control cabinet compartments rather than distributing them widely. • Lay the 0 V cables with at least 1 mm2 (AWG17) cross section from a central point to each individual unti by the shortest possible route. 6.15.3 Coupling relays You can use coupling relays for electrical isolation of the binary inputs and binary outputs to the functional ground. Use only coupling relays with encapsulated, dustprotected electronic contacts. The relays must be suitable to switch small voltages and current (5 ... 30 V, 0.1 ... 20 mA). 6.16 External voltage supply DC 24 V The internal voltage supply is sufficient for the basic unit and binary outputs up to 200 mA (DO02: 150 mA; DO03: 50 mA). FBG11B, FSC11B with options DBG60B, USB11A, UWS21A, or UWS21B can also be supplied by the internal voltage supply. The MOVITRAC® B can be supplied via an external DC 24 V voltage supply. This is useful, for example, with bus operation. The voltage supply must be sized large enough to operate the digital outputs also. Fieldbus options always require an external voltage supply, In this case, you must always switch on the external DC 24 V power supply unit prior to the mains contactor or after switching off the mains contactor. The DC 24V voltage output can be switched off with P808. This means external voltage supply is still possible. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 139 6 Project Planning External voltage supply DC 24 V DC 24 V power demand of MOVITRAC® B: Size Basic unit power demand1) 0 MC07B…-00 5W 0 MC07B…-S0 12 W 1, 2S, 2 17 W 3 23 W 4, 5 25 W DBG60B Fieldbus option2)3) FIO11B 1W 2W 3W DHP11B3) 4.5 W 1) FBG11B, FSC11B (UWS11A/USB11A) included. Take account of the additional load of the binary inputs with 2.4 W per 100 mA. 2) Fieldbus options are: DFP21B, DFD11B, DFE11B, ... 3) These options must always be externally supplied. NOTES When using an auxiliary voltage for the backup mode on VIO24, you must ensure that the backup voltage is always applied in mains operation because other units connected to VIO24 are otherwise supplied by MOVITRAC® B in mains operation without a backup voltage supply. The maximum current load for looping through the backup voltage supply from VIO24 / basic unit to VIO24 / FSC/FIO is 1 A. 6.16.1 Example MC07B0015-5A3-4-00/DFP21B with options FSC11B & FBG11B. MOVTRAC® B supplies the binary inputs DI01 (CW/Stop) and DI03 (Enable) with voltage. The motor brake is controlled via DO02.The brake coil of the brake relay requires 100 mA at DC 24 V. The master PLC evaluates the fault signal contact via DO00 at a current consumption of 50 mA. Calculating the total power demand: • Power demand of the basic unit (incl. FSC11B and power supply of the binary inputs): 5W • Power demand of the DFP21B fieldbus option: 3 W • Power demand of the brake coil: 0 W because output is 0 active in DV 24 V operation. • Power demand of the fault signal contact: 24 V x 0.05 A = 1.2 W The total power demand is 9.2 W. An external DC 24 V power supply is required in this case. 140 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Project Planning Parameter set switchover 6.17 6 Parameter set switchover This function is used to operate two motors on one inverter using two different parameter sets. The parameter set is switched over via binary input or fieldbus. A binary input must be programmed to the "Parameter set switchover" function (→ P60_/P61_) for this purpose. You can then change from parameter set 1 to 2 and vice versa in INHIBITED inverter status. Function PARAM. SELECT Effect at "0" signal "1" signal Parameter set 1 active Parameter set 2 active NOTE A changeover contactor should be provided for each of the two motor cables when two motors are operated alternately on the same inverter with the parameter set switchover function in use. Only switch changeover contactors when the unit is inhibited! System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 141 Project Planning Priority of the operating statuses and interrelation between control signals 6 6.18 Priority of the operating statuses and interrelation between control signals 6.18.1 Priority of operating states The following illustration shows the priority of operating states: Priority high Controller inhibit Rapid stop Stop low Enable 6.18.2 Interrelation between control signals The following table shows the interrelation between control signals. "CW/Stop" is programmed to binary input DIØ1 and cannot be changed. The other control signals are only in effect if a binary input is programmed to this function (→ parameter P60_). Binary input is programmed to /Controller inhibit Enable/ Rapid stop CW/stop (DI01) "0" 1) 1) 1) "0" 2) 2) "1" CCW/stop Inverter status Inhibited "1" "1" "1" "0" CW enabled "1" "1" "0" "1" CCW enabled 1) Not relevant when the binary input is on controller inhibit and "/Control inhibit" = "0" 2) Not relevant if "Enable/Rapid stop" = "0" Linking control signals: CW =1 & CCW* & Drive control ENABLE* /CONTROLLER INHIBIT* * If a binary input is programmed to this function. 142 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Project Planning PI controller 6.19 6 PI controller You can use the implemented PI controller for temperature control, pressure control or other applications. The PI controller can be switched on and off. Structural diagram showing installation of the PI controller P250 PI controller Normal Inverted 1 -1 - Actual value AI1 % P301/311 nmax P302/312 nmin nmax x nmin Speed setpoint (value) Correcting variable Setpoint % Control difference P251 P-gain P252 I-component Connect the actual value from the sensor (temperature, pressure, etc.) to analog input AI1. You can scale the actual value up or down and assign an offset value, thereby adapting it to the working range of the PI controller. You can set the PI-controller setpoint using one of the six programmed fixed setpoints or specify the setpoint using the RS-485 or fieldbus (SBus) interface (P100 = Setpoint source). Furthermore you can specify the setpoint using the local setpoint potentiometer. The correcting variable of the PI controller is a speed setpoint limited to a minimum and maximum speed (P301=Minimum speed1 and P302=Maximum speed1). The setting of the speed ramp times has no effect when the PI controller is active. The default settings for the parameters are indicated in bold below. 6.19.1 Parameterization Activating the PI controller Switch the PI-controller on and off using parameter P250. The values set for setpoint and actual values mentioned in the beginning are active when you switch on the PI controller. The NORMAL setting increases the correcting variable if there is a positive system deviation; the correcting variable is reduced if there is a negative system deviation. The INVERTED setting increases the correcting variable if there is a negative system deviation; the correcting variable is reduced if there is a positive system deviation. P 250 Controller parameters PI controller Off Normal Inverted You can adapt the controller to the application using the following settings: P 251 P 252 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B P-gain I-component 0 ... 1 ... 64 0 ... 1 ... 2000 [s] Step width: Bereich: 0 0.01 ... 0.99 1.0 ... 9.9 10 ... 99 100 ... 2000 0.01 Step width: I-component OFF 0.01 0.1 1 10 143 6 Project Planning PI controller 6.19.2 Setpoint selection The following settings are possible as the setpoint source. You can select the setpoint source with parameter P100. • Unipolar / Fixed setpoint: The setpoint zero applies as long as no setpoint is selected. The FBG setpoint control module can be added to setpoint zero or a fixed setpoint using P121. P163/164/165 Setpoint n11/12/13 scales PI controller [0 … 100 %] step width: 0.1 % P173/174/175 Setpoint n21/22/23 scales PI controller [0… 100 %] step width: 0.1 % Operation with optional second analog input (e.g. FIO1B) The setpoint from the AI2 analog input applies as long as no setpoint is selected. The FBG speed control module can be added to AI1 or a fixed setpoint using P121. Fixed setpoint selected AI2 0 [%] 1 PI controller setpoint [%] Fixed setpoint [%] • RS-485/fixed setpoint • SBus 1 / Fixed setpoint: Specify the setpoint and set it using the following bus parameters: P870/871/872 Setpoint description PO1/PO2/PO3 [PI controller setpoint [%] PO1/PO2/PO3 = 0 ... 214 = 0 ... 100 % PI-controller setpoint Setpoint selection is always unipolar. The inverter restricts negative setpoints (e.g. via RS-485 or SBus) to zero. Fixed setpoint selected PO setpoint [%] 0 100% 1 PI controller setpoint [%] 0% Fixed setpoint [%] nset > 0: CW direction of rotation nset < 0: CCW direction of rotation • For all setpoint sources: The FBG setpoint control module can be added to the setpoint or a fixed setpoint using P121. • The settings Bipolar / fixed setpoint, Motor potentiometer / fixed setpoint as well as Fixed setpoint + AI1 and Fixed setpoint * AI1 do not have any effect. If you set these, the inverter always specifies the setpoint zero. • Frequency input / fixed setpoint Selected fixed setpoint FI1 [%] 0 1 PI controller setpoint [%] Fixed setpoint [%] 144 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Project Planning PI controller 6 6.19.3 Actual value detection The unipolar input AI1 is the actual value input. You can set the operating mode for the actual value using P112 AI1 operating mode (see also parameters 116 … 119): • 0 ... 10 V: The following applies to operation as a voltage input: 0 ... 10 V = 0 ... 100 % PI controller actual value • 0 ... 20 mA: The following applies to operation as a current input: 0 ... 20 mA = 0 ... 100 % PI controller actual value • 4 ... 20 mA: The following applies to operation as a current input: 4 ... 20 mA = 0 ... 100 % PI controller actual value 6.19.4 Reference message With this parameter, you can program a reference message with regard to the actual value of the PI controller. By doing this, you can monitor the actual value for violation of a limit value. P450 P451 PI actual value reference Signal = "1" when 0 ... 100 [%] Step width: PI actual value < PI reference PI actual value > PI reference 0.1 % You have to program a binary output terminal to "PI controller actual value reference" to issue the reference signal. The reference message operates with a hysteresis of 5 %. The reference signal does not have a delay time and signals "1" depending on P451. You must program the binary output DO01 P620, DO02 P621 or DO03 P622 to PI controller actual value reference. 6.19.5 Inverter control You can determine the direction of rotation by using the terminals for the direction of rotation "CW/Stop and "CCW/Stop". Upon enable, the inverter increases the speed up to P301 Minimum speed using the P130 Speed ramp. PI control becomes active once the minimum speed is reached. The PI controller correcting variable directly determines the speed setpoint. If you revoke the CW/CCW terminal, the inverter deactivates PI control and stores the I-component of the PI controller. The speed decreases using the speed ramp (P131). If you enable the inverter before the drive has reached its stop speed, the PI controller becomes active again with the current setpoint. If you stop the inverter with the "Enable/Stop" terminal, the drive decelerates with the stop ramp. The inverter stores the I-component of the controller. With setpoint source RS485 or SBUS, the value of the PO data item determines the direction of rotation. "PI-REGLER %" and the value of the PO data item "PI-REGLER %" act as a setpoint for the PI controller. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 145 Project Planning Application examples 6 6.20 Application examples All application examples presented here assume that the unit has been started up correctly in accordance with the "Startup" section. 6.20.1 External setpoint potentiometer The external setpoint potentiometer is not effective when manual operation is active. Connect an external setpoint potentiometer as follows: The resistance value of the external setpoint potentiometer R must be ≥ 3 k. R REF1 AI11 AI12 GND 1 2 3 4 X10: DI00 DI01 DI02 DI03 DI04 DI05TF VOTF 24VIO GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 X12: 6.20.2 Setpoint value processing Using AI1 as 0 ... 10 V voltage input, no fixed setpoint selected, frequency inverter enabled. Setpoint source X1 P116 Y1 P117 X2 P118 Y2 P119 UAI1 Setpoint speed Diagram 100% / nmax Bipolar 0% 100 % 100 % 100 % 0V 5V 10 V nmin 50 % nmax nmax 50 % / nmax/2 nmin 0% 0 1/min 0V 146 50% / 5 V 100% / 10 V System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Project Planning Application examples Setpoint source X1 P116 Y1 P117 X2 P118 Y2 P119 UAI1 Setpoint speed 6 Diagram 100% / nmax 50 % / nmax/2 Bipolar 0% –100 % 100 % 100 % 0V 5V 10 V – nmax. –nmin / +nmin +nmax nmin 0% 0 1/min 0V -nmin 100% / 10 V -50 % / nmax/2 -100% / nmax 100% / nmax Unipolar 0% 100 % 100 % 100 % 0V 5V 10 V nmin 50 % nmax nmax 50 % / nmax/2 nmin 0% 0 1/min 0V 50% / 5 V 100% / 10 V 100% / nmax Unipolar 0% 0% 100 % 0% 0V 5V 10 V nmax 50 % nmax nmin 50 % / nmax/2 nmin 0% 0 1/min 0V System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 50% / 5 V 100% / 10 V 147 Project Planning Application examples 6 6.20.3 Speed-controlled agitator In this application, you can control the speed using the FBG speed control module. RUN STOP RESET The keypad is used to control: • Reset • Start • Stop • Speed control. Select the "FGB speed control module" icon to operate the agitator. Parameters 148 Adapt the following parameters for the agitator: • P122 FBG manual operation: Direction of rotation • Ramp t11 up (adjust with keypad or parameter P130) • Ramp t11 up (adjust via keypad icon or parameter P131) • P301 Minimum speed • P302 Maximum speed • P860 PWM frequency System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Project Planning Application examples 6 6.20.4 Positioning a trolley Principle Positioning a trolley with rapid speed and creep speed, and position detection using proximity sensors. The emergency off function must be guaranteed using a separate safety circuit. Install a braking resistor. Perform a startup for the VFC operating mode. RUN STOP RESET System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 149 Project Planning Application examples 6 Terminals • Rapid speed: • Slow speed: DI04 = 1 and DI05 = 1 DI04 = 1 and DI05 = 0 Assign the electronics terminal strip with • DI01 = CW/stop • DI02 = CCW/Stop • DI03 = Enable • DO01-C and DO01-NO = "Fault" • DO02 = Brake S1 PLC K1 DI00 DI01 DI02 DI03 DI04 DI05TF VOTF 24VIO GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 X12: GND DO02 DO03 GND DO01-C DO01-NO DO01-NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X13: K1 is the brake contactor, S1 the fault indicator light. The following signals between the machine controller PLC and MOVITRAC® B are important: X12:2: Clockwise direction of rotation X12:3: Counterclockwise direction of rotation X12:4: Start/Stop X12:5: Rapid speed Parameters The following parameters are relevant for this application. Check whether you can leave all factory setting values unchanged. P601 Binary input DI02: CCW/stop P602 Binary input DI03: Enable P603 Binary input DI04: n11/n21 150 X12:6: Slow speed/rapid speed X12:8: 24 V X13:6: No malfunction X13:2: Brake released P604 Binary input DI05: n12/n22 P620 Binary output DO01: Malfunction P621 Binary output DO02: Brake released System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Project Planning Application examples 6 6.20.5 PI controller Following a diagram showing the basic structure of the control system with a PI controller, taking the example of a pressure control system. MOVITRAC® B Setpoint Control deviation + PI controller Frequency Current/voltage Speed Torque Motor Pressure Compressor evaluated actual value System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Unit signal current/voltage Actual value Pressure sensor 151 Unit design Size 0XS / 0S / 0L 7 7 Unit design 7.1 Size 0XS / 0S / 0L [2] [1] [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [11] [12] [10] [9] [7] [5] [18] [1] PE connection [2] X1: Power supply connection: 3-phase: L1 / L2 / L3 1-phase: L / N [5] X2: Motor connection U / V / W / Brake connection +R / –R [7] X17: Safety contact for safe stop (only MC07B...-S0: sizes 0S / 0L, 400 / 500 V) [9] X13: Binary outputs [10] X12: Binary inputs [11] X10: Analog input [12] Switch S11 for V-mA toggle analog input (in sizes 0XS and 0S behind removable connector) [13] Option card slot (cannot be retrofitted / not for BG0XS) [14] Connection for optional communication / analog module [15] Optional keypad [16] Status LED (visible without optional keypad) [17] Fixing strap [18] Shield plate for motor cable, fixing strap underneath 152 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Unit design Size 1 / 2S / 2 7.2 7 Size 1 / 2S / 2 [1] [3] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] [9] [8] [1] X1: Power supply connection 3-phase: L1 / L2 / L3 / PE screw [3] X4: DC link connection –UZ / +UZ [4] X2: Motor connection U / V / W / PE screw [5] X3: Braking resistor connection R+ / R– / PE [7] X17: Safety contact for safe stop (only 400 / 500 V) [8] Electronics shield clamp [9] X13: Binary outputs [10] X12: Binary inputs [11] X10: Analog input [12] Switch S11 for V-mA toggle analog input [13] Option card slot [14] Connection for optional communication / analog module [15] Optional keypad [16] Status LED (visible without optional keypad) System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 153 Unit design Size 3 7 7.3 Size 3 [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] [9] [7] [8] [1] X2: PE connection [2] X1: Power supply connection 3-phase: 1/L1 / 2/L2 / 3/L3 [3] X4: DC link connection –UZ / +UZ [4] X2: PE connection [5] X2: Motor connection U (4) / V (5) / W (6) [6] X3: Braking resistor connection R+ (8) / R– (9) and PE connection [7] X17: Safety contact for safe stop (only 400 / 500 V) [8] Electronics shield clamp [9] X13: Binary outputs [10] X12: Binary inputs [11] X10: Analog input [12] Switch S11 for V-mA toggle analog input [13] Option card slot [14] Connection for optional communication / analog module [15] Optional keypad [16] Status LED (visible without optional keypad) 154 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Unit design Size 4 / 5 7.4 7 Size 4 / 5 [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] [9] [7] [8] [4] [5] [6] [1] X2: PE connection [2] X1: Power supply connection 3-phase: 1/L1 / 2/L2 / 3/L3 [3] X4: DC link connection –UZ / +UZ and PE connection [4] X2: PE connection [5] X2: Motor connection U (4) / V (5) / W (6) [6] X3: Braking resistor connection R+ (8) / R– (9) and PE connection [7] X17: Safety contact for safe stop (only 400 / 500 V) [8] Electronics shield clamp [9] X13: Binary outputs [10] X12: Binary inputs [11] X10: Analog input [12] Switch S11 for V-mA toggle analog input [13] Option card slot [14] Connection for optional communication / analog module [15] Optional keypad [16] Status LED (visible without optional keypad) System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 155 Unit design Unit designation / nameplate 7 7.5 Unit designation / nameplate MC 07 B 0004- 2 B 1- 4- 00 Design 00 = Standard S0 = Safe stop Quadrants 4 = 4Q (with brake chopper) Connection type 3 = 3-phase / 1 = 1-phase Radio interference suppression Supply voltage Recommended motor power 0 = No radio interference suppression A = Radio interference suppression C2 B = Radio interference suppression C1 2 = AC 200 ... 240 V 5 = AC 380 ... 500 V 0022 = 2.2 kW Version B Series and generation MOVITRAC® type The unit status is indicated above the lower barcode. 156 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Installation Installation notes 8 Installation 8.1 Installation notes 8 NOTE Comply with the safety notes during installation. 8.1.1 Mounting the front options [1] [A] [2] [3] [1] [B] [4] [2] [1] [C] [2] Observe the following sequence when mounting the front options: • To mount the FBG11B [A] keypad, first insert it on top of the housing [1]. Next, press the socket on the keypad onto the connector of the unit [2]. • For the FSC11B communication module and the FIO11B analog module [B], insert the spacer bolt first for size 0 [1]. Insert the FSC11B communication module and the FIO11B module [B] first at the bottom of the housing [2] before pressing the socket of the front option onto the connector of the unit [3]. Finally secure the front option using the screw on the unit [4]. • To install the cover [C], first place it onto the unit approximately 5 mm away from the final position [1]. Next, move it upwards [2]. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 157 Installation Installation notes 8 8.1.2 Recommended tools • 8.1.3 Use a screwdriver with a 2.5 mm wide blade for connecting the electronics terminal strip X10 / X12 / X13. Minimum clearance and mounting position • Leave 100 mm (3.94 in) clearance at the top and bottom of the housing for optimum cooling. There is no need for clearance at the sides. You can line up the units directly next to one another. It is important that air circulation is not impeded by cables and other installation material. Prevent the heated exhaust air from other units from blowing onto this unit. Install the units vertically only.You must not install them horizontally, tilted or upside down. • Proper heat dissipation of the rear side of the heat sink improves the thermal utilization of the unit. 100 mm (3.94 in) 100 mm (3.94 in) 8.1.4 Separate cable ducts • 158 Route power leads and electronics leads in separate cable ducts. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Installation Installation notes 8.1.5 8.1.6 8.1.7 8.1.8 8 EMC-compliant installation • All cables except for the supply system lead must be shielded. For the motor cable, you can use the HD.. option (output choke) instead of the shielding to meet the interference emission limit values. • When using shielded motor cables, e.g. prefabricated motor cables from SEWEURODRIVE, you must keep the unshielded conductors between the shield and connection terminal of the inverter as short as possible. • Apply the shield by the shortest possible route and make sure it is grounded over a wide area at both ends. If using double-shielded cables, ground the outer shield on the inverter end and the inner shield at the other end. • You can also use earthed sheet-metal ducts or metal pipes to shield the cables. Route the power and control cables separately. • Provide high frequency compatible grounding for the inverter and all additional units (wide area metal-on-metal contact between the unit housing and ground, e.g. unpainted control cabinet mounting panel). • SEW recommends using earth-leakage monitors with a pulse code measuring process in voltage supply systems with a non-earthed star point (IT systems). Use of such devices prevents the earth-leakage monitor mis-tripping due to the earth capacitance of the inverter. • For size 0, SEW recommends deactivating the interference suppressor filter using the enclosed insulation discs (see Deactivating EMC capacitors (size 0 only) (see page 174)). • Only use contactors in utilization category AC-3 (EN 60947-4-1). IT systems Contactor Cross sections • Supply system lead: Cross section according to rated input current Imains at rated load. Motor lead: Cross section according to rated output current IN Electronics cables: Maximum 1.5 mm2 (AWG16) without conductor end sleeves1) Maximum 1.0 mm2 (AWG17) with conductor end sleeves 1) Fine wired cables may not be installed without conductor end sleeves. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 159 Installation Installation notes 8 8.1.9 Cable lengths for individual drives • The cable lengths depend on the PWM frequency. The permitted motor cable lengths are listed in the "Project Planning" section of the MOVITRAC® B system manual. • Only connect an ohmic/inductive load (motor), do not connect a capacitive load! 8.1.10 Unit output 8.1.11 Braking resistor connection 160 • Cut the lines to the required length. • Use 2 tightly twisted leads or a 2-core shielded power cable. Cross-section according to the rated output current of the inverter. • Protect the braking resistor with a bimetallic relay with trip class 10 or 10A (wiring diagram). Set the trip current according to the technical data of the braking resistor. • For BW..-T braking resistors, you can connect the integrated thermostat using a 2-core, shielded cable as an alternative to a bimetallic relay. • Flat-type braking resistors have internal thermal overload protection (fuse which cannot be replaced). Install the flat-type braking resistors together with the appropriate touch guard. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Installation Installation notes 8 8.1.12 Installing the braking resistor • The supply cables to the braking resistors carry a high voltage (approx. DC 900 V) during rated operation. • The surfaces of the braking resistors get very hot when the braking resistors are loaded with Prated. Choose a suitable installation location. Braking resistors are usually mounted on the control cabinet roof. 8.1.13 Binary outputs • The binary outputs are short-circuit proof and protected against external voltage to 30 V. Higher external voltages can destroy the binary outputs. 8.1.14 Interference emission • Use shielded motor cables or HD output chokes for EMC compliant installation. 8.1.15 Switched inductances NOTE The minimum distance of switched inductances to the inverter must be at least 150 mm (5.91 in). • Use suppressors to suppress interference on – contactors – relays – solenoid valves Suppressors are, for example, diodes, varistors, or RC elements: Do not connect any suppressors directly on MOVITRAC® B. Connect suppressors as closely as possible to the inductance. 8.1.16 Line filters MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters have an integrated line filter as standard. They comply with the following limit value class to EN 55011 on the line side without further measures: • Single-phase connection: C1 cable conducted • Three-phase connection: C2 No EMC limits are specified for interference emission in voltage suply systems without an earthed star point (IT system). The efficiency of line filters is severely limited. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 161 8 Installation Installation notes 8.1.17 Line protection and earth-leakage circuit breaker • Install the fuses at the beginning of the mains cable behind the supply bus junction (→ Basic unit wiring diagram). • SEW-EURODRIVE recommends that you do not use earth-leakage circuit breakers. However, if an earth-leakage circuit breaker is stipulated for direct or indirect protection against contact, observe the following note in accordance with EN 61800-5-1: WARNING! Wrong type of earth-leakage circuit breaker installed. Severe or fatal injuries. MOVITRAC® can cause direct current in the protective earth. In cases where an earthleakage circuit breaker is used for protection against direct or indirect contact, only install a type B earth-leakage circuit breaker on the power supply end of the MOVITRAC unit. 8.1.18 PE mains connection (→ EN 61800-5-1) Earth-leakage currents ≥ 3.5 mA may occur during normal operation. To meet the requirements of EN 61800-5-1 observe the following: • Supply system lead < 10 mm2 (AWG7): – Route a second PE conductor with the same cross section as the supply system lead in parallel to the protective earth via separate terminals, or – use a copper protective earth conductor with a cross section of 10 mm2 (AWG7) • Supply system cable 10 mm2 ... 16 mm2 (AWG7 ... AWG5): – Copper protective earth conductor with the cross section of the supply system lead. • Supply system cable 16 mm2 ... 35 mm2 (AWG5 ... AWG2): – Copper protective earth conductor with a cross section of 16 mm2 (AWG5) • Supply system lead > 35 mm2 (AWG2): – Copper protective earth conductor with half the cross section of the supply system lead. 162 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Installation Installing the optional power components 8.2 8 Installing the optional power components When more than five 3-phase units or more than one 1-phase unit are connected to a supply system contactor designed for the total current: Connect a line choke for limiting the inrush current. 8.2.1 ND line choke ND ... series line choke connection B 8.2.2 NF line filter The NF.. line filter can be used to maintain the limit value class C1/B for MOVITRAC® B units sizes 0 to 4. • STOP! Possible damage to property Do not switch between the line filter and MOVITRAC®. • Consequences if disregarded: Damage to the input level. • Install the line filter close to the inverter but outside the minimum clearance for cooling. • Restrict the cable between the line filter and the inverter to the absolute minimum length required, and never more than 400 mm (15.7 in). Unshielded, twisted cables are sufficient. Also use unshielded cables as the supply system lead. Connecting NF...-... line filters B System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 163 Installation Installing the optional power components 8 8.2.3 ULF11A foldable ferrites Place the supply system cable (L and N) in the foldable ferrite and press the foldable ferrites together until they snap in place. Compliance with EMC limit class C1 has been tested on a specified test setup. Compliance with class C1 for signal interference is achieved by the proper installation of the foldable ferrites ULF11A. 8.2.4 HF output filter NOTE • Install output filters next to the corresponding inverter. Leave a ventilation space of at least 100 mm (3.94 in) below and above the output filter. No clearance is required on the sides. • Limit the connection cable between inverter and output filter to the absolutely necessary length. Maximum 1 m/3 ft with unshielded cable, 10 m/33 ft with shielded cable. • Several motors can be connected to one output filter when operating a motor group from one inverter. The total value of the rated motor currents must not exceed the rated throughput current of the output filter. • Two identical output filters can be connected in parallel to one inverter output to double the rated throughput current. To do this, connect all like connections to the output filters in parallel. • Output filter connection V5 (with HF...-503) or 7 (with HF...-403) must not be connected when the inverter is operated with fPWM = 4 or 8 kHz. • No VDC link connection is permitted for size 0XS units. HF output filter connection without VDC link connection (PWM frequency only 4 or 8 kHz) B X1 X2/3 +R HF output filter connection without VDC link connection (PWM frequency only 12 or 16 kHz) B X1 X2/3 +R 164 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Installation Installing the optional power components 8.2.5 8 HD output choke • Install the output choke close to MOVITRAC® B outside the minimum clearance. • Always route all three phases (not PE) together through the output choke. • If the cable is shielded, do not route the shield through the output choke. 4 U 5 V n=5 • 6 W PE When using the HD output choke, the cable must be wrapped around the choke 5 times. Only 5 loops are possible if the cable has a large diameter. To make up for this, 2 or 3 output chokes should be connected in series. SEW recommends connecting in series 2 output chokes in case of 4 windings and 3 output chokes in case of 3 windings. Installing HD012 output choke: Install output choke under the corresponding inverter. Leave a ventilation space of at least 100 mm (3.94 in) below and above the output choke. Provide a clearance of 10 mm (0.39 in) on each side. Three alternative connection options are provided for connecting the protective earth. You can connect the PE line of the motor cable directly on the frequency inverter. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 165 Installation Installing the optional power components 8 8.2.6 FKE12B / FKE13B EMC-modules Use the supplied screws to mount the EMC module together with the MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter onto the conductive mounting surface in the control cabinet. The connections U / V / W are labeled U / V / W and have to be connected accordingly. The connections L1 / L2 / L3 (brown / orange / white) can be connected in any order. L1 L2 L3 PE L1 L2 L3 MOVITRAC® B FKE PE U V W U V W M 3 8.2.7 ~ PTC braking resistors BW1 / BW3 with FKB10B BW1 and BW3 PTC braking resistors can be mounted to the shield plate underneath the inverter using the angle bracket FDB10B, part number 18216218 available as option. 166 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Installation UL compliant installation 8.2.8 8 Flat-design resistors with FKB11/12/13B and FHS11/12/13B Flat-design resistors can be mounted between inverter and control cabinet with FKB11/ 12/13B or FHS11/12/13B. FKB11/12/13B 8.3 FHS11/12/13B UL compliant installation Please note the following points for UL compliant installation: • Use only copper cables with the following temperature ranges as connection cables: – MOVITRAC® B 0003 ... 0300: temperature range 60/75 °C (140/167 °F) – MOVITRAC® B 0370 and 0450: temperature range 75 °C (167 °F) • Necessary tightening torques of MOVITRAC® B power terminals: See installation notes. • Operate the inverters on supply systems with a maximum phase-to-earth voltage of AC 300 V only. • The inverter can only be operated on IT systems if the phase-to-earth voltage of AC 300 V cannot be exceeded either during operation or in case of an error. • MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters are only allowed to be operated on supply systems which can supply maximum values in accordance with the following table. Only use melting fuses. The performance data of the fuses must not exceed the values in the following table. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 167 Installation UL compliant installation 8 8.3.1 Maximum values/fuses The following maximum values/fuses must be observed for UL compliant installation: 230 V units / 1-phase Max. mains current Max. mains voltage Fuses 0003 / 0004 / 0005 / 0008 AC 5000 A AC 240 V 15 A / 250 V 0011 / 0015 / 0022 AC 5000 A AC 240 V 30 A / 250 V 230 V units / 3-phase Max. mains current Max. mains voltage Fuses 0003 / 0004 / 0005 / 0008 AC 5000 A AC 240 V 15 A / 250 V 0011 / 0015 / 0022 AC 5000 A AC 240 V 20 A / 250 V 0037 AC 5000 A AC 240 V 30 A / 250 V 0055 / 0075 AC 5000 A AC 240 V 110 A / 250 V 0110 AC 5000 A AC 240 V 175 A / 250 V 0150 AC 5000 A AC 240 V 225 A / 250 V 0220 / 0300 AC 10000 A AC 240 V 350 A / 250 V 400 / 500 V units Max. mains current Max. mains voltage Fuses 0003 / 0004 / 0005 / 0008 / 0011 / 0015 AC 5000 A AC 500 V 15 A / 600 V 0022 / 0030 / 0040 AC 5000 A AC 500 V 20 A / 600 V 0055 / 0075 AC 5000 A AC 500 V 60 A / 600 V 0110 AC 5000 A AC 500 V 110 A / 600 V 0150 / 0220 AC 5000 A AC 500 V 175 A / 600 V 0300 AC 5000 A AC 500 V 225 A / 600 V 0370 / 0450 AC 10000 A AC 500 V 350 A / 600 V 0550 / 0750 AC 10000 A AC 500 V 500 A / 600 V NOTES • • 168 Only use tested units with a limited output voltage (Vmax = DC 30 V) and limited output current (I ≤ 8 A) as an external DC 24 V voltage source. UL certification does not apply to operation in voltage supply systems with a non-grounded star point (IT systems). System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Installation Scope of delivery and installation of loose items 8.4 Scope of delivery and installation of loose items 8.4.1 Scope of delivery of loose items 8 The scope of delivery includes a bag for loose items. Its contents depends on the inverter size. Scope of delivery of loose items for size 0XS / 0S / 0L 1 2S • • Shield plate for control electronics with clamps and screws [1] 3 connectors for electronics terminals [2] • Grounding terminals with screws [4] • Shield plate for the power section with clamps and screws [3] Connector for mains (2 or 3-pole) and motor [5] Plastic insulations with stickers [6] • • • Shield plate for the power section without screws • Fixing straps • • 2 Touch guard Shield plate for the power section with screws – 3 4/5 – – – – – • Touch guard Loose items for size 0: X1 [4] [5] X2 X10 [2] X12 X13 [1] M4u20 2 u M4u20 7 u M4u10 [6] EMV-Kondensatoren deaktiviert. EMC Capacitors deactivated. Condensateurs CEM désactivés. 8196737.LBL System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B [3] 169 Installation Scope of delivery and installation of loose items 8 8.4.2 Installing shield plate for control electronics (all sizes) MOVITRAC® B includes a shield plate for the control electronics with a retaining screw as standard. Install the shield plate for control electronics as follows: 1. Loosen the screw first [1]. 2. Push the shield clamp through the slot in the plastic housing. 3. Fasten the shield clamp. [1] 8.4.3 Size 0 Installing shield plate for power section A power shield plate for the power section with 2 retaining screws is supplied as standard with MOVITRAC® size 0. Mount the shield plate for the power section using the two retaining screws. [1] [2] [1] PE connection 170 [2] Shield plate System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Installation Scope of delivery and installation of loose items Size 1 8 SEW-EURODRIVE supplies a shield plate for the power section as standard with MOVITRAC® B size 1. Mount the shield plate for the power section using the unit's two retaining screws. [1] [2] [1] Shield clamp Sizes 2S / 2 [2] PE connection SEW-EURODRIVE supplies a shield plate for the power section with two retaining screws as standard with MOVITRAC® B sizes 2S / 2. Mount the shield plate for the power section using the two retaining screws. The illustration shows size 2. [1] Shield clamp [2] PE connection The shield plate for the power section provides you with a very convenient way of installing the shield for the motor and brake cables. Apply the shield and PE conductor as shown in the figures. Sizes 3 ... 5 With MOVITRAC® B sizes 3 ... 5, no shield plates are supplied for the power section. Use commercially available shield clamps for installing the shielding of motor and brake cables. Apply the shield as closely as possible to the inverter. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 171 Installation Scope of delivery and installation of loose items 8 8.4.4 Installing the touch guard HAZARD! Uncovered power connections. Severe or fatal injuries from electric shock. • • Size 2S Install the touch guard according to the regulations. Never start the unit if the touch guard is not installed. SEW-EURODRIVE supplies two touch guards for the DC link and braking resistor terminals as standard with MOVITRAC® B size 2S. Without touch guard, MOVITRAC® B size 2S has degree of protection IP10. When the touch guard is installed, the unit has degree of protection IP20. IP10 X4 -UZ +UZ PE IP20 X4 -UZ +UZ PE IP10 X3 8/+R 9/-R PE IP20 X3 8/+R 9/-R PE 172 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Installation Scope of delivery and installation of loose items Sizes 4 / 5 8 Two touch guards with 8 retaining screws are supplied as standard with MOVITRAC® sizes 4 / 5. Install the touch guard on both covers of the power section terminals. Touch guard for MOVITRAC® B sizes 4 / 5: [2] [1] [3] The touch guard comprises the following parts: [1] Cover plate [2] Connection plate [3] Screen (only for size 4) The MOVITRAC® B unit sizes 4 / 5 can only achieve degree of protection IP10 when the following conditions are met: • Touch guard is fully installed • The shrink tubing is installed on all power terminals (X1, X2, X3, X4) NOTE If the above conditions are not met, MOVITRAC® units sizes 4 and 5 have degree of protection IP00. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 173 Installation Installing cold plate 8 8.5 Installing cold plate The dissipation of the frequency inverter power loss can take place via coolers that work with different cooling media (air, water, oil, etc.). This can be useful, for example, in restricted installation spaces. When adhering to the usual installation notes (40 °C (104 °F) / 100 mm (3.94 in) space above and below), cold-plate technology is not necessary. A good thermal connection to the cooler is important for safe operation of frequency inverters: 8.6 • The contact area between cooler and frequency inverter has to be the size of the frequency inverter cooling plate. • Level contact surface, deviation max. up to 0.05 mm (0.0002 in). • Connect cooler and cooling plate with all necessary screw connections. • The mounting plate must not exceed 70 °C (158 °F) during operation. This must be ensured by the cooling medium. • Cold plate installation is not possible with FHS or FKB. Deactivating EMC capacitors (size 0 only) Only electricians are allowed to convert the unit. Once converted, the unit must be marked with the sticker provided in the accessory bag. HAZARD! Severe or fatal injuries from electric shock. • • • • • Disconnect the inverter from the power. Switch off the DC 24 V and the line voltage. Wait 10 seconds. Ensure that the unit is de-energized. Take appropriate measures to avoid electrostatic charges (use discharge strap, conductive shoes, etc.) before removing the cover. Touch only the unit frame and heat sink. Do not touch any electronic components. Proceed as follows to deactivate the EMC capacitors for MOVITRAC® B: 1. Open the unit: – Remove all connectors. – Remove the electronics shield clamp. – Remove the housing retaining screw in the center of the housing front. – Remove the housing. 174 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Installation Deactivating EMC capacitors (size 0 only) 8 2. Remove the two screws [A] securing the circuit board. 3. Install the screws in the plastic insulations provided [B]. 4. Fasten screws to the unit [C]. 5. Close the unit. 6. Attach the sticker provided to the unit. [A] [A] [B] [C] [C] Deactivating the EMC capacitors stops earth-leakage currents from flowing over the EMC capacitors. • Please ensure that the earth-leakage currents are essentially only determined by the level of the DC link voltage, the PWM frequency, the applied motor cable and its length and the motor used. When the suppression capacitors are deactivated, the EMC filter is no longer active. NOTE IT systems • No EMC limits are specified for interference emission in voltage supply systems without a grounded star point (IT systems). System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 175 Installation Wiring diagram 8 8.7 Wiring diagram 3 x AC 400/500 V / PE 3 x AC 230 V / PE 1 x AC 230 V / N / PE [1] –UZ +UZ PE 7 8 PE X4 Changeover REF1 ® MOVITRAC B S1 0 ... 10 V* 0 ... 20 mA; 4 ... 20 mA Reference potential analog signals Higher-level control S2 ON ON OFF OFF Binary input Fault reset CW/stop CCW stop Enable/stop* FSC11B n13 = n11 + n12 X46 HL ⊥ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X17 "Safe stop" only with 400 V 5.5 ... 75 kW and 0.55 ... 4.0 kW MC07B...-S0 Supply voltage for +24V input/output (can be disabled) Reference potential binary signals X17: Reference binary outputs 24VIO Reference potential Brake released* Ready Reference potential Relay contact/fault NOC relay NCC relay 1 DGND 2 VO24 3 SOV24 4 SVI24 X45 Binary outputs } X44 PE PE X2 X3 [1] [1] → Section "Connecting braking resistor BW.. / BW..-T / BW..-P" → Section "Connecting the brake rectifier" 3-phase Factory setting [1] In sizes 1, 2S, and 2, there is no PE connection next to the power supply connection terminals and motor connection terminals [X1]/[X2]. In this case, use the PE terminal next to the DC link connection [X4]. From size 3 onwards, there are two additional PE terminals. 176 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Installation TF thermistor and TH bimetallic switch 8.8 8 TF thermistor and TH bimetallic switch The winding temperature is monitored using TF thermistors or TH bimetallic switches. The connection is made at the TF output VOTF and the TF input DI05TF of MOVITRAC®. The binary input DI05TF must be set to TF signal. The temperature will then be monitored by MOVITRAC®; no additional monitoring unit is required. A connection can also be made to 24VIO and a binary output when using TH bimetallic switches. Set the binary input to /External fault. 8.9 Connecting braking resistors BW.. / BW..-T / BW..-P to X3 / X2 X2/X3: +R -R PE X2/X3: X2/X3: +R -R PE +R -R PE 8 8 9 9 F16 → K11 BW...-...-P BW...-...-T 95 97 F16 → K11 96 98 4 T2 RB1 → K11 T1 6 BW... RB2 A terminal must be set to "/Controller inhibit". K11 must be opened and "/Controller inhibit" must receive a "0" signal in the following cases: • BW...-...-P: The auxiliary contact trips • BW...-...-T: The internal temperature switch trips • BW...: The external bimetallic relay F16 trips The resistor circuit must not be interrupted. Overload protection for braking resistors BW: Overload protection Braking resistor type Design specified Internal temperature switch (..T) External bimetallic relay (F16) BW... – – Required BW...-...-T – One of the two options (internal temperature switch / external bimetallic relay) is required. BW...-003 / BW...-005 Adequate – 1) Permitted 1) Permitted installation: On horizontal or vertical surfaces with brackets at the bottom and perforated sheets at top and bottom. Not permitted: On vertical surfaces with brackets at the top, right or left. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 177 Installation Connecting the brake rectifier 8 8.10 Connecting the brake rectifier NOTE The connection of the brake rectifier requires a separate supply system cable; supply from the motor voltage is not permitted! Use contactors of utilization category AC-3 for K11 and K12 only. Always switch off the brake on the DC and AC sides in: • All hoist applications. • Drives which require a rapid brake response time. If the brake rectifier is installed in the control cabinet, route the connecting leads between the brake rectifier and the brake separately from other power cables. Routing together with other cables is only permitted if the other cables are shielded. Wiring diagrams DOØ2 GND Cut-off in the AC and DC circuits Cut-off in the AC and DC circuits Cut-off in the AC circuit Note the corresponding connection regulations for brakes without BG/BGE or BME. Refer to the SEW publication "Drive Engineering - Practical Implementation: SEW Disc Brakes" for more information. 178 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Installation Installing FSC11B / FIO11B 8.11 8 Installing FSC11B / FIO11B You can enhance the basic units with the FSC11B and FIO11B modules. S1 S2 ON X44 OFF X44 FSC11B FIO11B X46 X45 X40 X45 HL A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 HL A 1 2 3 4 5 Connection/unit FIO11B FSC11B RS-485 service interface X44 Yes Yes RS-485 terminal connection X45 Yes Yes SBus connection X46 No Yes Analog input/output X40 Yes No 8.11.1 Mounting and installation on FSC11B/FIO11B Always attach the option to the unit with the screw that is included. For size 0, mount the spacer bolt first. The bolt is already installed in sizes 1 and higher. Fitting the screw secures the high-frequency EMC connection between the basic unit and the option. Function Terminal Description Data FSC11B FIO11B Service interface X44 Via RJ10 plug connector Only for service purposes Maximum cable length 3 m (10 ft) Yes Yes RS-485 interface X45:H ST11: RS-485+ Yes Yes X45:L ST12: RS-485– X45:⊥ GND: Reference potential X46:1 SC11: SBus high Yes No X46:2 SC12: SBus low X46:3 GND: Reference potential Yes No No Yes System bus X46:4 SC21: SBus high X46:5 SC22: SBus low X46:6 GND: Reference potential DC 24 V X46:7 24VIO: Auxiliary voltage / external voltage supply Analog input X40:1 AI2: Voltage input X40:2 GND: Reference potential System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B CAN bus to CAN specification 2.0, parts A and B Max. 64 stations Terminating resistor 120 can be activated via DIP switch –10 ... +10 V Ri > 40 k Resolution 10 bit Sampling time 5 ms 179 8 Installation Installing FSC11B / FIO11B Function Terminal Description Data FSC11B FIO11B Analog output X40:3 GND: Reference potential No Yes X40:4 AOV1: Voltage output X40:5 AOI1: Current output 0 ... +10 V Imax = 2 mA 0 (4) ... 20 mA Resolution 10 bit Sampling time 5 ms Short-circuit proof, protected against external voltage up to 30 V The DC 24 V function of X46:7 is identical to X12:8 of the basic unit. All GND terminals of the unit are connected to each other and to PE. Cable specification • Use a 4-core twisted and shielded copper cable (data transmission cable with braided copper shield). The cable must meet the following specifications: – Core cross section 0.25 ... 0.75 mm2 (AWG 23 ... AWG 18) – Cable resistance 120 at 1 MHz – Capacitance per unit length ≤ 40 pF/m at 1 kHz Suitable cables include CAN bus or DeviceNet cables. Connecting the shield • • • Connect the shield to the electronics shield clamp on the inverter or master controller and make sure it is connected over a wide area at both ends. There is no need for a ground connections between MOVITRAC® B and gateways, or MOVITRAC® B and MOVITRAC® B with shielded cables. A 2-core cable is permitted in this case. When connecting MOVIDRIVE® B and MOVITRAC® B, be aware that the electrical isolation is eliminated between the reference potential DGND and ground in MOVIDRIVE® B. STOP! Potential displacement Possible consequences include malfunctions that could lead to irreparable damage to the unit. • 180 There must not be any potential displacement between the connected units. Take appropriate measures to avoid potential displacement, such as connecting the unit ground connectors using a separate cable. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Installation Installing FSC11B / FIO11B 8 8.11.2 Installing the system bus (SBus) to FSC11B Max. 64 CAN bus nodes can be addressed via the system bus (SBus). The SBus supports transmission technology compliant with ISO 11898. S1 S2 SC11/SC12 SC21/SC22 Off Off CAN1 CAN1 On Off CAN1 concluded – X On MOVITRAC® MOVITRAC® B Reserved B system bus connection MOVITRAC® B MOVIDRIVE® B S12 S1 S2 ON ON OFF X44 FSC11B X46 HL ⊥ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ON OFF S2 OFF X44 X45 S1 X12: DGND 1 SC11 2 FSC11B X45 SC12 3 X46 HL ⊥ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 System bus connection MOVITRAC®B with UFx ® MOVITRAC B UFx S1 S2 ON X44 OFF FSC11B X45 X46 HL ⊥ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 181 Installation Installing FSC11B / FIO11B 8 System bus connection MOVITRAC® B with DFx/UOH11B gateways or DFx integrated in MOVITRAC® B UOH11B DFP21B RUN BUS FAULT 9 5 6 1 X30 20 21 22 23 0 1 24 25 26 AS ADDRESS ® MOVITRAC B S1 S2 ON H1 H2 X44 OFF X24 FSC11B X45 X26 X46 HL ⊥ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1234567 + 24 V GND Line length • The permitted total cable length depends on the baud rate setting of the SBus (P884): – 125 kBaud: 320 m (1050 ft) – 250 kBaud: 160 m (525 ft) – 500 kBaud: 80 m (260 ft) – 1000 kBaud: 40 m (130 ft) • You must use shielded cables. NOTE Terminating resistor: Switch on the system bus terminating resistor (S1 = ON) at the start and end of the system bus connection. Switch off the terminating resistor on the units in between (S1 = OFF). Certain units have a permanently integrated terminating resistor that cannot be switched off. This is the case for UFx and DFx/UOH. These gateways form the end of the physical line. Do not connect any external terminating resistors. 182 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Installation Installing FSC11B / FIO11B 8 8.11.3 Installing RS-485 interface to FSC11B The RS-485 interface can be used for connecting max. 32 MOVITRAC® units or 31 MOVITRAC® units and a higher-level controller (PLC). MOVITRAC® B RS-485 connection MOVITRAC® B MOVITRAC® B X44 • • DGND 9 ST11 10 FSC11B / FIO11B X46 X45 HL ⊥ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Cable length X13 X44 FSC11B / FIO11B X45 MOVIDRIVE® B ST12 11 X46 HL ⊥ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The permitted total cable length is 200 m. You must use shielded cables. NOTE Terminating resistor: Dynamic terminating resistors are installed. Do not connect any external terminating resistors. 8.11.4 Wiring analog module FIO11B Bipolar analog input Unipolar AI2 input AI2 RS-485+ RS-485– GND AI2 GND GND AOV1 AOC1 X45 X40 RS-485+ RS-485– GND AI2 GND GND AOV1 AOC1 X45 X40 RS-485+ RS-485– GND AI2 GND GND AOV1 AOC1 X45 X40 RS-485+ RS-485– GND AI2 GND GND AOV1 AOC1 X45 X40 analog Current analog out- Voltage analog output AOC1 put AOV1 HL A 1 2 3 4 5 HL A 1 2 3 4 5 HL A 1 2 3 4 5 HL A 1 2 3 4 5 GND –10 V external System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B +10 V external A +10 V external or X10:1 GND RL V RL ≤ 750 Ω 183 Installation Installing MBG11A speed control module 8 8.12 Installing MBG11A speed control module • Mounting A from the rear using 4 tapped holes. • Mounting B from the front using 2 retaining holes A B B M4 28 (1.1) B 60 (2.4) 88 (3.5) A A A A 56 (2.2) 68 (2.7) 8.12.1 Connection ® MOVITRAC B S1 S2 ON OFF X44 FSC11B X45 X46 HL ⊥ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 184 MBG11A 1234 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B I Startup Brief description of the startup process 9 0 9 Startup 9.1 Brief description of the startup process The MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter can be connected directly to a motor of the same power. For example: A 1.5 kW (2.0 HP) motor can be connected directly to a MC07B0015. Procedure 1. Connect the motor to MOVITRAC® B (terminal X2). 1-phase 3-phase PE 2. You have the option of connecting a braking resistor (terminal X2/X3). 3. The following signal terminals must be controlled with your control system: • Enable DI∅3 • As required CW/Stop DI∅1 or CCW/ Stop DI∅2 • • Changeover REF1 Reference potential analog signals Setpoint: • Analog input X10 and/or • DI∅4 = n11 = 150 rpm or/and • DI∅5 = n12 = 750 rpm or/and • DI∅4 + DI∅5 = n13 = 1500 rpm Fault reset CW/stop CCW/stop Enable/stop* n13 = n11 + n12 Supply voltage input/output Reference potential binary signals Reference potential Brake released* Ready Reference potential 4. You have the option of connecting the following signal terminals: DI∅∅ = Fault reset • DO∅1 = /Fault (designed as relay contact) Relay contact/fault NOC relay NCC relay • X2 X3 PE DO∅3 = Ready 5. Check the controller for the required functionality. 6. Connect the frequency inverter to the mains (X1). 9.1.2 24VIO For brakemotors: DO∅2 = Brake control using brake rectifiers • GND } 9.1.1 Shield clamp Factory setting 3-phase Notes Signal terminal functions and setpoint settings can be modified using the FBG11B keypad or a PC. A PC connection requires the FSC11B front option or one of the following interface adapters: UWS21B / UWS11A / USB11A. NOTE The MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter must only be operated in strict observance of the detailed operating instructions. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 185 I 9 Startup General startup instructions 0 9.2 General startup instructions HAZARD! Uncovered power connections. Severe or fatal injuries from electric shock. • • 9.2.1 Install the touch guard according to the regulations. Never start the unit if the touch guard is not installed. Prerequisite The drive must be configured correctly to ensure that startup is successful. MOVITRAC® B frequency inverters are factory set to be taken into operation with the SEW motor adapted to the correct power level (4-pole, 50 Hz) in V/f control mode. 9.2.2 Hoist applications HAZARD! Risk of fatal injury if the hoist falls. Severe or fatal injuries. MOVITRAC® B may not be used as a safety device in hoist applications. • 186 Use monitoring systems or mechanical protection devices to ensure safety. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Startup Preliminary work and resources I 9 0 9.3 Preliminary work and resources • Check the installation. HAZARD! Risk of crushing if the motor starts up unintentionally. Severe or fatal injuries. • • 9.3.1 9.3.2 Ensure that the motor cannot start inadvertently, for example, by removing the electronics terminal block X13. Additional safety precautions must be taken depending on the application, such as monitoring systems or mechanical protection devices, to avoid injury to people and damage to machinery. Preliminary work and resources on the MOVITRAC® B basic unit • Connect the supply system and the motor. • Connect the signal terminals. • Switch on the power supply system. Preliminary work and resources on MOVITRAC® B with keypad • Connect the supply system and the motor. Do not connect signal terminals! • Switch on the power supply system. • The display shows Stop. • Program the signal terminals. • Set the parameters correctly (e.g. ramps). • Check the set terminal assignment ( P601 ... P622). • Switch off the power supply system. • Connect the signal terminals. • Switch on the power supply system. NOTE The inverter automatically changes parameter values once you perform a startup. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 187 I 9 Startup Optional keypad FBG11B 0 9.4 Optional keypad FBG11B Key arrangement and symbols on keypad: 9.4.1 Keypad functions The UP/DOWN and ENTER/OUT buttons are used for navigating through the mmodule is used for setpoint specification. Use UP/DOWN to select symbols and change values. out Enter ENTER/OUT to activate and deactivate the symbols or parameter menus Press "RUN" to start the drive. RUN STOP "STOP/RESET" is used for resetting errors and for stopping the drive. RESET STOP RESET The STOP/RESET button has priority over a terminal enable or an enable via the interface. If you stop a drive using the STOP/RESET key, you have to enable it again by pressing the RUN key. NOTE After switching off the power supply, press the STOP key to revoke the lock. The STOP/RESET key can be used for performing a reset after a fault has occurred with a programmed error response. The drive is then inhibited and must be enabled using the RUN key. You can deactivate the STOP function with parameter 760 using FBG11B. RUN If you stop the drive with the STOP/RESET key, the display Stop is flashing. This signal indicates you have to enable the drive using the "RUN" key. After copying the parameter set in MOVITRAC® B, the unit is also stopped. 188 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B I Startup Basic operation of the FBG11B keypad 9 0 9.5 Basic operation of the FBG11B keypad Level 1 Level 2 Display inverter status speed Display ramp up out Enter Modify ramp up [s] Enter Modify/accept value Display ramp down out Enter Modify ramp down [s] Enter Modify/accept value Fixed setpoint menu Edit mode nxx Selection fixed setpoint menu out Enter out Enter Enter nmax Display maximum setpoint out Enter Par Select parameter menu out Enter Modify maximum speed [rpm] Enter Modify/accept value Edit mode Parameter menu out Enter Enter Select motor startup out Enter Select data backup out Enter Select FBG speed ctr. module out Enter Modify/accept value Modify/accept value Motor statup menu Data backup menu FBG speed control module Display initial frequency Display output current System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 189 I 9 Startup Basic operation of the FBG11B keypad 0 9.5.1 Menu system The LED integrated in the symbol lights up when you select a symbol. If a symbol only represents display values, the current display value appears immediately on the display. 9.5.2 Changing parameters You can select the required parameter by selecting a symbol and pressing the ENTER key. Press the ENTER key again to edit the parameter value. You can alter the value when the LED in the corresponding symbol flashes. When pressing the ENTER key again, the value becomes active and the LED does not flash any longer. 9.5.3 Status display If the status is "Drive enabled", the display will show the calculated actual speed. 9.5.4 Fault display In the event of a fault, the display changes and the fault code flashes in the display, for example F-11 (refer to the fault list in the "Operation and Service" section). This situation will not occur during active startup. 9.5.5 Warnings You may not alter any parameter in any operating mode. If you try to do so, the display r-19 ... r-32 will appear. The display shows a code depending on the action, e.g. r-28 (controller inhibit required). You find a list of warnings in the Operation and Service section. 9.5.6 Parameter menu change short ↔ long Using parameter P800, you can switch back and forth between short menu and long menu. The parameter description and parameter list indicates which parameters are accessible via short and long menu. 190 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Startup Manual operation with FBG11B speed control module I 9 0 9.6 Manual operation with FBG11B speed control module FBG11B speed control module of the keypad (local manual operation): LED flashes The only relevant parameters in "FBG speed control module" operating mode are: • P122 Direction of rotation FBG manual operation • "RUN" and "STOP/RESET" keys • Speed control module When the FBG speed control module is activated, the symbol flashes. You limit the smallest speed with P301 Minimum speed and the largest speed with the nmax symbol. After a fault, a reset can be performed using the "STOP/RESET" button via the terminal or the interface. After a reset, the "manual speed control module" operating mode will be active once again. The drive remains stopped. The Stop display flashes to indicate that you have to re-enable the drive by pressing "RUN." The parameter P760 Locking RUN/STOP keys does not have any effect in "manual speed control module" operating mode. Removing the FBG11B keypad will trigger a stop response. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 191 I 9 Startup External setpoint selection 0 9.7 External setpoint selection External setpoint selection Control via – Terminals – Serial interface – Setpoint potentiometer connected to AI11/AI12 9.7.1 Set direction of rotation You can specify the set direction of rotation: 9.7.2 • "CW/Stop and "CCW/Stop" in P101 control signal source = terminals or P101 control signal source = 3 wire-control • The polarity of the setpoint in the process data word in P101 Control signal source = RS485 or SBus and P100 Setpoint source = RS485 or SBus Setpoint speed You can specify the set speed: • Speed control module if P121 Addition FBG speed control module is set to ON • P100 Setpoint source – Fixed setpoints – Fixed setpoints with analog input – Process data word from SBus or RS-485 – Motor potentiometer 9.7.3 Direction of rotation enable with RS-485 or SBus Unipolar setpoint sources: Unipolar/fixed setpoint Motor potentiometer/fixed setpoint Fixed setpoint + AI1 Fixed setpoint* + AI1 Frequency setpoint input/fixed setpoint The direction of rotation is set with the CW or CCW terminals. Bipolar setpoint sources: Bipolar/fixed setpoint RS-485/fixed setpoint SBus 1/fixed setpoint The direction of rotation is determined by the setpoint. Enable with terminal CW or CCW. 192 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Startup Startup using the FBG11B keypad I 9 0 9.8 Startup using the FBG11B keypad Level 2 Level 3 Motor selection: – SEW DT/DV motor Level1 – Non-SEW motor out Enter – SEW DRS motor (in preparation out Enter – SEW DRE motor (in preparation Choose operating mode: – V/f characteristic curve – V/f + DC braking – VFC out Enter – VFC DC braking – VFC flying start function – VFC hoist out Enter out Enter Power in [KW] HP = kW x 1.33 Motor voltage [V] out Enter Rated motor frequency [Hz] ( out Enter out Enter Rated motor speed [rpm] Rated motor current [A] out Enter out Enter only available for startup of non-SEW motors (Motor=non-SEW) cos phi ) 4Q operation out System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Enter Number of motors for multi-motor drives 193 I 9 Startup Startup using the FBG11B keypad 0 9.8.1 Required data The following data is required to ensure startup is successful: • Motor type (SEW or non-SEW motor) • Motor data – Rated voltage and rated frequency – Additionally for non-SEW motors: Rated current, rated power, rated factor cos Ï•, and rated speed. • 9.8.2 Rated mains voltage Activating startup Requirements: • Drive ”No enable”: Stop If a smaller or a larger motor is connected (maximum difference one size), then you have to choose the value closest to the rated motor power. The complete startup procedure is not complete until you have returned to the main menu level by pressing the OUT button. You can then perform the startup only with motor parameter set 1. NOTE! The SEW motor startup is designed for 4-pole motors. It may be useful to startup 2-pole or 6-pole SEW motors as non-SEW motors. 9.8.3 V/f The default setting for the operating mode is V/f. Use this operating mode if you have no particular requirements and for applications where a high maximum speed is required. 9.8.4 VFC Startup the inverter in VFC or VFC & DC brake operating mode for the following requirements: • High torque • Continuous duty at low frequencies • Accurate slip compensation • More dynamic behavior For this purpose, you will have to choose the VFC or VFC & DC brake operating modes from P-01 at startup. 194 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Startup Startup with DBG60B I 9 0 9.8.5 Startup of multi-motor drive Multi-motor drives are mechanically connected to each other (e.g. chain drive with several motors). Observe the notes in the publication "Multi-Motor Drives". Multi-motor drives are possible with installed identical SEW motors only. • 9.8.6 Set the multi parameter of the motor startup to the number of connected motors. Startup of group drives Group drives are mechanically decoupled from each other (e.g. different conveyor belts). In this operating mode, the inverter operates without slip compensation and with a constant V/f ratio. You can operate a group of asynchronous motors on one inverter in V/f characteristic curve operating mode. Important: • Select V/f operating mode • Set the power of the largest motor • Disable automatic adjustment P320/330 • Set boost P321/331 to zero • Set IxR compensation P322/332 to zero • Set slip compensation P324/334 to zero • Set current limitation P303/313 to 1.5 times the total current of all motors • Set Irated UL monitoring P345/346 to the total current of the connected motors. Implement motor protection individually. In this operating mode, the inverter operates without slip compensation and with a constant V/f ratio. NOTE! The parameter settings apply to all connected motors. 9.9 Startup with DBG60B 9.9.1 Required data The following data is required to ensure startup is successful: • Motor type (SEW or non-SEW motor) • Motor data – Rated voltage and rated frequency – Additionally for non-SEW motors: Rated current, rated power, rated factor cos Ï•, and rated speed. • Rated mains voltage System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 195 I 9 Startup Startup with DBG60B 0 9.9.2 Selecting a language The figure below shows the keys for selecting the language. [1] [2] [4] [1] [2] [3] [4] [3] ↑ key OK key ↓ key Language key Move up to the next menu item Confirm entry Move down to the next menu item A list of languages is displayed The following text appears on the display when the keypad is switched on for the first time or after activating the start mode: SEW EURODRIVE The symbol for language selection then appears on the display. Proceed as follows to select the language: 196 • Press the language key. A list of languages is displayed on the screen. • Choose the desired language using the ↑ / ↓ keys. • Confirm your language selection by pressing the OK key. The basic display is now shown in your chosen language. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Startup Startup with DBG60B I 9 0 9.9.3 Startup The figure below shows the keys required for startup. [1] [6] [2] [5] [3] [4] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] 9.9.4 ↑ key OK key Context key ↓ key ↔ key DEL key Move up to the next menu item Confirm entry Activate the context menu Move down to the next menu item Change the menu, display mode ↔ edit mode Cancel or abort startup Startup procedure 1. Enter "0" signal at terminal X12:2 (DIØ1 "/CW/STOP), e.g. by disconnecting X13 the electronics terminal block. 0.00rpm 0.000Amp CONTROLLER INHIBIT 2. Press the context key to activate the context menu. PARAMETER MODE VARIABLE MODE BASIC VIEW 3. Scroll down with the ↓ key until you have selected the menu option "STARTUP". System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B MANUAL MODE STARTUP COPY TO DBG COPY TO MDX 197 9 I Startup Startup with DBG60B 0 4. To startup, select the OK key. The first parameter appears. The flashing cursor under the parameter number indicates that the keypad is in display mode. • Use the ↔ key to switch to edit mode. The flashing cursor disappears. • Use the ↑ or ↓ key to select "PARAMETER SET 1" or "PARAMETER SET 2". • Press the OK key to confirm your selection. • Use the ↔ key to switch back to display mode. The flashing cursor appears again. • Use the ↑ key to choose the next parameter. STARTUP PREPARE FOR STARTUP C00*STARTUP PARAMETER SET 1 PARAMETER SET 2 5. Set the motor type. C22*MOTORS SINGLE MOTOR IDENT. MOTORS DIFFERENT MOTORS 6. Select the operating mode you require. Use the ↑ key to choose the next parameter. VFC operating mode is required for activating the flying start or hoist function. C01*OPER. MODE 1 STANDARD V/f VFC1 a. When selecting STANDARD V/f operating mode: C28*DC BRAKING NO YES b. When selecting VFC operating mode: C36*OPER.MODE SPEED CONTROL HOIST DC BRAKING FLYING START 7. Select the motor type. If a 2 or 4-pole SEW motor is connected, select the correct motor from the list. If a nonSEW motor or an SEW motor with more than four poles is connected, select "NON-SEW MOTOR" from the list. Use the ↑ key to choose the next parameter. C02*MOTOR TYPE 1 DT71D2 DT71D4 DT80K2 C02*MOTOR TYPE 1 NON-SEW MOTOR DT63K4/DR63S4 198 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B I Startup Startup with DBG60B 9 0 8. Enter the rated motor voltage for the selected connection type according to the value specified on the nameplate. C03* V RATED MOT. VOLT 1 +400.000 Example: Nameplate 230 / 400 50 Hz connection → enter "400 V". connection/transition point at 50 Hz → enter "230 V". connection, transition point at 87 Hz → Also enter 230 V. However, set parameter P302 "MAXIMUM SPEED 1" to the value for 87 Hz after startup first. Then start the drive. Example: Nameplate 400 / 690 50 Hz Only connection possible → enter "400 V". connection is not possible. Use the ↑ key to choose the next parameter. 9. Enter the rated frequency specified on the motor nameplate. Example: 230 / 400 50 Hz Enter "50 Hz" in and connection. C04* Hz RATED MOT. FREQ. 1 +50.000 Use the ↑ key to choose the next parameter. FOR SEW MOTORS 10. The motor values are stored for SEW 2 and 4-pole motors and need not be entered. C47*4-Q OPERATION NO YES FOR NON-SEW MOTORS 10. Enter the following motor nameplate data: • C10* Rated motor current, connection type or . • C11* rated motor power • C12* power factor cos Ï• • C13* rated motor speed C47*4-Q OPERATION NO YES 11. Enter the rated power supply voltage (C05* for SEW motor, C14* for non-SEW motor). C05* V RAT. MAINS VOLT. 1 +400.000 11. Start the calculation for the startup data by choosing "YES". The process lasts a few seconds. C06*CALCULATION NO YES FOR SEW MOTORS 12. The calculation is performed. After calculation, the next menu item appears automatically. C06*SAVE NO YES System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 199 9 I Startup Startup with DBG60B 0 FOR NON-SEW MOTORS 12. For non-SEW motors, a calibration process is required to perform the calculation: • When prompted, apply a "1" signal to terminal X12:2 (DIØ1 "/CW/STOP"). • Apply a "0" signal to terminal X12:2 again after the calibration is complete. • After calculation, the next menu item appears automatically. 13. Set "SAVE" to "YES" The data (motor parameters) are copied to the non-volatile memory of MOVITRAC®. DATA IS BEING COPIED... 14. The startup procedure is now complete. Use the DEL key to return to the context menu. MANUAL MODE STARTUP COPY TO DBG COPY TO MC07B 15. Use the ↓ key to scroll down until the menu item "EXIT" is selected. UNIT SETTINGS EXIT 16. Confirm your selection by pressing OK. The basic display appears. 0.00rpm 0.000Amp CONTROLLER INHIBIT HAZARD! Parameter settings incorrect due to unsuitable data sets. Severe or fatal injury. Make sure that the data set you copy is suitable for the application. 200 • Enter any parameter settings which differ from the factory settings in the parameter list. • In the case of non-SEW motors, set the correct brake application time (P732 / P735). • Observe the notes for starting the motor in the section "Starting the Motor". • With connection and transition point at 87 Hz, set parameter P302/312 "Maximum speed ½" to the value for 87 Hz. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Startup Startup with DBG60B I 9 0 9.9.5 Setting parameters Proceed in the following order to set the parameters: 9.9.6 • Use the context key to call up the context menu. In the context menu, select the "PARAMETER MODE" menu item. Press the OK key to confirm your selection. The flashing cursor under the parameter number indicates that the keypad is in parameter mode. • Use the ↔ key to switch to edit mode. The flashing cursor disappears. • Using the ↑ or ↓ key, you can to select or set the correct parameter value. • Press the OK key to confirm the selection or setting. • Use the ↔ key to switch back to parameter mode again. The flashing cursor appears again. • Use the ↑ key to choose the next parameter. Manual operation The inverter can be controlled using the DBG60B keypad in manual operation (Context menu → Manual operation). The 7-segment display on the unit shows "H" during manual operation. The binary inputs will be without any functions for the duration of manual operation, with the exception of a /Controller inhibit. A binary input "/Controller inhibit" must be assigned a "1" signal to enable the drive to be started in manual operation. The direction of rotation is not determined by the "CW/stop" or "CCW/stop" binary inputs. Instead, you select the direction of rotation using the DBG60B keypad. • Enter the required speed and then the direction of rotation (+ = CW/– = CCW) using the sign key (+/–). Manual operation remains active when the power supply is switched off and on; however, the inverter is then inhibited. • Use the "Run" key to enable and start the inverter at nmin in the selected direction of rotation. The speed is increased and decreased using the ↑ and ↓ keys. NOTE The signals at the binary inputs take effect as soon as manual operation is finished. A binary input /Controller inhibit does not have to be switched from "1" to "0" and back to "1". The drive can start according to the signals at the binary inputs and the setpoint sources. HAZARD! Risk of crushing if the motor starts up unintentionally. Severe or fatal injuries. • • Ensure that the motor cannot start inadvertently, for example, by removing the electronics terminal block X13. Additional safety precautions must be taken depending on the application to avoid injury to people and damage to machinery. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 201 I 9 Startup Startup with PC and MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio 0 9.10 Startup with PC and MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio Start MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio in the Windows start menu: Programs / SEW / MOVITOOLS MotionStudio 5.x/MotionStudio 5.x Press the MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio [Scan] button to list all connected units in the unit tree. You can perform a startup by right-clicking on one of the units. You find additional information in the online help. 9.11 Startup for MBG11A speed control module You cannot simultaneously establish communication between MOVITRAC® B / MBG11A and MOVITRAC® B / PC. The MBG11A can simultaneously specify a setpoint for up to 31 MOVITRAC® B units. 9.11.1 Parameter settings The following parameters have to be set in MOVITRAC® B other than the factory setting. When you use a FBG11B for setting the parameters, set the values indicated in parenthesis: • P100: RS 485 (2) • P101: RS 485 (1) • P871: Set PA2 to "Speed [%]", then P876 PA data enable to "Yes". The speed is now displayed: –100 % ... 100% correspond to –nmax ... nmax. 9.11.2 Input terminals The following input terminals must be connected with 24 V: 202 • DI01 CW/Stop: positive + negative direction of rotation are possible by selecting the +/- sign on the MBG11A. • DI03 Enable/Stop System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Startup Starting up pumps and fans of non-SEW motors I 9 0 9.11.3 Settings for process data word If you do not change the PO2 process data word, you can also use the MBG11B. In this case, the conversion is 1 % = 32 rpm. The results from the relationship 4000 hex = 100 % speed. Refer to the following tables for the respective value. PO2 = Speed (standard parameter setting P871 = speed) Percent Decimal Speed 1% Hex A4 hex 164 32 10 % 666 hex 1638 dec 328 25 % 1000 hex 4096 dec 819.2 33 % 1555 hex 5461 dec 1092.3 50 % 2000 hex 8192 dec 1638.4 75 % 3000 hex 12288 dec 2457.6 100 % 4000 hex 16384 dec 3276.8 dec PA2 = Speed [%] (changed parameter setting P871 = speed [%]) Percent 9.12 Decimal Speed 1% Hex A4 hex 164 n_max / 100 10 % 666 hex 1638 dec n_max / 10 25 % 1000 hex 4096 dec n_max / 4 33 % 1555 hex 5461 dec n_max / 3 50 % 2000 hex 8192 dec n_max / 2 75 % 3000 hex 12288 dec n_max / 1.333 100 % 4000 hex 16384 dec n_max dec Starting up pumps and fans of non-SEW motors Due to the physical conditions of the application, it is recommended that you adjust the following parameters when operating pumps and fans, and non-SEW motors: • Operation of the drive in the V/F characteristic curve operating mode; Parameter 700 / 701 = V/f characteristic curve (21) • Disable automatic adjustment; Parameter 320 / 330 = Off (0) • Set IxR adjustment to 0; Parameter 322 / 332 = 0 • Set boost to 0; Parameter 321 / 331 = 0 • Minimize slip compensation and set to 0 if required; Parameter 324 / 334 • Increase ramp times; Parameters 130 / 140 and 131 / 141 Deactivating the slip compensation might require that you specify a higher setpoint speed to achieve the required air/volume flow. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 203 I 9 Startup Starting the motor 0 9.13 Starting the motor 9.13.1 Analog setpoint specification The following table shows which signals must be present on terminals X11:2 (AI1) and X12:1 … X12:4 (DIØØ … DIØ3) when the "unipolar/fixed setpoint" setpoint is selected (P100), in order to operate the drive with an analog setpoint entry. Function X11:2 (AI11) Analog input n1 X12:1 (DIØØ) /Controller inhibit1) X12:2 (DIØ1) CW/stop X12:3 (DIØ2) CCW/ stop X12:4 (DIØ3) Enable/ stop X12:5 (DIØ4) n11/n21 X12:6 (DIØ5) n12/n22 Controller inhibit X 0 X X X 0 0 Stop X 1 X X 0 0 0 Enable and stop X 1 0 0 1 0 0 Clockwise at 50 % nmax 5V 1 1 0 1 0 0 Clockwise with nmax 10 V 1 1 0 1 0 0 Counterclockwise with 50 % nmax 5V 1 0 1 1 0 0 Counterclockwise with nmax 10 V 1 0 1 1 0 0 1) No default setting 204 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Startup Starting the motor I 9 0 The following travel cycle shows by way of example how the motor is started with the assignment of terminals X12:1 … X12:4 and analog setpoints. Binary output X10:3 (DBØØ "/Brake") is used for switching brake contactor K12. "1" Input DIØØ /Controller inhibit "0" "1" Input DIØ1 CW/Stop "0" "1" Input DIØ2 CCW/Stop "0" "1" Input DIØ3 Enable / Stop "0" Output DBØØ /Brake "1" "0" 10V Analog input n1 (AI11) 5V 0V n [rpm ] nmax Speed 50 % nmax nmin nstart-stop 0 -50 % nmax t11 up t11 up t11 up t11 down t11 down t11 up Stop ramp t13 -nmax NOTE The motor is not energized in the event of controller inhibit. A motor without brake will coast to standstill. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 205 9 I Startup Starting the motor 0 9.13.2 Fixed setpoints The following table shows which signals must be present on terminals X12:1 … X12:6 (DIØØ … DIØ5) when the "unipolar/fixed setpoint" setpoint is selected (P100), in order to operate the drive with the fixed setpoints. 206 Function X12:1 (DIØØ) /Controller inhibit X12:2 (DIØ1) CW/stop X12:3 (DIØ2) CCW/stop X12:4 (DIØ3) Enable/stop X12:5 (DIØ4) n11/n21 X12:6 (DIØ5) n12/n22 Controller inhibit 0 X X X X X Stop 1 X X 0 X X Enable and stop 1 0 0 1 X X CW operation with n11 1 1 0 1 1 0 CW operation with n12 1 1 0 1 0 1 CW operation with n13 1 1 0 1 1 1 CCW operation with n11 1 0 1 1 1 0 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Startup Starting the motor I 9 0 The following travel cycle shows by way of example how the drive is started with the assignment of terminals X12:1 … X12:6 and the internal fixed setpoints. Binary output X10:3 (DBØØ "/Brake") is used for switching brake contactor K12. "1" Input DIØØ /Controller inhibit "0" "1" Input DIØ1 CW/Stop "0" "1" Input DIØ2 CCW/Stop "0" "1" Input DIØ3 Enable / Stop "0" "1" Input DIØ4 n11/n21 "0" "1" Input DIØ5 n12/n22 "0" Output DBØØ /Brake "1" "0" Speed n [rpm ] n13 t11 up n12 n11 0 -n11 -n12 t11 up t11 down t11 up t11 up Stop ramp t13 -n13 NOTE The motor is not energized in the event of controller inhibit. A motor without brake will coast to standstill. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 207 I 9 Startup Parameter list 0 9.14 Parameter list All parameters that can also be displayed and edited using the keypad are indicated as follows in the "FBG" (keypad) column: Selection in long menu Selection in short or long menu Selection using symbol on keypad and in long menu Selection within FGB motor startup If a choice is offered, the factory setting is indicated in bold. No. FBG Index dec. Range / factory setting ® Display MOVITOOLS MotionStudio 0__ Display values (read only) 00_ Process values 000 8318 Speed (signed) [rpm] 001 8501 User display for DBG11B [Text] 002 8319 Frequency (signed) [Hz] 004 8321 Output current (amount) [% IN] 005 8322 Active current (signed) [% IN] 008 8325 DC link voltage [V] 009 8326 Output current [A] 01_ Value after startup Status displays 010 8310 Inverter status [Text] 011 8310 Operating status [Text] 012 8310 Fault status [Text] 013 8310 Current parameter set Current parameter set 014 8327 Heat sink temperature [°C] 02_ Analog setpoints 020 8331 Analog input AI1 [V] 021 8332 Analog input AI2 (optional) [V] 03_ 208 Name Binary inputs 030 8844 Binary input DI00 Fault reset 031 8335 Binary input DI01 CW / STOP (fixed assignment) 032 8336 Binary input DI02 CCW/stop 033 8337 Binary input DI03 Enable/stop 034 8338 Binary input DI04 n11/n21 035 8339 Binary input DI05 n12/n22 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Startup Parameter list I 9 0 No. 039 FBG Index dec. 8334 05_ Name Range / factory setting Display Binary inputs DI00 ... DI05 MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio Collective display of binary inputs Binary outputs 051 8349 Binary output DO01 /Fault 052 8349 Binary output DO02 Brake released 053 8349 Binary output DO03 Ready 059 8349 Binary outputs DO01 ... DO03 Collective display of binary outputs 07_ Unit data 070 8301 Unit type [Text] 071 8361 Rated output current [A] 076 8300 Firmware basic unit [Part number and version] 077 – DBG firmware Only in DBG60B 08_ 080 ... 084 Value after startup Fault memory 8366 ... 8370 09_ Fault t-0 ... t-4 Fault code Background information for previous faults. Bus diagnostics 094 8455 PO1 setpoint [hex] 095 8456 PO2 setpoint [hex] 096 8457 PO3 setpoint [hex] 097 8458 PI1 actual value [hex] 098 8459 PI2 actual value [hex] 099 8460 PI3 actual value [hex] System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 209 I 9 Startup Parameter list 0 No. FBG Index dec. Range / factory setting Display MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio 1__ Setpoints / ramp generators (on FBG only parameter set 1) 10_ Setpoint selection / frequency input 100 8461 Setpoint source 0 1 2 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 14 Bipolar/fixed setpoint Unipolar/fixed setpoint RS-485/fixed setpoint Motor potentiometer/fixed setpoint Fixed setpoint + AI1 Fixed setpoint* + AI1 MASTER SBus1 MASTER RS-485 SBus 1/fixed setpoint Frequency setpoint input / Fixed setpoint Bipolar AI2 / Fixed setpoint 101 8462 Control signal source 0 1 3 4 Terminals RS-485 SBus 1 3-wire control 102 8840 Frequency scaling 0.1 ... 10 ... 120.00 [kHz] 103 10247.15 FI1 reference 0 1 104 10247.10 Setpoint reference speed nref 0 ... 3000 ... 6000 rpm 105 10416.1 Wire breakage detection 0 2 4 7 Value after startup nmax nreference No response Immediate stop / fault Rapid stop / fault Rapid stop / warning 106 10247.11 FI1 char.curve x1 0 ... 100 % 107 10247.12 FI1 char. curve y1 –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % 108 10247.13 FI1 char.curve x2 0 ... 100 % 109 10247.14 FI1 char. curve y2 –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % 11_ 210 Name Analog input 1 (0 ... 10 V) 110 8463 AI1 scaling 0.1 ... 1 ... 10 112 8465 AI1 Operating mode 1 5 6 7 8 9 113 8466 AI1 voltage offset –10 V ... 0 ... +10 V 116 10247.6 AI1 characteristic curve x1 0 ... 100 % 117 10247.7 AI1 characteristic curve y1 –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % 118 10247.8 AI1 characteristic curve x2 0 ... 100 % 119 10247.9 AI1 characteristic curve y2 –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % 10 V, reference maximum speed 0 - 20 mA, reference maximum speed 4 - 20 mA, reference maximum speed 0 - 10 V, n-reference 0 - 20 mA, n-reference 4 - 20 mA, n-reference System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Startup Parameter list I 9 0 No. FBG Index dec. 12_ Name Range / factory setting Display MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio Value after startup Analog input AI2 / FBG speed control module (option) 120 8469 AI2 operating mode 0 1 2 No function 0 ... ±10 V + Setpoint 0 ... 10 V current limitation 121 8811 Addition FBG setpoint control module 0 1 2 Off On On (without fixed setpoint) 122 8799 Direction of rotation FBG manual operation 0 1 2 Unipolar CW Unipolar CCW Bipolar CW and CCW 126 10247.1 AI2 char. curve x1 –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % (–10 V ... 0 ... +10 V) 127 10247.2 AI2 char. curve y1 –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % (–nmax ... 0 ... +nmax / 0 ... Imax) 128 10247.3 AI2 char. curve x2 –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % (–10 V ... 0 ... +10 V) 129 10247.4 AI2 char. curve y2 –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % (–nmax ... 0 ... +nmax / 0 ... Imax) 13_ / 14_ Speed ramps 1 / 2 130 / 140 8807 / 9264 Ramp t11 / t21 up 0.1 ... 2 ... 2000 [s] 131 / 141 8808 / 9265 Ramp t11 / t21 down 0.1 ... 2 ... 2000 [s] 134 / 144 8474 / 8482 Ramp t12 / t22 0.1 ... 10 ... 2000 [s] 135 / 145 8475 / 8483 S pattern t23/t22 0 1 2 3 136 / 146 8476 / 8484 Stop ramp t13 / t23 0.1 ... 2 ... 20 [s] 139 / 149 8928 / 8929 Ramp monitoring 1/2 0 1 15_ Off Weak Medium Strong YES NO Motor potentiometer function 150 8809 Ramp t3 up = down 0.2 ... 20 ... 50 [s] 152 8488 Save last setpoint Off On 16_ / 17_ Off On Fixed setpoints 160 / 170 8489 / 8492 Internal setpoint n11 / n21 0 ... 150 ... 5000 [rpm] 161 / 171 8490 / 8493 Internal setpoint n12 / n22 0 ... 750 ... 5000 [rpm] 162 / 172 8491 / 8494 Internal setpoint n13 / n23 0 ... 1500 ... 5000 [rpm] 163 / 173 8814 / 8817 n11/n21 PI controller 0 ... 3 ... 100 [%] 164 / 174 8815 / 8818 n12/n22 PI controller 0 ... 15 ... 100 [%] 165 / 175 8816 / 8819 n13/n23 PI controller 0 ... 30 ... 100 [%] System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 211 I 9 Startup Parameter list 0 No. FBG Index dec. Range / factory setting Display 2__ Controller parameters 25_ PI controller MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio 8800 PI controller 0 1 2 251 8801 P-gain 0 ... 1 ... 64 252 8802 I-component 0 ... 1 ... 2000 [s] 253 8465 PI actual value mode 1 5 6 7 8 9 254 8463 PI actual value scaling 0.1 ... 1.0 ... 10.0 255 8812 PI actual value offset 0.0 ... 100.0 [%] 10 V, reference maximum speed 0 - 20 mA, reference maximum speed 4 - 20 mA, reference maximum speed 0 - 10 V, n-reference 0 - 20 mA, n-reference 4 - 20 mA, n-reference 3__ Motor parameters (on FBG only parameter set 1) 30_ / 31_ Limits 1 / 2 300 / 310 8515 / 8519 Start/stop speed 1 /2 0 ... 150 [rpm] 301 / 311 8516 / 8520 Minimum speed 1 /2 0 ... 15 ... 5500 [rpm] 302 / 312 8517 / 8521 Maximum speed 1 /2 0 ... 1500 ... 5500 [rpm] 303 / 313 8518 / 8522 Current limit 1 / 2 0 ... 150 [% IN] Motor adjustment 1 / 2 320 / 330 8523 / 8528 Automatic adjustment 1 / 2 Off On 321 / 331 8524 / 8529 Boost 1 / 2 0 ... 100 [%] 322 / 332 8525 / 8530 IxR compensation 1 / 2 0 ... 100 [%] 323 / 333 8526 / 8531 Pre-magnetization time 1 / 2 0 ... 2 [s] 324 / 334 8527 / 8532 Slip compensation 1 / 2 0 ... 500 [rpm] Off On IN UL monitoring 34_ 345 / 346 Value after startup Off Normal Inverted 250 32_ / 33_ 212 Name 9114 / 9115 IN UL monitoring 1 /2 0.1 ... 500 A System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Startup Parameter list I 9 0 No. FBG Index dec. Name Range / factory setting Display 4__ Reference signals 40_ Speed reference signal MOVITOOLS® 400 8539 Speed reference value 0 ... 750 ... 5000 [rpm] 401 8540 Hysteresis 0 ... 100 ... +500 [rpm] 402 8541 Delay time 0 ... 1 ... 9 [s] 403 8542 Signal = "1" when 0 1 43_ MotionStudio Value after startup n < nref n > nref Current reference signal 430 8550 Current reference value 0 ... 100 ... 150 % IN 431 8551 Hysteresis 0 ... 5 ... 30 % IN 432 8552 Delay time 0 ... 1 ... 9 s 433 8553 Signal = "1" when 0 1 44_ I < Iref I > Iref Imax signal 440 8554 Hysteresis 0 ... 5 ... 50 % IN 441 8555 Delay time 0 ... 1 ... 9 s 442 8556 Signal = "1" when 0 1 45_ I < Imax I > Imax PI controller reference signal 450 8813 PI actual value reference 451 8796 Signal = "1" when 0 1 PI Actual value < PI ref PI Actual value > PI ref 5__ Monitoring parameters (on FBG only parameter set 1) 50_ Speed monitoring 1 / 2 500 / 502 8557 / 8559 Speed monitoring 1/2 0 3 501 / 503 8558 / 8560 Delay time 1 / 2 0 ... 1 ... 10 [s] 54_ Off Motor / regenerative Gear unit/motor monitoring 540 9284 Response to drive vibration / warning Factory setting: Display fault 541 9285 Response to drive vibration / fault Factory setting: Rapid stop / warning 542 9286 Response to oil aging / fault Factory setting: Display fault 543 9287 Response to oil aging / warning Factory setting: Display fault 544 9288 Oil aging / overtemperature Factory setting: Display fault 545 9289 Oil aging / ready signal Factory setting: Display fault 549 9290 Response to brake wear Factory setting: Display fault System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 213 I 9 Startup Parameter list 0 No. FBG Index dec. Range / factory setting Display 6__ Terminal assignment 60_ Binary inputs 601 8336 Binary input DI02 assignment 602 8337 Binary input DI03 assignment 603 8338 Binary input DI04 assignment 604 8339 Binary input DI05 assignment 608 8844 Binary input DI00 assignment 62_ 214 Name MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio Value after startup 0: No function 1: Enable / stop (factory setting DI03) 2: CW/stop 3: CCW / stop (factory setting DI02) 4: n11 / n21 (factory setting DI04) 5: n12 / n22 (factory setting DI05) n13 = n11 + n12 6: Fixed setpoint switchover 7: Parameter set switchover 8: Ramp switchover 9: Motor potentiometer up 10: Motor potentiometer down 11: /External fault 12: Fault reset (factory setting DI00) 19: Slave free running 20: Setpoint acceptance active 26: TF signal (only with DI05) 27: Vibration/warning 28: Vibration/fault 29: Brake wear 30: Controller inhibit 33: Oil aging/warning 34: Oil aging/fault 35: Oil aging / overtemperature 36: Oil aging/ready Binary outputs 620 8350 Binary output DO01 assignment 621 8351 Binary output DO02 assignment 622 8916 Binary output DO03 assignment 0: No function 1: /Fault (factory setting DO01) 2: Ready (factory setting DO03) 3: Output stage on 4: Rotating field on 5: Brake released (factory setting DO02 / not with DO03) 8: Parameter set 9: Speed reference signal 11: Comparison message setpoint-actual value 12: Current reference signal 13: Imax signal 21: IPOS output 22: /IPOS fault 23: PI controller actual value reference 24: Ex-e current limit active (in preparation) 27: Safe stop 30: Ixt warning 31: Ixt fault System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Startup Parameter list I 9 0 No. FBG Index dec. 64_ Name Range / factory setting Display MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio Analog outputs AO1 (optional) 640 8568 Analog output AO1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 11 12 No function Ramp generator input Setpoint speed Actual speed Actual frequency Output current Active current Unit utilization Actual speed (signed) Actual frequency (signed) 641 10248.5 AO1 reference 0 1 2 3000 rpm , 100 Hz, 150 % nmax nset reference 642 8570 AO1 Operating mode 0 2 3 4 No function 0 ... 20 mA 4 ... 20 mA 0 ... 10 V 646 10246.1 AO1 Characteristic curve x1 –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % 647 10246.2 AO1 Characteristic curve y1 0 ... 100 % 648 10246.3 AO1 Characteristic curve x2 –100 % ... 0 ... +100 % 649 10246.4 AO1 Characteristic curve y2 0 ... 100 % 7__ Control functions (on FBG only parameter set 1) 70_ Operating modes 1 / 2 700 / 701 8574 / 8575 71_ 710 / 711 Value after startup Operating mode 1 /2 0 2 3 4 21 22 VFC VFC & hoist VFC & DC braking VFC & flying start function V/f characteristic curve V/f & DC braking Standstill current 1 / 2 8576 / 8577 72_ Standstill current 1/2 0 ... 50 % IMot Setpoint stop function 1 / 2 720 / 723 8578 / 8581 Setpoint stop function 1 / 2 721 / 724 8579 / 8582 Stop setpoint 1 / 2 0 ... 30 ... 500 [rpm] 722 / 725 8580 / 8583 Start offset 1 / 2 73_ Off On Off On 0 ... 30 ... 500 [rpm] Brake function 1 / 2 731 / 734 8749 / 8750 Brake release time 1 / 2 0 ... 2 [s] 732 / 735 8585 / 8587 Brake application time 1 / 2 0 ... 2 [s] System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 215 I 9 Startup Parameter list 0 No. FBG Index dec. 74_ Range / factory setting Display MOVITOOLS® 740 / 742 8588 / 8590 Skip window center 1 / 2 0 ... 1500 ... 5000 rpm 741 / 743 8589 / 8591 Skip width 1 / 2 0 ... 300 rpm Master/slave function 750 8592 Slave setpoint 751 8593 Scaling slave setpoint 76_ 760 Manual operation 8798 77_ 770 MotionStudio Value after startup Speed skip function 75_ Lock RUN / STOP buttons Off On Off On Energy-saving function 8925 Energy-saving function Off On Off On 8__ Unit function (on FBG only parameter set 1) 80_ Setup 800 – Short menu 801 – DBG language 802 8594 Factory setting no Hours ALL NEMA 0 / No 1 / Standard 2 / Delivery status 4 / NEMA delivery status 803 8595 Parameter lock Off On Off On 804 8596 Reset statistical data No action Fault memory 805 – Rated mains voltage 50 ... 500 V 806 – Copy DBG → MOVITRAC® B Yes No 807 – Copy MOVITRAC® B → DBG Yes No 808 8660 24 V output voltage Off On 809 10204.1 IPOS enable Off On 81_ 216 Name long short Serial communication 810 8597 RS-485 address 0 ... 99 811 8598 RS-485 group address 100 ... 199 812 8599 RS-485 timeout interval 0 ... 650 [s] System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Startup Parameter list I 9 0 No. FBG Index dec. 82_ 820 / 821 Range / factory setting Display MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio Value after startup Brake operation 1 / 2 8607 / 8608 83_ 4-quadrant operation 1 / 2 Off On Off On Fault responses 830 8609 833 8612 836 8615 84_ 840 Name Response termi2 nal "external fault" 4 Response to RS- 7 485 timeout Immediate stop / fault Rapid stop / fault (830) Rapid stop / warning (833 / 836) Response to SBus timeout Reset behavior 8617 85_ Manual reset Yes No Scaling actual speed value 850 8747 Scaling factor numerator 1 ... 65535 (can be set with SHELL only) 851 8748 Scaling factor denominator 1 ... 65535 (can be set with SHELL only) 852 8772 / 8773 User travel unit Text 853 9312 Scaled speed FBG 0 1 Speed Scaled speed 86_ Modulation 1 / 2 860 / 861 8620 / 8621 PWM frequency 1 /2 4 8 12 16 4 kHz 8 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz 862 / 863 8751 / 8752 PWM fix 1 / 2 On Off On Off 87_ Process data parameter setting 870 8304 Setpoint description PO1 871 8305 Setpoint description PO2 872 8306 Setpoint description PO3 873 8307 Actual value description PI1 874 8308 Actual value description PI2 875 8309 Actual value description PI3 876 8622 PO data enable System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B No function (factory setting P872) Setpoint speed (factory setting P871) Max. speed Ramp Control word 1 (factory setting P870) Control word 2 Setpoint speed [%] IPOS PO data PI controller setpoint [%] No function Actual speed (factory setting P874) Output current (factory setting P875) Active current Status word 1 (factory setting P873) Actual speed [%] IPOS PI-DATA PI controller actual value [%] No Yes 217 I 9 Startup Parameter list 0 No. FBG Index dec. 88_ 880 218 Name Range / factory setting Display MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio Value after startup Serial communication SBus 8937 SBus protocol 0 / MoviLink 1 / CANopen 881 8600 SBus address 0 ... 63 882 8601 SBus group address 0 ... 63 883 8602 SBus timeout interval 0 ... 650 [s] 884 8603 SBus baud rate 125 250 500 1000 886 8989 CANopen address 1 ... 2 ... 127 125 kbaud 250 kbaud 500 kbaud 1 MBaud System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B I Operation Data backup 10 0 10 Operation 10.1 Data backup 10.1.1 Data backup using FBG11B Use the FBG11B keypad to download parameter data from the MOVITRAC® B to the keypad or copy from the keypad to the MOVITRAC® B. After copying the parameters, check for accuracy. Data backup using FBG11B Level 1 Level 3 Level 2 Enter Start loading Select data backup out Enter Enter Parameter data from FBG11B MOVITRAC® B Enter Start saving Enter Parameter data from MOVITRAC® B FBG11B After copying data, the MOVITRAC® B is inhibited. The inhibited status is indicated by a flashing STOP in the status display. The status LED also slowly flashes yellow. You can revoke the inhibit by taking one of the following measures: • Pressing the RUN button on the FBG11B • Switching the mains off, waiting 10 seconds, and switching the mains back on 10.1.2 Data backup using DBG60B Copy the parameter set from MOVITRAC® B into the DBG60B keypad. You have the following options: • In the context menu, select the "COPY TO DBG" menu item. Confirm your selection by pressing OK. The parameter set is copied from MOVITRAC® B to DBG60B. • In the context menu, select the "PARAMETER MODE" menu item. Select parameter P807 "MCB → DBG". The parameter set is copied from MOVITRAC® B to DBG60B. 10.1.3 Data backup using UBP11A Copy the parameter set from MOVITRAC® B to the UBP11A parameter module. To do so, press the button at the lower end of the module. You need a pointed object for this purpose. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 219 I 10 Operation Return codes (r-19 ... r-38) 0 10.1.4 Data backup using MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio When you use MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio to transfer data to the MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter, you must re-enable the inverter as follows: • Select the unit in the network. • Right click to open the context menu. • Select menu [RUN/STOP via software keypad] [1] • Select [RUN] in the software keypad [2] [1] [2] 10.2 Return codes (r-19 ... r-38) Return codes MOVITRAC® B: 220 No. Designation Meaning 19 Parameter lock activated Parameters cannot be changed 20 Factory setting in progress Parameters cannot be changed 23 Option card missing The option card required for the function is missing. 27 Option card missing The option card required for the function is missing. 28 Controller inhibit required Controller inhibit required 29 Invalid value for parameter. • • 32 Enable You cannot perform this function in ENABLED status 34 Fault during execution • • 38 FBG11B incorrect data set Stored data set does not match the unit Invalid value for parameter. FGB manual operation selection invalid as PC is in active manual operation. Error while saving in FBG11B. Startup not performed with FBG. Perform FGB startup with MotionStudio or select a new motor. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Operation Status displays I 10 0 10.3 Status displays 10.3.1 FBG11B keypad If the status is "Drive enabled", the display will show the calculated actual speed. Status of binary inputs/outputs Status Display Drive "Controller inhibit" oFF Drive "No enable" StoP Drive "Enable" 8888 (actual speed) Factory setting SEt (Set) Standstill current dc 24 V operation 24U Parameter P039 (binary inputs) and parameter P059 (binary outputs) are adopted in the parameter menu as display parameters. The status is displayed as binary. Every binary input or output has two segments vertically on top of one another of the 7-segment display assigned to it. The upper segment lights up when the binary input or output is set, and the lower segment lights up when the binary input or output is not set. The two 7-segment displays on the right are displayed if P039 (di = binary inputs ) or P059 (do = binary outputs) are output. Examples: Above: Input status: DI00 = 1 / DI01 = 0 / DI02 = 1 / DI03 = 1 / DI04 = 1 / DI05 = 0 Bottom: Output status: DO01 = 1 / DO02 = 0 / DO03 = 1 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 221 I 10 Operation Unit status codes 0 10.3.2 LED flash codes The LED on the front of the unit signals the following states: Status Display (optional with FBG) LED flash code status of basic unit "ENABLE" Speed Constant green light "ENABLE" at current limit Speed flashes Rapid green flashing "CURRENT AT STANDSTILL" dc Slow green flashing Timeout Errors 43 / 46 / 47 Flashing green/yellow "NO ENABLE" Stop Constant yellow light "FACTORY SETTING" SEt Rapid yellow flashing "CONTROL.INHIBIT" oFF Rapid yellow flashing "24 V operation" Flashing 24U Slow yellow flashing "SAFE STOP" Flashing U Slow yellow flashing FGB manual operation active or inverter stopped using "stop" button. FGB manual operation symbol or "stop" is flashing Yellow on long, off briefly Copy Fault 97 Flashing red/yellow System error Errors 10 / 17 ... 24 / 25 / 32 / 37 / 38 / 45 / 77 / 80 / 94 Constant red light Overvoltage / phase failure Errors 4 / 6 / 7 Slow red flashing Overload Errors 1 / 3 / 11 / 44 / 84 Rapid red flashing Monitoring Errors 8 / 26 / 34 / 81 / 82 2 x red flashing Motor protection Errors 31 / 84 3 x red flashing WARNING! Incorrect interpretation of display U = "Safe stop" active. Severe or fatal injuries. The display U = "Safe stop" is not safety-related and must not be used as a safety function. 10.4 Unit status codes Use status word 1 to determine the unit status code. 222 Code Meaning 0x0 Not ready 0x1 Controller inhibit 0x2 No enable 0x3 Standstill current active, no enable 0x4 Enable 0x8 Factory setting is active System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Operation DBG60B keypad I 10 0 10.5 DBG60B keypad 10.5.1 Basic displays 0.00rpm 0.000Amp CONTROLLER INHIBIT Display when /CONTROLLER INHIBIT = "0". 0.00rpm 0.000Amp NO ENABLE Display when inverter is not enabled ("ENABLE/STOP" = "0"). 950.00rpm 0.990Amp ENABLE (VFC) Display for enabled inverter. NOTE 6: VALUE TOO HIGH (DEL)=Quit ERROR 9 STARTUP Information message Error display 10.5.2 Information messages Information messages on the DBG60B (ca. 2 s in duration) or in MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio/SHELL (message that can be acknowledged): No. Text DBG60B/SHELL Description 1 ILLEGAL INDEX Index addressed via interface not available. 2 NOT IMPLEMENT. • • • 3 READ ONLY VALUE Attempt to modify a read only value. 4 PARAM. INHIBITED Parameter lock P803 = "ON". Parameter cannot be altered. 5 SETUP ACTIVE Attempt to change parameters when factory setting is active. 6 VALUE TOO HIGH Attempt to enter a value that is too high. 7 VALUE TOO LOW Attempt to enter a value that is too low. 8 REQ. CARD MISSING The option card required for the selected function is missing. 10 ONLY VIA ST1 Manual mode must be completed using X13:ST11/ST12 (RS 485). 11 ONLY TERMINAL Manual mode must be exited via TERMINAL (DBG60B or UWS21B). 12 NO ACCESS Access to selected parameter denied. 13 CTRL. INHIBIT MISSING Set terminal DIØØ "/Controller inhibit" = "0" for the selected function. 14 INVALID VALUE Attempt to enter an invalid value. 16 PARAM. NOT SAVED Overflow of EEPROM buffer, e.g., due to cyclic write access. Parameter is saved in EEPROM and is not protected against loss following POWER OFF. 17 INVERTER ENABLED Attempt to execute a function that is not implemented. An incorrect communication service has been selected. Manual operation selected via invalid interface (e.g. fieldbus). - -- • • System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Parameter to be changed can only be set in the state "CONTROLLER INHIBIT". Attempt to change to manual mode during live operation 223 Operation DBG60B keypad 10 10.5.3 Functions of the DBG60B keypad Key assignments for DBG60B [1] [2] [3] [12] [4] [11] [10] [5] [6] [9] [7] [8] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] Copy function of the DBG60B 224 Stop key ↑ key RUN key OK key Context key ↓ key . key ± key Keys 0 ... 9 ↔ key Language key DEL key Stop Up arrow, moves up to the next menu item Start OK, confirms the entry Activate the context menu Down arrow, moves down to the next menu item Decimal point Sign reversal Digits 0... 9 Change menu Select language Delete previous entry The DBG60B keypad can be used for copying complete parameter sets from one MOVITRAC® unit to other MOVITRAC® units. Proceed as follows: • In the context menu, select the menu item "COPY TO DBG". Confirm your selection by pressing OK. • After the copying process has finished, plug the keypad in the other inverter. • In the context menu, select the menu item "COPY TO MC07B". Confirm your selection by pressing OK. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Operation DBG60B keypad Parameter mode 10 Proceed as follows to set the parameters in parameter mode: 1. Press the context key to activate the context menu. The first menu item is "PARAMETER MODE". PARAMETER MODE VARIABLE MODE BASIC VIEW 2. Press the OK key to start PARAMETER MODE. The first display parameter P000 "SPEED" appears. Use the ↑ or ↓ key to select main parameter groups 0 to 9. P 000 upm SPEED +0.0 CONTROLLER INHIBIT 3. Use the ↑ or ↓ key to select the desired main parameter group. The flashing cursor is positioned under the number of the main parameter group. P 1.. SETPOINTS/ RAMP GENERATORS CONTROLLER INHIBIT 4. Press the OK key to activate the parameter subgroup selection in the required main parameter group. The flashing cursor moves one position to the right. P 1.. SETPOINTS/ RAMP GENERATORS CONTROLLER INHIBIT 5. Use the ↑ or ↓ key to select the desired parameter subgroup. The flashing cursor is positioned under the number of the parameter subgroup. \ 13. SPEED RAMPS 1 CONTROLLER INHIBIT 6. Press the OK key to activate the parameter selection in the required parameter subgroup. The flashing cursor moves one position to the right. \ 13. SPEED RAMPS 1 CONTROLLER INHIBIT 7. Use the ↑ or ↓ key to select the desired parameter. The flashing cursor is positioned under the third digit of the parameter number. \ 132 s T11 UP CCW +0.13 CONTROLLER INHIBIT 8. Press the OK key to activate the setting mode for the selected parameter. The cursor is positioned under the parameter value. \ 132 s T11 UP CCW +0.13_ CONTROLLER INHIBIT 9. Use the ↑ or ↓ key to set the required parameter value. \ 132 s T11 UP CCW +0.20_ CONTROLLER INHIBIT 10. Press the OK key to confirm the setting. To exit setting mode, press the ↔ key. The flashing cursor is positioned under the third digit of the parameter number again. \ 132 s T11 UP CCW +0.20 CONTROLLER INHIBIT System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 225 Operation DBG60B keypad 10 11. Use the ↑ or ↓ key to select another parameter, or press the DEL key to switch to the menu of the parameter subgroups. \ 13. SPEED RAMPS 1 CONTROLLER INHIBIT 12. Use the ↑ or ↓ key to select another parameter subgroup or press the DEL key to switch to the menu of the main parameter groups. P 1.. SETPOINTS/ RAMP GENERATORS CONTROLLER INHIBIT 13. Use the context key to return to the context menu. PARAMETER MODE VARIABLE MODE BASIC VIEW User menu The DBG60B keypad has a standard user menu containing the parameters that are used most often. The parameters in the user menu are displayed with a "\" before the parameter number (→ Sec. "Complete parameter list"). You can add or delete parameters. You can save a maximum of 50 parameter entries. The parameters are displayed in the order in which they are stored in the inverter. The parameters are not sorted automatically. • Adding parameters to the user menu Deleting parameters from the user menu 226 Use the context key to call up the context menu. Select the menu item "USER MENU" and press the OK key to confirm. The user menu with the most frequently used parameters appears. Proceed in this order to add parameters to the user menu: • Use the context key to call up the context menu. Select the "PARAMETER MODE" menu item. • Select desired parameter and press the OK key to confirm. • Use the context key to return to the context menu. In the context menu, select the menu item "ADD Pxxx". "xxx" is the parameter you selected previously. Confirm your selection by pressing OK. The selected parameter is stored in the user menu. Proceed in this order to delete parameters from the user menu: • Use the context key to call up the context menu. Select the menu item "USER MENU". • Select the parameter that is to be deleted. Confirm your selection by pressing OK. • Use the context key to return to the context menu. In the context menu, select the menu item "DELETE Pxxx". "xxx" is the parameter you selected previously. Confirm your selection by pressing OK. The selected parameter is deleted from the user menu. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Operation DBG60B keypad Initial parameter 10 The wake-up parameter is the parameter that is displayed when the DBG60B is switched on. The factory setting for the wake-up parameter is the basic display. You can select which parameter should be the wake-up parameter. The following options can be used as the wake-up parameter: • Parameter (→ Parameter mode) • Parameter from the user menu (→ User menu) • Basic display Proceed as follows to save a wake-up parameter: • First select the required parameter in parameter mode. • In the context menu, select the menu item "XXXX INITIAL PARAM.". "XXXX" is the selected initial parameter. Confirm your selection by pressing OK. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 227 Service / List of Faults Unit information 11 11 Service / List of Faults 11.1 Unit information 11.1.1 Fault memory The inverter stores the error message in fault memory P080. The inverter does not save a new fault until the error message has been acknowledged. The local operating panel shows the most recent fault. Whenever double faults occur, the value stored in P080 does not correspond to the value displayed on the operating panel. This is an example of what happens with F-07 DC link overvoltage followed by F34 Ramp timeout. The inverter stores the following information when a malfunction occurs: • Fault occurred • Status of the binary inputs / binary outputs • Operating status of the inverter • Inverter status • Heat sink temperature • Speed • Output current • Active current • Unit utilization • DC link voltage 11.1.2 Switch-off responses There are 3 switch-off responses depending on the fault: Immediate switch off This fault response causes immediate locking of the output stage with simultaneous control of the brake output so that an existing brake is applied. The "fault message" is set and the "ready message" is revoked. This status can only be exited by an explicit fault reset. Stop This fault response causes a stop at the set stop ramp. This fault stop is subject to time monitoring. If the drive does not reach the start / stop speed within a specified time period, the unit jumps to the fault state, the output stage is inhibited and an existing brake is applied. The fault message "F34 Ramp timeout" is generated. The original fault message is overwritten. If the drive reaches the start/stop speed, the unit jumps to the fault state, the brake is applied and the output stage is inhibited. The "fault message" is set and the "ready message" is revoked. This status can only be exited by an explicit fault reset. 228 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Service / List of Faults Unit information Timeout (warning) 11 The switch-off response causes a stop at the set rapid stop ramp. The stop is subject to time monitoring as for the "fault stop". If the drive reaches the start/stop speed, the unit jumps to the warning state, the brake is applied and the output stage is inhibited. The "fault message" is set and the "ready message" remains set. An explicit fault reset is not possible. The fault is reset when communication is made again or the timeout is set to 0 s. Behavior of the inverter when it is controlled via a communciation interface (RS-485 or SBus): • Power off and on • Enable has no effect • Valid data to an interface monitored with timeout • Enable 11.1.3 Reset Basic unit reset A fault message can be acknowledged: • Keypad reset Reset via input terminals with an appropriately assigned binary input (DIØØ, DIØ2...DIØ5). DIØØ is factory set to fault reset. A fault message can be acknowledged: • Manual reset on the keypad (STOP/RESET key). The "STOP/RESET" button has priority over a terminal enable or an enable via the interface. The STOP/RESET key can be used for performing a reset after a fault has occurred with a programmed error response. A reset inhibits the drive. To enable the drive, press the RUN key. Interface reset A fault message can be acknowledged: • Manual reset in MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio / P840 Manual reset = Yes, or in the status window of the reset button. System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 229 Service / List of Faults List of faults (F-00 ... F-113) 11 11.2 List of faults (F-00 ... F-113) No. Designation 00 No fault 01 Overcurrent 03 04 06 07 Ground fault Brake chopper Response Possible cause Measure Immediate switchoff with inhibit • Short circuit at output • Rectify the short circuit • Output switching • Switching with inhibited output stage only • Motor too large • Connect a smaller motor • Faulty output stage • Consult SEW Service if the fault cannot be reset • Ground fault in motor • Replace motor • Ground fault in inverter • Replace MOVITRAC® B • Ground fault in the motor supply lead • Eliminate ground fault • Overcurrent (see F-01) • See F-01 • Too much regenerative power • Extend deceleration ramps • Braking resistor circuit interrupted • Check supply cable to the braking resistor • Short circuit in the braking resistor circuit • Rectify the short circuit • Brake resistor has too high resistance • Check technical data of braking resistor • Brake chopper defective • Replace MOVITRAC® B Immediate switchoff with inhibit Immediate switchoff with inhibit • Ground fault • Eliminate ground fault Mains phase failure Immediate switchoff with inhibit (only with 3-phase inverter) • Phase failure • Check the supply system cable • Supply voltage too low • Check the supply voltage DC link overvoltage Immediate switchoff with inhibit • DC link voltage too high • • Extend deceleration ramps Check supply cable to the braking resistor Check technical data of braking resistor • • 08 Speed monitoring Immediate switchoff with inhibit • Eliminate ground fault Mechanical overload • • • • Reduce load Check current limitation Extend deceleration ramps Increase set deceleration time P5011) • Phase failure in supply system • Check line phases • Phase failure in motor • Check motor cable and motor • Maximum speed for VFC operating modes exceeded • Reduce maximum speed • Inverter not started yet • Start up the inverter • Unknown motor selected • Select another motor Current controller works at the set limit due to: • 09 230 Startup Immediate switchoff with inhibit Ground fault System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Service / List of Faults List of faults (F-00 ... F-113) No. Designation Response Possible cause Measure 10 IPOS-ILLOP Stop with inhibit With IPOS only • Incorrect command during command execution • Check the program • Incorrect conditions during command execution. • Check program run • Function does not exist / is not implemented in the inverter • Use another function • Thermal overload of inverter • Reduce load and / or ensure adequate cooling. If a braking resistor is integrated in the heat sink: Install braking resistor externally 11 Overtemperature Stop with inhibit • 17 ... 24 System malfunction 25 EEPROM Immediate switchoff with inhibit • Inverter electronics is faulty, possibly due to EMC influence • • Stop with inhibit • Error while accessing EEPROM • • Check grounding and shielding and improve, if necessary. Contact SEW Service for advice if this fault reoccurs. Activate factory settings, perform reset and reset parameters. Contact SEW Service for advice if this fault reoccurs. 26 External terminal Programmable • Read in external fault signal via programmable input. • Eliminate respective cause; reprogram terminal if necessary. 31 TF/TH sensor tripped Stop with inhibit • Motor too hot, TF sensor has tripped • Let motor cool off and reset fault • TF sensor of motor not connected or connected incorrectly Connection of MOVITRAC® B and TF on motor interrupted • Check connections / links between MOVITRAC® B and TF • 32 IPOS index overflow Stop with inhibit • Programming principles violated leading to internal stack overflow • Check user program and correct 34 Ramp timeout Immediate switchoff with inhibit • Set ramp time exceeded. • Extend the ramp time • If you remove the inhibit and the drive exceeds the stop ramp time t13 by a certain time, the inverter will signal F34. • Extend the stop ramp time Immediate switchoff with inhibit • Type of option card not allowed • Use correct option card • Setpoint source, control signal source or operating mode not permitted for this option card • • Set correct setpoint source. Set correct control signal source. Set the correct operating mode. Check parameters P120 and P121 36 Option missing • • 37 System watchdog Immediate switchoff with inhibit • Error during system software execution • • 38 System software Immediate switchoff with inhibit • System malfunction • • 43 RS-485 timeout Stop without inhibit2) System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B • Connection between inverter and PC interrupted. • 11 Check grounding and shielding and improve, if necessary. Contact SEW Service for advice if this fault reoccurs. Check grounding and shielding and improve, if necessary. Contact SEW Service for advice if this fault reoccurs. Check connection between inverter and PC. 231 Service / List of Faults List of faults (F-00 ... F-113) 11 No. Designation Response Possible cause Measure 44 Unit utilization Immediate switchoff with inhibit • Unit utilization (Ixt value) exceeded • • • Decrease power output Extend ramps If these points are not possible: Use a larger inverter 45 Initialization Immediate switchoff with inhibit • Error during initialization • Contact SEW Service for advice. 47 System bus 1 timeout Stop without inhibit • Fault during communication via system bus • Check system bus connection 77 IPOS control word Stop with inhibit • System malfunction • Contact SEW Service for advice. 80 RAM test Immediate switchoff Internal unit fault, RAM defective. 81 Start condition Immediate switchoff with inhibit Only in "VFC hoist" operating mode: The motor could not be supplied with the correct amount of current during the pre-magnetizing time: • Rated motor power too small in relation to rated inverter power Contact SEW Service. • • • 82 84 Open output Motor protection Immediate switchoff with inhibit Stop with inhibit • Check cross section of motor cable and increase if necessary. Only in "VFC hoist" operating mode: • 2 or all output phases interrupted • Check connection between inverter and motor • Rated motor power too small in relation to rated inverter power • Check startup data and perform new startup, if necessary. • Motor utilization too high. • • • • Check P345/346 INUL monitoring Reduce load Extend ramps Longer pause times Contact SEW Service. 94 EEPROM checksum Immediate switchoff with inhibit • EEPROM defective • 97 Copy fault Immediate switchoff with inhibit • Parameter module is removed during copying process Switching off/on while copying Before acknowleding the fault: • Load factory setting or complete data set from parameter module • 232 Motor cable cross section too small Check connection between inverter and motor Check startup data and perform new startup, if necessary. 98 CRC error flash Immediate switchoff Internal unit fault Flash memory defective. Send unit in for repair. 100 Vibration/ warning Display error Vibration sensor warning (→ "DUV10A" operating instructions) Determine cause of vibrations. Continue operation until F101 occurs. 101 Vibration error Rapid stop Vibration sensor reports fault SEW-EURODRIVE recommends that you remedy the cause of the vibrations immediately 102 Oil aging/ warning Display error Oil aging sensor warns Schedule oil change. 103 Oil aging/fault Display error Oil aging sensor reports fault SEW-EURODRIVE recommends that you change the gear unit oil immediately. 104 Oil aging/overtemperature Display error Oil aging sensor signals overtemperature • • Let oil cool down Check if the gear unit cools properly System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Service / List of Faults SEW electronics service No. Designation Response Possible cause Measure 105 Oil aging / ready signal Display error Oil aging sensor is not ready for operation • • 11 Check voltage supply of oil aging sensor Check and, if necessary, replace the oil aging sensor 106 Brake wear Display error Brake lining worn Replace brake lining (→ "Motors" operating instructions) 110 "Ex-e protection" fault Stop with inhibit Duration of operation below 5 Hz exceeded • • Check project planning Shorten duration of operation below 5 Hz 113 Analog input open circuit Programmable AI1 analog input open circuit • Check wiring 1) Speed monitoring is set by changing parameters 500 / 502 and 501 / 503. The sagging of hoists cannot be avoided safely when monitoring is deactivated or the delay time is set too long. 2) No reset required, error message disappears after communication is reestablished 11.3 SEW electronics service 11.3.1 Hotline Call the Drive Service Hotline to talk to an SEW-EURODRIVE service specialist on 365 days a year, 24 hours a day. Simply dial the prefix 01805 and enter the key combination SEWHELP. Or just dial 018057394357. 11.3.2 Sending unit in for repair Please contact the SEW Electronics Service if you cannot rectify a fault. Please always specify the unit status code number when you contact the SEW electronics service so that our service personnel can assist you more effectively. Please provide the following information when sending the unit in for repair: Serial number (→ nameplate) Unit designation Short description of application (application, control via terminals or serial) Connected motor (motor voltage, star or delta connection) Type of fault Accompanying circumstances Your own presumptions as to what has happened Unusual events preceding the problem System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 233 Service / List of Faults Extended storage 11 11.4 Extended storage If the unit is being stored for a long time, connect it to the mains voltage for at least 5 minutes every 2 years. Otherwise, the unit's service life may be reduced. Procedure when maintenance has been neglected: Electrolytic capacitors are used in the inverters. They are subject to aging effects when deenergized. This effect can damage the electrolytic capacitors if the unit is connected using the rated voltage after a longer period of storage. If you have not performed maintenance regularly, SEW-EURODRIVE recommends that you increase the line voltage slowly up to the maximum voltage. This can be done, for example, by using a variable transformer for which the output voltage has been set according to the following overview. SEW-EURODRIVE recommends that you increase the voltage from 0 V to the first stage after a few seconds. SEW-EURODRIVE recommends the following stages: AC 400/500 V units: • Stage 1: AC 350 V for 15 minutes • Stage 2: AC 420 V for 15 minutes • Stage 3: AC 500 V for 1 hour AC 230 V units: • Stage 1: AC 170 V for 15 minutes • Stage 2: AC 200 V for 15 minutes • Stage 3: AC 240 V for 1 hour After you have completed the regeneration process, the unit can be used immediately or stored again for an extended period with maintenance. 234 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Address List 12 12 Address List Germany Headquarters Production Sales Bruchsal SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42 D-76646 Bruchsal P.O. Box Postfach 3023 • D-76642 Bruchsal Tel. +49 7251 75-0 Fax +49 7251 75-1970 http://www.sew-eurodrive.de [email protected] Service Competence Center Central SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Ernst-Blickle-Straße 1 D-76676 Graben-Neudorf Tel. +49 7251 75-1710 Fax +49 7251 75-1711 [email protected] North SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Alte Ricklinger Straße 40-42 D-30823 Garbsen (near Hannover) Tel. +49 5137 8798-30 Fax +49 5137 8798-55 [email protected] East SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Dänkritzer Weg 1 D-08393 Meerane (near Zwickau) Tel. +49 3764 7606-0 Fax +49 3764 7606-30 [email protected] South SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Domagkstraße 5 D-85551 Kirchheim (near München) Tel. +49 89 909552-10 Fax +49 89 909552-50 [email protected] West SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Siemensstraße 1 D-40764 Langenfeld (near Düsseldorf) Tel. +49 2173 8507-30 Fax +49 2173 8507-55 [email protected] Electronics SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42 D-76646 Bruchsal Tel. +49 7251 75-1780 Fax +49 7251 75-1769 [email protected] Drive Service Hotline / 24 Hour Service +49 180 5 SEWHELP +49 180 5 7394357 Additional addresses for service in Germany provided on request! France Production Sales Service Haguenau SEW-USOCOME 48-54, route de Soufflenheim B. P. 20185 F-67506 Haguenau Cedex Tel. +33 3 88 73 67 00 Fax +33 3 88 73 66 00 http://www.usocome.com [email protected] Production Forbach SEW-EUROCOME Zone Industrielle Technopôle Forbach Sud B. P. 30269 F-57604 Forbach Cedex Tel. +33 3 87 29 38 00 Assembly Sales Service Bordeaux SEW-USOCOME Parc d'activités de Magellan 62, avenue de Magellan - B. P. 182 F-33607 Pessac Cedex Tel. +33 5 57 26 39 00 Fax +33 5 57 26 39 09 Lyon SEW-USOCOME Parc d'Affaires Roosevelt Rue Jacques Tati F-69120 Vaulx en Velin Tel. +33 4 72 15 37 00 Fax +33 4 72 15 37 15 Paris SEW-USOCOME Zone industrielle 2, rue Denis Papin F-77390 Verneuil I'Etang Tel. +33 1 64 42 40 80 Fax +33 1 64 42 40 88 Additional addresses for service in France provided on request! System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 235 Address List 12 Algeria Sales Alger Réducom 16, rue des Frères Zaghnoun Bellevue El-Harrach 16200 Alger Tel. +213 21 8222-84 Fax +213 21 8222-84 [email protected] Buenos Aires SEW EURODRIVE ARGENTINA S.A. Centro Industrial Garin, Lote 35 Ruta Panamericana Km 37,5 1619 Garin Tel. +54 3327 4572-84 Fax +54 3327 4572-21 [email protected] http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.ar Melbourne SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD. 27 Beverage Drive Tullamarine, Victoria 3043 Tel. +61 3 9933-1000 Fax +61 3 9933-1003 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.au [email protected] Sydney SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD. 9, Sleigh Place, Wetherill Park New South Wales, 2164 Tel. +61 2 9725-9900 Fax +61 2 9725-9905 [email protected] Wien SEW-EURODRIVE Ges.m.b.H. Richard-Strauss-Strasse 24 A-1230 Wien Tel. +43 1 617 55 00-0 Fax +43 1 617 55 00-30 http://sew-eurodrive.at [email protected] Minsk SEW-EURODRIVE BY RybalkoStr. 26 BY-220033 Minsk Tel.+375 (17) 298 38 50 Fax +375 (17) 29838 50 [email protected] Assembly Sales Service Brüssel SEW Caron-Vector S.A. Avenue Eiffel 5 B-1300 Wavre Tel. +32 10 231-311 Fax +32 10 231-336 http://www.sew-eurodrive.be [email protected] Service Competence Center Industrial Gears SEW Caron-Vector S.A. Rue de Parc Industriel, 31 BE-6900 Marche-en-Famenne Tel. +32 84 219-878 Fax +32 84 219-879 http://www.sew-eurodrive.be [email protected] Sao Paulo SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda. Avenida Amâncio Gaiolli, 152 - Rodovia Presidente Dutra Km 208 Guarulhos - 07251-250 - SP SAT - SEW ATENDE - 0800 7700496 Tel. +55 11 6489-9133 Fax +55 11 6480-3328 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.br [email protected] Argentina Assembly Sales Service Australia Assembly Sales Service Austria Assembly Sales Service Belarus Sales Belgium Brazil Production Sales Service Additional addresses for service in Brazil provided on request! Bulgaria Sales Sofia BEVER-DRIVE GmbH Bogdanovetz Str.1 BG-1606 Sofia Tel. +359 2 9151160 Fax +359 2 9151166 [email protected] Douala Electro-Services Rue Drouot Akwa B.P. 2024 Douala Tel. +237 33 431137 Fax +237 33 431137 Cameroon Sales 236 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Address List 12 Canada Assembly Sales Service Toronto SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. 210 Walker Drive Bramalea, Ontario L6T3W1 Tel. +1 905 791-1553 Fax +1 905 791-2999 http://www.sew-eurodrive.ca [email protected] Vancouver SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. 7188 Honeyman Street Delta. B.C. V4G 1 E2 Tel. +1 604 946-5535 Fax +1 604 946-2513 [email protected] Montreal SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. 2555 Rue Leger LaSalle, Quebec H8N 2V9 Tel. +1 514 367-1124 Fax +1 514 367-3677 [email protected] Additional addresses for service in Canada provided on request! Chile Assembly Sales Service Santiago de Chile SEW-EURODRIVE CHILE LTDA. Las Encinas 1295 Parque Industrial Valle Grande LAMPA RCH-Santiago de Chile P.O. Box Casilla 23 Correo Quilicura - Santiago - Chile Tel. +56 2 75770-00 Fax +56 2 75770-01 http://www.sew-eurodrive.cl [email protected] Production Assembly Sales Service Tianjin SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. No. 46, 7th Avenue, TEDA Tianjin 300457 Tel. +86 22 25322612 Fax +86 22 25322611 [email protected] http://www.sew-eurodrive.cn Assembly Sales Service Suzhou SEW-EURODRIVE (Suzhou) Co., Ltd. 333, Suhong Middle Road Suzhou Industrial Park Jiangsu Province, 215021 Tel. +86 512 62581781 Fax +86 512 62581783 [email protected] Guangzhou SEW-EURODRIVE (Guangzhou) Co., Ltd. No. 9, JunDa Road East Section of GETDD Guangzhou 510530 Tel. +86 20 82267890 Fax +86 20 82267891 [email protected] Shenyang SEW-EURODRIVE (Shenyang) Co., Ltd. 10A-2, 6th Road Shenyang Economic Technological Development Area Shenyang, 110141 Tel. +86 24 25382538 Fax +86 24 25382580 [email protected] Wuhan SEW-EURODRIVE (Wuhan) Co., Ltd. 10A-2, 6th Road No. 59, the 4th Quanli Road, WEDA 430056 Wuhan Tel. +86 27 84478398 Fax +86 27 84478388 China Additional addresses for service in China provided on request! Colombia Assembly Sales Service Bogotá SEW-EURODRIVE COLOMBIA LTDA. Calle 22 No. 132-60 Bodega 6, Manzana B Santafé de Bogotá Tel. +57 1 54750-50 Fax +57 1 54750-44 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.co [email protected] Zagreb KOMPEKS d. o. o. PIT Erdödy 4 II HR 10 000 Zagreb Tel. +385 1 4613-158 Fax +385 1 4613-158 [email protected] Croatia Sales Service System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 237 Address List 12 Czech Republic Sales Praha SEW-EURODRIVE CZ S.R.O. Business Centrum Praha Lužná 591 CZ-16000 Praha 6 - Vokovice Tel. +420 255 709 601 Fax +420 220 121 237 http://www.sew-eurodrive.cz [email protected] Kopenhagen SEW-EURODRIVEA/S Geminivej 28-30 DK-2670 Greve Tel. +45 43 9585-00 Fax +45 43 9585-09 http://www.sew-eurodrive.dk [email protected] Cairo Copam Egypt for Engineering & Agencies 33 EI Hegaz ST, Heliopolis, Cairo Tel. +20 2 22566-299 + 1 23143088 Fax +20 2 22594-757 http://www.copam-egypt.com/ [email protected] Tallin ALAS-KUUL AS Reti tee 4 EE-75301 Peetri küla, Rae vald, Harjumaa Tel. +372 6593230 Fax +372 6593231 [email protected] Assembly Sales Service Lahti SEW-EURODRIVE OY Vesimäentie 4 FIN-15860 Hollola 2 Tel. +358 201 589-300 Fax +358 3 780-6211 [email protected] http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi Production Assembly Service Karkkila SEW Industrial Gears OY Valurinkatu 6 FIN-03600 Karkkila Tel. +358 201 589-300 Fax +358 201 589-310 [email protected] http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi Libreville Electro-Services B.P. 1889 Libreville Tel. +241 7340-11 Fax +241 7340-12 Normanton SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd. Beckbridge Industrial Estate P.O. Box No.1 GB-Normanton, West- Yorkshire WF6 1QR Tel. +44 1924 893-855 Fax +44 1924 893-702 http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.uk [email protected] Athen Christ. Boznos & Son S.A. 12, Mavromichali Street P.O. Box 80136, GR-18545 Piraeus Tel. +30 2 1042 251-34 Fax +30 2 1042 251-59 http://www.boznos.gr [email protected] Hong Kong SEW-EURODRIVE LTD. Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor Hong Leong Industrial Complex No. 4, Wang Kwong Road Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel. +852 36902200 Fax +852 36902211 [email protected] Denmark Assembly Sales Service Egypt Sales Service Estonia Sales Finland Gabon Sales Great Britain Assembly Sales Service Greece Sales Service Hong Kong Assembly Sales Service 238 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Address List 12 Hungary Sales Service Budapest SEW-EURODRIVE Kft. H-1037 Budapest Kunigunda u. 18 Tel. +36 1 437 06-58 Fax +36 1 437 06-50 [email protected] Vadodara SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Plot No. 4, GIDC POR Ramangamdi • Vadodara - 391 243 Gujarat Tel. +91 265 2831086 Fax +91 265 2831087 http://www.seweurodriveindia.com [email protected] [email protected] Dublin Alperton Engineering Ltd. 48 Moyle Road Dublin Industrial Estate Glasnevin, Dublin 11 Tel. +353 1 830-6277 Fax +353 1 830-6458 [email protected] http://www.alperton.ie Tel-Aviv Liraz Handasa Ltd. Ahofer Str 34B / 228 58858 Holon Tel. +972 3 5599511 Fax +972 3 5599512 http://www.liraz-handasa.co.il [email protected] Milano SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s. Via Bernini,14 I-20020 Solaro (Milano) Tel. +39 02 96 9801 Fax +39 02 96 799781 http://www.sew-eurodrive.it [email protected] Abidjan SICA Ste industrielle et commerciale pour l'Afrique 165, Bld de Marseille B.P. 2323, Abidjan 08 Tel. +225 2579-44 Fax +225 2584-36 Iwata SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD 250-1, Shimoman-no, Iwata Shizuoka 438-0818 Tel. +81 538 373811 Fax +81 538 373814 http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.jp [email protected] Ansan-City SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD. B 601-4, Banweol Industrial Estate 1048-4, Shingil-Dong Ansan 425-120 Tel. +82 31 492-8051 Fax +82 31 492-8056 http://www.sew-korea.co.kr [email protected] Busan SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA Co., Ltd. No. 1720 - 11, Songjeong - dong Gangseo-ku Busan 618-270 Tel. +82 51 832-0204 Fax +82 51 832-0230 [email protected] Riga SIA Alas-Kuul Katlakalna 11C LV-1073 Riga Tel. +371 7139253 Fax +371 7139386 http://www.alas-kuul.com [email protected] India Assembly Sales Service Ireland Sales Service Israel Sales Italy Assembly Sales Service Ivory Coast Sales Japan Assembly Sales Service Korea Assembly Sales Service Latvia Sales System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 239 Address List 12 Lebanon Sales Beirut Gabriel Acar & Fils sarl B. P. 80484 Bourj Hammoud, Beirut Tel. +961 1 4947-86 +961 1 4982-72 +961 3 2745-39 Fax +961 1 4949-71 [email protected] Alytus UAB Irseva Naujoji 19 LT-62175 Alytus Tel. +370 315 79204 Fax +370 315 56175 [email protected] http://www.sew-eurodrive.lt Brüssel CARON-VECTOR S.A. Avenue Eiffel 5 B-1300 Wavre Tel. +32 10 231-311 Fax +32 10 231-336 http://www.sew-eurodrive.lu [email protected] Johore SEW-EURODRIVE SDN BHD No. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya 81000 Johor Bahru, Johor West Malaysia Tel. +60 7 3549409 Fax +60 7 3541404 [email protected] Queretaro SEW-EURODRIVE MEXIKO SA DE CV SEM-981118-M93 Tequisquiapan No. 102 Parque Industrial Queretaro C.P. 76220 Queretaro, Mexico Tel. +52 442 1030-300 Fax +52 442 1030-301 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.mx [email protected] Casablanca Afit 5, rue Emir Abdelkader MA 20300 Casablanca Tel. +212 22618372 Fax +212 22618351 [email protected] Rotterdam VECTOR Aandrijftechniek B.V. Industrieweg 175 NL-3044 AS Rotterdam Postbus 10085 NL-3004 AB Rotterdam Tel. +31 10 4463-700 Fax +31 10 4155-552 http://www.vector.nu [email protected] Auckland SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. P.O. Box 58-428 82 Greenmount drive East Tamaki Auckland Tel. +64 9 2745627 Fax +64 9 2740165 http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.nz [email protected] Christchurch SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. 10 Settlers Crescent, Ferrymead Christchurch Tel. +64 3 384-6251 Fax +64 3 384-6455 [email protected] Moss SEW-EURODRIVE A/S Solgaard skog 71 N-1599 Moss Tel. +47 69 24 10 20 Fax +47 69 24 10 40 http://www.sew-eurodrive.no [email protected] Lithuania Sales Luxembourg Assembly Sales Service Malaysia Assembly Sales Service Mexico Assembly Sales Service Morocco Sales Netherlands Assembly Sales Service New Zealand Assembly Sales Service Norway Assembly Sales Service 240 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Address List 12 Peru Assembly Sales Service Lima SEW DEL PERU MOTORES REDUCTORES S.A.C. Los Calderos, 120-124 Urbanizacion Industrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima Tel. +51 1 3495280 Fax +51 1 3493002 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.pe [email protected] Lodz SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o. ul. Techniczna 5 PL-92-518 £ódŸ Tel. +48 42 67710-90 Fax +48 42 67710-99 http://www.sew-eurodrive.pl [email protected] 24 Hour Service Tel. +48 602 739 739 (+48 602 SEW SEW) [email protected] Coimbra SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA. Apartado 15 P-3050-901 Mealhada Tel. +351 231 20 9670 Fax +351 231 20 3685 http://www.sew-eurodrive.pt [email protected] Bucureºti Sialco Trading SRL str. Madrid nr.4 011785 Bucuresti Tel. +40 21 230-1328 Fax +40 21 230-7170 [email protected] St. Petersburg ZAO SEW-EURODRIVE P.O. Box 36 195220 St. Petersburg Russia Tel. +7 812 3332522 +7 812 5357142 Fax +7 812 3332523 http://www.sew-eurodrive.ru [email protected] Dakar SENEMECA Mécanique Générale Km 8, Route de Rufisque B.P. 3251, Dakar Tel. +221 338 494 770 Fax +221 338 494 771 [email protected] Beograd DIPAR d.o.o. Ustanicka 128a PC Košum, IV floor SCG-11000 Beograd Tel. +381 11 347 3244 / +381 11 288 0393 Fax +381 11 347 1337 [email protected] Singapore SEW-EURODRIVE PTE. LTD. No 9, Tuas Drive 2 Jurong Industrial Estate Singapore 638644 Tel. +65 68621701 Fax +65 68612827 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.sg [email protected] Bratislava SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Rybnièná 40 SK-831 06 Bratislava Tel. +421 2 33595 202 Fax +421 2 33595 200 [email protected] http://www.sew-eurodrive.sk Žilina SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Industry Park – PChZ ulica M.R.Štefánika 71 SK-010 01 Žilina Tel. +421 41 700 2513 Fax +421 41 700 2514 [email protected] Poland Assembly Sales Service Portugal Assembly Sales Service Romania Sales Service Russia Assembly Sales Service Senegal Sales Serbia Sales Singapore Assembly Sales Service Slovakia Sales System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 241 Address List 12 Slovakia Banská Bystrica SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Rudlovská cesta 85 SK-974 11 Banská Bystrica Tel. +421 48 414 6564 Fax +421 48 414 6566 [email protected] Košice SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Slovenská ulica 26 SK-040 01 Košice Tel. +421 55 671 2245 Fax +421 55 671 2254 [email protected] Celje Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o. UI. XIV. divizije 14 SLO - 3000 Celje Tel. +386 3 490 83-20 Fax +386 3 490 83-21 [email protected] Johannesburg SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Eurodrive House Cnr. Adcock Ingram and Aerodrome Roads Aeroton Ext. 2 Johannesburg 2013 P.O.Box 90004 Bertsham 2013 Tel. +27 11 248-7000 Fax +27 11 494-3104 http://www.sew.co.za [email protected] Cape Town SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Rainbow Park Cnr. Racecourse & Omuramba Road Montague Gardens Cape Town P.O.Box 36556 Chempet 7442 Cape Town Tel. +27 21 552-9820 Fax +27 21 552-9830 Telex 576 062 [email protected] Durban SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED 2 Monaceo Place Pinetown Durban P.O. Box 10433, Ashwood 3605 Tel. +27 31 700-3451 Fax +27 31 700-3847 [email protected] Bilbao SEW-EURODRIVE ESPAÑA, S.L. Parque Tecnológico, Edificio, 302 E-48170 Zamudio (Vizcaya) Tel. +34 94 43184-70 Fax +34 94 43184-71 http://www.sew-eurodrive.es [email protected] Jönköping SEW-EURODRIVE AB Gnejsvägen 6-8 S-55303 Jönköping Box 3100 S-55003 Jönköping Tel. +46 36 3442 00 Fax +46 36 3442 80 http://www.sew-eurodrive.se [email protected] Basel Alfred lmhof A.G. Jurastrasse 10 CH-4142 Münchenstein bei Basel Tel. +41 61 417 1717 Fax +41 61 417 1700 http://www.imhof-sew.ch [email protected] Chonburi SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd. 700/456, Moo.7, Donhuaroh Muang Chonburi 20000 Tel. +66 38 454281 Fax +66 38 454288 [email protected] Slovenia Sales Service South Africa Assembly Sales Service Spain Assembly Sales Service Sweden Assembly Sales Service Switzerland Assembly Sales Service Thailand Assembly Sales Service 242 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Address List 12 Tunisia Sales Tunis T. M.S. Technic Marketing Service 5, Rue El Houdaibiah 1000 Tunis Tel. +216 71 4340-64 + 71 4320-29 Fax +216 71 4329-76 [email protected] Istanbul SEW-EURODRIVE Hareket Sistemleri San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti. Bagdat Cad. Koruma Cikmazi No. 3 TR-34846 Maltepe ISTANBUL Tel. +90 216 4419164, 3838014, 3738015 Fax +90 216 3055867 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.tr [email protected] Dnepropetrovsk SEW-EURODRIVE Str. Rabochaja 23-B, Office 409 49008 Dnepropetrovsk Tel. +380 56 370 3211 Fax +380 56 372 2078 http://www.sew-eurodrive.ua [email protected] Production Assembly Sales Service Cooporate Offices Southeast Region SEW-EURODRIVE INC. 1295 Old Spartanburg Highway P.O. Box 518 Lyman, S.C. 29365 Tel. +1 864 439-7537 Fax Sales +1 864 439-7830 Fax Manufacturing +1 864 439-9948 Fax Assembly +1 864 439-0566 Fax Confidential/HR +1 864 949-5557 http://www.seweurodrive.com [email protected] Assembly Sales Service Northeast Region SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Pureland Ind. Complex 2107 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481 Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014 Tel. +1 856 467-2277 Fax +1 856 845-3179 [email protected] Midwest Region SEW-EURODRIVE INC. 2001 West Main Street Troy, Ohio 45373 Tel. +1 937 335-0036 Fax +1 937 440-3799 [email protected] Southwest Region SEW-EURODRIVE INC. 3950 Platinum Way Dallas, Texas 75237 Tel. +1 214 330-4824 Fax +1 214 330-4724 [email protected] Western Region SEW-EURODRIVE INC. 30599 San Antonio St. Hayward, CA 94544 Tel. +1 510 487-3560 Fax +1 510 487-6433 [email protected] Turkey Assembly Sales Service Ukraine Sales Service USA Additional addresses for service in the USA provided on request! Venezuela Assembly Sales Service Valencia System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B SEW-EURODRIVE Venezuela S.A. Av. Norte Sur No. 3, Galpon 84-319 Zona Industrial Municipal Norte Valencia, Estado Carabobo Tel. +58 241 832-9804 Fax +58 241 838-6275 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.ve [email protected] [email protected] 243 Index Index A AC brakemotors, connection.....................................................124 Active current P005.....................................................................86 Actual value description PI1 P873 ............................................111 Actual value description PI2 P874 ............................................111 Actual value description PI3 P875 ............................................111 Addition FBG setpoint generator P121 .......................................94 Addressing ......................................................................79, 80, 82 AI1 characteristic curve x1 P116 ................................................93 AI1 characteristic curve x2 P118 ................................................93 AI1 characteristic curve y1 P117 ................................................93 AI1 characteristic curve y2 P119 ................................................93 AI1 Operating mode P112 ..........................................................92 AI1 Scaling (setpoints for analog input) ......................................92 AI2 Characteristic curve x1 P126................................................95 AI2 Characteristic curve x2 P128................................................95 AI2 Characteristic curve y1 P127................................................95 AI2 Characteristic curve y2 P129................................................95 AI2 Operating mode P120 ..........................................................94 Ambient temperature ..................................................................18 Analog input AI1..........................................................................92 Analog input AI1 P020 ................................................................87 Analog input AI2 P021 ................................................................87 Analog input AI2 (setpoint potentiometer)...................................94 Analog module FIO11B.....................................................179, 183 Analog outputs AO1..................................................................102 Analog setpoint specification ....................................................204 Analog setpoints .........................................................................87 AO1 Analog output P640 ..........................................................103 AO1 Characteristic curve x1 P646............................................103 AO1 Characteristic curve x2 P648............................................103 AO1 Characteristic curve y1 P647............................................103 AO1 Characteristic curve y2 P649............................................103 AO1 Operating mode P642.......................................................103 AO1 Reference P641................................................................103 Application examples ................................................................146 Applications...............................................................................114 Automatic adjustment .................................................................98 Automatic adjustment 1 P320 .....................................................98 Automatic adjustment 2 P330 .....................................................98 Auxiliary voltage output...............................................................20 B Baud rate ......................................................76, 77, 79, 80, 81, 82 Bending space ..........................................................................127 Bimetallic switch TH..................................................................177 Binary input DI00 P030 ...............................................................87 Binary input DI00 P608 .............................................................101 Binary input DI01 P031 ...............................................................87 Binary input DI02 P032 ...............................................................87 Binary input DI02 P601 .............................................................101 Binary input DI03 P033 ...............................................................87 Binary input DI03 P602 .............................................................101 Binary input DI04 P034 ...............................................................87 Binary input DI04 P603 .............................................................101 Binary input DI05 P035 ...............................................................87 Binary input DI05 P604 .............................................................101 Binary inputs .........................................................20, 87, 101, 161 Binary inputs DI00 ... DI05 P039.................................................87 Binary output...............................................................................20 Binary output DO01 P051 ...........................................................87 244 Binary output DO01 P620 ........................................................ 102 Binary output DO02 P052 .......................................................... 87 Binary output DO02 P621 ........................................................ 102 Binary output DO03 P053 .......................................................... 87 Binary output DO03 P622 ........................................................ 102 Binary outputs ............................................................ 87, 102, 161 Binary outputs DO01 ... DO03 P059 .......................................... 87 Boost .......................................................................................... 98 Boost 1 P321.............................................................................. 98 Boost 2 P331.............................................................................. 98 Brake activation........................................................................ 125 Brake application time 1 P732.................................................. 106 Brake application time 2 P735.................................................. 106 Brake operation ........................................................................ 109 Brake parameters..................................................................... 125 Brake rectifier ........................................................................... 125 Brake rectifier, connection........................................................ 178 Brake release time 1 P731 ....................................................... 106 Brake release time 2 P734 ....................................................... 106 Braking resistor BW, connection .............................................. 177 Braking resistors Flat design........................................................................... 122 Grid resistor......................................................................... 122 PTC ..................................................................................... 121 Wire resistor ........................................................................ 122 Braking resistor, connection ..................................................... 160 Braking resistor, flat design ........................................................ 52 Braking resistor, grid resistor...................................................... 53 Braking resistor, project planning ............................................. 120 Braking resistor, PTC ................................................................. 51 Braking resistor, wire resistor ..................................................... 53 Bus diagnostics .......................................................................... 88 Bus termination .............................................................. 76, 78, 81 BW braking resistor .................................................................... 51 BW braking resistors, dimensions .............................................. 56 C Cable cross sections ................................................................ 159 cable cross-sections................................................................. 127 Cable length ............................................................................. 130 Cable lengths ........................................................................... 160 Cable length, RS-485 ............................................................... 183 Cable specification, SBus......................................................... 180 CANopen address P886........................................................... 111 CE-marking ................................................................................ 17 Changing parameters, FBG11B keypad .................................. 190 Churning losses........................................................................ 116 class B limit .............................................................................. 161 Climate class .............................................................................. 18 Cold plate ................................................................................. 174 Communication interface FSC11B ........................................... 179 Connection braking resistor...................................................... 160 Connection technology................................. 76, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82 Connector X31 binary inputs and outputs............................................... 84 Contactor.................................................................................. 159 Control card type DHP11B LEDs...................................................................................... 84 Control functions ...................................................................... 104 Control signal source P101 ........................................................ 90 Control signals, interrelation..................................................... 142 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Index Controller parameters .................................................................96 Cooling type ................................................................................18 Copy DBG -> MOVITRAC® B P806 .........................................108 Copy MOVITRAC® B -> DBG P807 .........................................108 Core cross section ....................................................................127 CSA.............................................................................................17 cUL..............................................................................................17 Current limit 1 P303 ....................................................................98 Current limit 2 P313 ....................................................................98 Current parameter set P013 .......................................................87 Current reference value P430.....................................................99 D Data backup..............................................................................219 DBG60B...............................................................................219 FBG11B ...............................................................................219 MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio...............................................220 UBP11A ...............................................................................219 DBG60B......................................................................................44 DBG60B keypad .........................................................................44 Setting parameters ..............................................................201 Startup .................................................................................195 DBG60B, displays.....................................................................223 DBG60B, manual operation ......................................................201 DC link voltage P008 ..................................................................86 Deactiving EMC capacitors.......................................................174 Degree of protection ...................................................................18 Degree of protection, braking resistors .......................................52 Delay time P402..........................................................................99 Delay time P432..........................................................................99 Delay time P441........................................................................100 Delay time 1 P501.....................................................................100 Delay time 2 P503.....................................................................100 DeviceNet DFD11B.....................................................................77 DFD11B DeviceNet.....................................................................77 DFE24B EtherCat .......................................................................78 DFE32B PROFINET .......................................................79, 80, 82 DFP21B PROFIBUS .............................................................76, 81 Direction of rotation...................................................................192 Direction of rotation FBG manual operation P122 ......................94 Display values.............................................................................86 DP configuration ...................................................................76, 81 DP ident number ...................................................................76, 81 Dynamic applications ................................................................116 E Earth-leakage circuit breaker ....................................................162 Earth-leakage monitor.......................................................125, 159 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC ..........................................133 Electronics cables .....................................................................139 Electronics service ....................................................................233 Electronics shield clamps..........................................................170 Electronics data ..........................................................................20 EMC ..........................................................................................133 EMC limits.................................................................................161 EMC-compliant installation .......................................................159 EMC-module FKE .......................................................................68 Energy-saving function P770 ....................................................108 Enter (FBG11B keypad)............................................................188 EtherCat DFE24B .......................................................................78 Extended storage......................................................................234 External setpoint potentiometer ................................................146 External setpoint selection ........................................................192 External voltage supply...............................................................20 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B External voltage supply DC 24 V.............................................. 139 F Factory setting.......................................................................... 108 Factory setting P802 ................................................................ 108 Fault F01 Overcurrent .................................................................. 230 F03 Ground fault ................................................................. 230 F04 Brake chopper.............................................................. 230 F06 Mains phase failure ...................................................... 230 F07 DC link overvoltage ...................................................... 230 F08 Speed monitoring ......................................................... 230 F09 Startup error ................................................................. 230 F10 ILLOP ........................................................................... 231 F11 Overtemperature .......................................................... 231 F113 Wire breakage analog input ....................................... 233 F17 ... F24 System error ..................................................... 231 F25 EEPROM...................................................................... 231 F26 External terminal .......................................................... 231 F31 TF sensor tripped ......................................................... 231 F32 Index overflow .............................................................. 231 F34 Ramp timeout............................................................... 231 F36 Option missing ............................................................. 231 F37 Wachtdog timer ............................................................ 231 F38 System software........................................................... 231 F43 RS-485 timeout ............................................................ 231 F44 Unit utilization............................................................... 232 F45 Initialization .................................................................. 232 F47 System bus 1 timeout................................................... 232 F77 Control word................................................................. 232 F81 Start condition .............................................................. 232 F82 Open output ................................................................. 232 F84 UL motor protection...................................................... 232 F94 EEPROM checksum .................................................... 232 F97 Copy error .................................................................... 232 Fault list .................................................................................... 230 Fault memory ..................................................................... 88, 228 Fault responses........................................................................ 109 Fault status P012 ....................................................................... 87 Fault t-0 ... t-4 P080 ... P084 ...................................................... 88 Fault, FBG11B keypad ............................................................. 190 FBG11B...................................................................................... 41 FBG11B keypad ................................................................. 41, 188 Functions............................................................................. 188 Operation............................................................................. 189 Startup................................................................................. 193 Fieldbus connection ................................................................... 73 Fieldbus gateways...................................................................... 73 Fieldbus interface DeviceNet DFD11B ............................................................... 77 EtherCat DFE24B.................................................................. 78 PROFIBUS DFP21B ....................................................... 76, 81 PROFINET DFE32B.................................................. 79, 80, 82 Fieldbus parameter setting....................................................... 110 FIO11B ....................................................................................... 43 FIO11B analog module .............................................. 43, 179, 183 Firmware basic unit P076........................................................... 87 Firmware DBG P077 .................................................................. 87 Fixed setpoints ................................................................... 96, 206 FI1 characteristic curve x1 P106 ................................................ 91 FI1 characteristic curve x2 P108 ................................................ 91 FI1 characteristic curve y1 P107 ................................................ 91 FI1 characteristic curve y2 P109 ................................................ 91 FI1 reference P103..................................................................... 91 FKE EMC-module .............................................................. 68, 166 Flat design................................................................................ 122 245 Index Flat-design braking resistor.........................................................52 Flat-design resistor, submounting...............................................59 Flat-design resistor, support rail mounting..................................60 Foldable ferrites ULF ................................................................164 Folding ferrites ULF11A ..............................................................65 Frequency input FI1 characteristic curve ....................................91 Frequency P002..........................................................................86 Frequency scaling P102 .............................................................90 Front option FBG11B keypad .....................................................41 Front option FIO11B analog module...........................................43 Front option FSC11B communication .........................................42 FSC11B ......................................................................................42 FSC11B communication interface ......................................42, 179 Fusing .......................................................................................127 G GOST-R ......................................................................................17 Grid resistor ..............................................................................122 Grid resistor, braking resistor......................................................53 Group drive .......................................................................132, 195 GSD file.................................................................................76, 81 H HD output choke .................................................................65, 165 Heat sink temperature...............................................................118 Heat sink temperature P014 .......................................................87 HF output filter ............................................................69, 136, 164 Hoists ........................................................................................114 Hysteresis P401..........................................................................99 Hysteresis P431..........................................................................99 Hysteresis P440........................................................................100 I I-component P252.......................................................................97 Ident number.........................................................................76, 81 Immediate stop/fault............................................................91, 109 Immediate switch-off .................................................................228 IN UL monitoring 1 P345.............................................................98 IN UL monitoring 2 P346.............................................................98 Input contactor ..........................................................................126 Input fuses ................................................................................126 Installation altitude ......................................................................19 Installation notes .......................................................................157 Interference emission........................................................134, 161 Interference immunity .........................................................18, 134 Interference emission..................................................................18 Internal fixed setpoint n11 P160 .................................................96 Internal setpoint n12 P161 ..........................................................96 Internal setpoint n13 P162 ..........................................................96 Internal setpoint n21 P170 ..........................................................96 Internal setpoint n22 P171 ..........................................................96 Internal setpoint n23 P172 ..........................................................96 Interrelation between control signals ........................................142 Inverter status P010....................................................................87 Inverter/motor combinations .....................................................117 IT system ..................................................................................125 IT systems.................................................................135, 159, 174 IxR adjustment ............................................................................98 IxR adjustment 1 P322................................................................98 IxR adjustment 2 P332................................................................98 246 K Keypad Status of binary inputs/outputs ............................................ 221 Keypad DBG60B Setting parameters .............................................................. 201 Startup................................................................................. 195 Keypad FBG11B ...................................................................... 188 Functions............................................................................. 188 Operation............................................................................. 189 Startup................................................................................. 193 Keypad, status displays............................................................ 221 L Language DBG60B P801......................................................... 108 Leakage current ......................................................................... 18 Leakage currents...................................................................... 135 LEDs........................................................................................... 84 LED, flash codes ...................................................................... 222 Limit class................................................................................. 161 Limit value class ....................................................................... 134 Limits .......................................................................................... 97 Line choke ................................................................................ 163 Line chokes .............................................................................. 133 Line filters ................................................................................. 161 Line length, SBus ..................................................................... 182 Line protection.................................................................. 127, 162 Lock RUN/STOP keys P760 .................................................... 107 Loose items .............................................................................. 169 Low output frequencies ............................................................ 119 M Mains connection ..................................................................... 125 Manual operation...................................................................... 107 Manual operation with FBG11B keypad................................... 191 Manual operation, DBG60B ..................................................... 201 Manual reset P840 ................................................................... 109 Manual speed control module .................................................. 191 Maximum speed 1 P302............................................................. 97 Maximum speed 2 P312............................................................. 97 MBG11A..................................................................................... 48 MBG11A setpoint control module............................................... 48 MBG11A speed control module ....................................... 184, 202 Minimum clearance .................................................................. 158 Minimum speed 1 P301.............................................................. 97 Minimum speed 2 P311.............................................................. 97 Modulation................................................................................ 110 Monitoring functions ................................................................. 100 Motor adjustment........................................................................ 98 Motor cable length.................................................................... 130 Motor cable, voltage drop......................................................... 131 Motor connection.............................................................. 124, 125 Motor lead ................................................................................ 159 Motor parameters ....................................................................... 97 Motor potentiometer ................................................................... 96 Motor selection ......................................................................... 116 Motor, starting .......................................................................... 204 Mounting position ..................................................................... 158 MOVI-PLC® ............................................................................... 83 MOVI-PLC® controller................................................................ 83 MOVITOOLS® MotionStudio, startup ...................................... 202 Multi-motor drive............................................................... 132, 195 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Index N Nameplate.................................................................................156 ND line choke......................................................................61, 163 NF line filter.........................................................................63, 163 O Oil aging / overtemperature P544 .............................................101 Oil aging / ready signal P545 ....................................................101 Operating mode ..........................................................................18 Operating mode 1 P700............................................................105 Operating mode 2 P701............................................................105 Operating modes ......................................................................104 Operating states, priority...........................................................142 Operating status P011 ................................................................87 out (FBG11B keypad) ...............................................................188 Output current P004....................................................................86 Output current P009....................................................................87 Output frequency, load capacity ...............................................119 Overload capacity .....................................................................118 Overvoltage category..................................................................18 P Parameter list............................................................................208 Parameter lock P803 ................................................................108 Parameter module UBP11A........................................................47 Parameter set .............................................................................87 Parameter set switchover .........................................................141 Parameters Control functions ..................................................................104 Control functions / speed monitoring ...................................100 Control functions/manual operation .....................................107 Control functions/operating modes ......................................104 Controller parameters ............................................................96 Controller parameters/PI controller ........................................96 Display values........................................................................86 Display values/analog setpoints ............................................87 Display values/binary inputs ..................................................87 Display values/binary outputs ................................................87 Display values/bus diagnostics ..............................................88 Display values/fault memory ..................................................88 Display values/process values...............................................86 Display values/status displays ...............................................87 Display values/unit data .........................................................87 Monitoring functions.............................................................100 Motor parameters ..................................................................97 Motor parameters/limits .........................................................97 Motor parameters/motor adjustment......................................98 Reference signals ..................................................................99 Reference signals/PI controller reference signal .................100 Reference signals/speed reference signal.............................99 Setpoints/ramp generators ....................................................88 Setpoints/ramp generators/analog input AI1 .........................92 Setpoints/ramp generators/analog input AI2 .........................94 Setpoints/ramp generators/fixed setpoints 1..........................96 Setpoints/ramp generators/motor potentiometer ...................96 Setpoints/ramp generators/setpoint potentiometer ................94 Setpoints/ramp generators/setpoint selection........................88 Setpoints/ramp generators/speed ramps...............................95 Terminal assignment ...........................................................101 Terminal assignment/binary inputs ......................................101 Unit functions .......................................................................108 Unit functions/fault responses..............................................109 Unit functions/fieldbus parameter setting.............................110 Unit functions/modulation ....................................................110 Unit functions/reset behavior ...............................................109 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Unit functions/Serial communication ................................... 109 Unit functions/setup............................................................. 108 Parameter-setting data......................................................... 76, 81 Parametes Unit functions/brake operation............................................. 109 Parametesr Terminal assignment/binary outputs ................................... 102 PC startup ................................................................................ 202 PE mains connection................................................................ 162 Peak braking power.................................................................. 120 Permitted voltage supply system.............................................. 125 P-gain P251................................................................................ 97 PI actual value mode (controller parameters PI controller) ........ 97 PI actual value reference P450 ................................................ 100 PI actual value scaling (controller parameters PI controller) ...... 97 PI actual value threshold .......................................................... 145 PI controller ........................................................................ 96, 143 PI controller n11 P163................................................................ 96 PI controller n12 P164................................................................ 96 PI controller n13 P165................................................................ 96 PI controller n21 P173................................................................ 96 PI controller n22 P174................................................................ 96 PI controller n23 P175................................................................ 96 PI controller P250....................................................................... 97 PI controller reference signal.................................................... 100 PI 1 Actual value P097 ............................................................... 88 PI 2 Actual value P098 ............................................................... 88 PI 3 Actual value P099 ............................................................... 88 PI-controller PI actual value threshold ..................................................... 145 PO data enable P876 ............................................................... 111 PO 1 Setpoint P094.................................................................... 88 PO 2 Setpoint P095.................................................................... 88 PO 3 Setpoint P096.................................................................... 88 Pollution class ............................................................................ 18 Power shield clamps ................................................................ 170 Premagnetization time................................................................ 98 Premagnetization time 1 P323 ................................................... 98 Premagnetization time 2 P333 ................................................... 98 pressure control........................................................................ 143 Priority of operating states........................................................ 142 Process input data words ......................................................... 111 Process output data words....................................................... 110 Process values ........................................................................... 86 PROFIBUS DFP21B ............................................................ 76, 81 PROFINET DFE32B....................................................... 79, 80, 82 Project planning........................................................................ 112 Protocol options.................................................. 76, 79, 80, 81, 82 Protocol SBus P880 ................................................................. 111 PTC braking resistor................................................................... 51 PTC braking resistors............................................................... 121 PWM fix 1 P862........................................................................ 110 PWM fix 2 P863........................................................................ 110 PWM frequency................................................................ 110, 118 PWM frequency 1 P860 ........................................................... 110 PWM frequency 2 P861 ........................................................... 110 P0__ Display values................................................................... 86 P110 AI1 Scaling (setpoints for analog input) ............................ 92 P113 Setpoint voltage offset (setpoints for analog input)........... 93 P152 Save last setpoint.............................................................. 96 P253 PI actual value mode (controller parameters PI controller)97 P254 PI actual value scaling (controller parameters PI controller) ........................................ 97 P255 PI actual value scaling (controller parameters PI controller) ........................................ 97 247 Index P300 Start/stop speed 1 .............................................................97 R Ramp t11 down P131 .................................................................95 Ramp t11 up P130 ......................................................................95 Ramp t21 down P141 .................................................................95 Ramp t21 up P140 ......................................................................95 Ramp t3 motor potentiometer P150............................................96 Rated output current P071..........................................................87 Reference signals .......................................................................99 Relay output................................................................................20 Repair service ...........................................................................233 Reset.........................................................................................229 Basic unit .............................................................................229 Interface ...............................................................................229 Keypad.................................................................................229 Reset behavior..........................................................................109 Reset statistics data P804 ........................................................108 Response to brake wear P549..................................................101 Response to drive vibration / fault P541 ...................................101 Response to drive vibration / warning P540 .............................101 Response to oil aging / fault P543 ............................................101 Response to oil aging / warning P542 ......................................101 Response to RS-485 timeout P833 ..........................................109 Response to SBus timeout P836 ..............................................109 Response to /EXT. FAULT P830 ..............................................109 Return code 19 Parameter lock activated ................................................220 20 Factory setting in progress .............................................220 23 Option card missing ........................................................220 27 Option card missing ........................................................220 28 Controller inhibit required................................................220 29 Invalid value for parameter .............................................220 32 Enable.............................................................................220 34 Fault during execution ....................................................220 38 FBG11B incorrect data set .............................................220 Return codes.............................................................................220 RS-485 address ........................................................................109 RS-485 address P810...............................................................109 RS-485 group address P811 ....................................................109 RS-485 remote timeout P812 ...................................................109 RS-485, installation...................................................................183 RUN (FBG11B keypad) ............................................................188 S S pattern t12 P135 ......................................................................95 S pattern t22 P145 ......................................................................95 Safety contact .............................................................................21 Safety Notes .................................................................................7 SBus address............................................................................111 SBus address P881 ..................................................................111 SBus baud rate P884................................................................111 SBus group address P882 ........................................................111 SBus timeout interval P883.......................................................111 Scaled speed FBG P853 ..........................................................110 Scaling slave setpoint P751......................................................107 Scope of delivery ......................................................................169 Serial communication................................................................109 Set direction of rotation .............................................................192 Setpoint description PO1 P870.................................................110 Setpoint description PO2 P871.................................................110 Setpoint description PO3 P872.................................................110 Setpoint input ..............................................................................20 Setpoint potentiometer..........................................................89, 96 248 Setpoint reference speed P104.................................................. 91 Setpoint selection ....................................................................... 88 Setpoint selection, external ...................................................... 192 Setpoint source P100 ................................................................. 88 Setpoint specification, analog................................................... 204 Setpoint speed ......................................................................... 192 Setpoint stop function 1 P720 .................................................. 106 Setpoint stop function 2 P723 .................................................. 106 Setpoint voltage offset (setpoints for analog input) .................... 93 Setpoints/ramp generators ......................................................... 88 Setting parameters with the DBG60B keypad.......................... 201 Setup ........................................................................................ 108 Shield plate for control electronics ........................................... 170 Shield plate for power section .................................................. 170 Shielding................................................................................... 139 Short menu FBG11B P800....................................................... 108 Signal generation ..................................................................... 139 Signal = "1" when P403...................................................... 99, 100 Signal = "1" when P433.............................................................. 99 Signal = "1" when P442............................................................ 100 Skip width 1 P741..................................................................... 106 Skip width 2 P743..................................................................... 106 Skip window center 1 P740 ...................................................... 106 Skip window center 2 P742 ...................................................... 106 Slave setpoint P750 ................................................................. 107 Slip compensation ...................................................................... 98 Slip compensation 1 P324.......................................................... 98 Slip compensation 2 P334.......................................................... 98 Smallest bending space ........................................................... 127 Speed control module MBG11A............................................... 184 Speed control module MBG11A, startup.................................. 202 Speed control module, manual................................................. 191 Speed monitoring ..................................................................... 100 Speed monitoring 1 P500......................................................... 100 Speed monitoring 2 P502......................................................... 100 Speed P000................................................................................ 86 Speed ramps .............................................................................. 95 Speed reference signal .............................................................. 99 Speed reference value P400...................................................... 99 Speed-torque characteristic curve............................................ 115 Standard applications............................................................... 113 Standstill current function 1 P710............................................. 105 Standstill current function 2 P711............................................. 105 Start offset 1 P722.................................................................... 106 Start offset 2 P725.................................................................... 106 Startup Brief description................................................................... 185 Hoist applications ................................................................ 186 Notes ................................................................................... 186 Preliminary work and resources .......................................... 187 Preliminary work and resources basic unit.......................... 187 Preliminary work and resources using keypad.................... 187 Prerequisite ......................................................................... 186 Startup for MBG11A speed control module.............................. 202 Startup with DBG60B keypad................................................... 195 Startup with FBG11B keypad ................................................... 193 Startup with PC ........................................................................ 202 Start/stop speed 2 P310............................................................. 97 Station address .............................................................. 76, 78, 81 Status displays ........................................................................... 87 Keypad ................................................................................ 221 LED, flash codes ................................................................. 222 Status of binary inputs/outputs ............................................ 221 Status display, FBG11B keypad............................................... 190 Stop .......................................................................................... 228 Stop ramp t13 up = down P134.................................................. 95 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B Index Stop ramp t13 up = down P136 ..................................................95 Stop ramp t13 up = down P139 ..................................................96 Stop ramp t23 up = down P144 ..................................................95 Stop ramp t23 up = down P146 ..................................................95 Stop ramp t23 up = down P149 ..................................................96 Stop setpoint 1 P721.................................................................106 Stop setpoint 2 P724.................................................................106 STOP / RESET (FBG11B keypad) ...........................................188 Stop/fault.............................................................................91, 109 Storage temperature ...................................................................18 Submounting flat-design resistor ................................................59 Supply system contactor...........................................................163 Supply system lead...................................................................159 Support rail mounting flat-design resistor ...................................60 Switched-mode power supply UWU52A .....................................85 Switch-off response Immediate switch-off ............................................................228 stop ......................................................................................228 Switch-off responses.................................................................228 Switchover parameter set .........................................................141 System overview.........................................................................11 Systembus (SBus), installation .................................................181 UL compliant installation .......................................................... 167 ULF11A folding ferrites............................................................... 65 Unit data ..................................................................................... 87 Unit design ............................................................................... 152 Size 0XS / 0S / 0L ............................................................... 152 Size 1 / 2S / 2 ...................................................................... 153 Size 3 .................................................................................. 154 Size 4 / 5 ............................................................................. 155 Unit designation........................................................................ 156 Unit functions............................................................................ 108 Unit information ........................................................................ 228 Unit status ................................................................................ 156 Unit status codes...................................................................... 222 Unit type P070............................................................................ 87 USB11A...................................................................................... 50 USB11A interface adapter.......................................................... 50 User display P001 ...................................................................... 86 UWS11A..................................................................................... 49 UWS11A interface adapter......................................................... 49 UWS21B..................................................................................... 50 UWS21B interface adapter......................................................... 50 UWU52A switched-mode power supply ..................................... 85 T V Technical data AC 230 V / 1-phase / size 0XS ..............................................31 AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 2 ...................................................38 AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 3 ...................................................39 AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 4 ...................................................40 AC 230 V /1-phase / size 0L ..................................................33 AC 230 V /1-phase / size 0S..................................................32 AC 230 V /3-phase / size 0L ..................................................36 AC 230 V / 3-phase / size 0XS ..............................................34 AC 400/500 V / 3-phase / size 0L ..........................................25 AC 400/500 V / 3-phase / size 0S..........................................24 AC 400/500 V / 3-phase / size 0XS .......................................23 AC 400/500 V / 3-phase / size 2 ............................................27 AC 400/500 V / 3-phase / size 2S..........................................26 AC 400/500 V / 3-phase / size 3 ............................................28 AC 400/500 V / 3-phase / size 4 ............................................29 AC 400/500 V / 3-phase / size 5 ............................................30 DFP21B option ................................................................76, 81 Technical data, general...............................................................18 Technical data, overview ............................................................22 Temperature control..................................................................143 Terminal assignment.................................................................101 Terminal response times.............................................................21 TF................................................................................................20 TF thermistor.............................................................................177 TH bimetallic switch ..................................................................177 thermal class F..........................................................................116 Thermistor.................................................................................116 Thermistor TF ...........................................................................177 Timeout (warning) .....................................................................229 TN system.................................................................................125 Touch guard..............................................................................172 Touch guard BS ..........................................................................58 Transportation temperature ........................................................18 Trolleys .....................................................................................114 TT system .................................................................................125 VFC .......................................................................................... 194 Voltage drop ............................................................................. 131 Voltage drop motor cable ......................................................... 127 Voltage supply system ............................................................. 125 Voltage supply, external DC 24 V ............................................ 139 Voltage-frequency characteristic curve .................................... 116 V/f ............................................................................................. 194 W Warnings, FBG11B keypad...................................................... 190 Wire breakage detection P105 ................................................... 91 Wire resistor ............................................................................. 122 Wire resistor, braking resistor..................................................... 53 Wiring diagram 230 V 3.7 ... 30 kW / 400 V 5.5 ... 75 kW ........ 176 X XML file ...................................................................................... 78 0 ... 9 4-quadrant operation 1 P820.................................................... 109 4-quadrant operation 2 P821.................................................... 109 U UBP11A ......................................................................................47 UL approval.................................................................................17 System Manual V2 – MOVITRAC® B 249 Startup: Brief Description The MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter can be connected directly to a motor of the same power. Example: A motor with 1.5 kW (2.0 HP) can be connected directly to a MC07B0015. Procedure 1. Connect the motor to MOVITRAC® B (terminal X2). 1-phase 3-phase PE 2. You have the option of connecting a braking resistor (terminal X2/X3). 3. The following signal terminals must be controlled with your control system: • Enable DI∅3 • As required, CW/Stop DI∅1 or CCW/ Stop DI∅2 • REF1 Reference potential analog signals Setpoint: • Analog input (X10) or / and • DI∅4 = n11 = 150 rpm or / and • DI∅5 = n12 = 750 rpm or / and • DI∅4 + DI∅5 = n13 = 1500 rpm Fault reset CW/stop CCW/stop Enable/stop* n13 = n11 + n12 Supply voltage input/output Reference potential binary signals 24VIO For brakemotors: DO∅2 = Brake control via brake rectifier Reference potential Brake released* Ready Reference potential 4. You have the option of connecting the following signal termianls: DI∅∅ = Error reset • DO∅1 = /Malfunction (designed as a relay contact) Relay contact/fault NOC relay NCC relay • • GND } • Changeover X2 X3 PE DO∅3 = Ready 5. Check the controller for the required functionality. 6. Connect the frequency inverter to the power supply system (X1). Shield clamp Factory setting 3-phase Notes Signal terminal functions and setpoint settings can be modified using the FBG11B keypad or a PC. A PC connection requires the FSC11B front option or one of the following interface adapters: UWS21B / UWS11A / USB11A. Note Operate the MOVITRAC® B frequency inverter only in strict observance of the detailed operating instructions! Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services How we’re driving the world With people who think fast and develop the future with you. With a worldwide service network that is always close at hand. With comprehensive knowledge in virtually every branch of industry today. With drives and controls that automatically improve your productivity. With uncompromising quality that reduces the cost and complexity of daily operations. SEW-EURODRIVE Driving the world With a global presence that offers responsive and reliable solutions. Anywhere. With innovative technology that solves tomorrow’s problems today. With online information and software updates, via the Internet, available around the clock. SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG P.O. Box 3023 · D-76642 Bruchsal / Germany Phone +49 7251 75-0 · Fax +49 7251 75-1970 [email protected] www.sew-eurodrive.com
advertisement
Key Features
- Wide voltage range (230 V and 400/500 V)
- Overload capacity (125% IN continuous, 150% IN for 60 s)
- Speed range (0 ... 5500 rpm)
- 4-quadrant capability
- Compact design
- Integrated EMC line filter
- Configurable inputs/outputs
- Integrated keypad
- Sub-mountable braking resistor
- Communication interfaces (CANopen, RS-485, PROFIBUS, DeviceNet, INTERBUS, Ethernet)
Frequently Answers and Questions
What is the MOVITRAC B's overload capacity?
The MOVITRAC B can handle 125% IN continuous duty and 150% IN for at least 60 seconds.
What is the speed range of the MOVITRAC B?
The MOVITRAC B has a speed range of 0 ... 5500 rpm.
What communication interfaces are available for the MOVITRAC B?
The MOVITRAC B offers communication interfaces for CANopen, RS-485, PROFIBUS, DeviceNet, INTERBUS, and Ethernet.
Related manuals
Download
PDF
advertisement